Skip to main content

Full text of "Colloquial Arabic; with notes on the vernacular speech of Egypt, Syria, and Mesopotamia, and an appendix on the local characteristics of Algerian dialect"

See other formats


Digitized  by  tine  Internet  Arcliive 

in  2007  witli  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


littpV/www.arcliive.org/details/colloquialarabicOOoleauoft 


^1  0 


(&    ^ 


COLLOQUIAL   ARABIC 


Uniform 

with  this 

Volume 

Colloquial 

Chinese 

Colloquial 

French 

Colloquial 

German 

Colloquial 

Hindustani                   | 

Colloquial 

Italian 

Colloquial 

Japanese 

Colloquial 

Spanish 

Language-Student's 

Manual 

Crown  8vo. 

London  : 

Kegan    Paul,    Trench, 

Trubner 

& 

Co.,    Ltd 

COLLOQUIAL 
ARABIC 


WITH    NOTES    OX    THE    VERNACULAR    SPEECH 

OF  EGYPT,  SYRIA,  AND  MESOPOTAMIA.  AND  AX 

APPENDIX    ON    THE    LOCAL    CHARACTERISTICS 

OF  ALGERIAN    DIALECT 


By 
DE    LACY   O'LEARY,    D.D. 


LONDON 

KEGAN  PAUL,  TRENCH,  TRUBNER  &  CO.,  LTD. 

NEWjYORK:   E.  P.  DUTTON  &  CO. 


J'rinfea  in    (ireat  Britain  by  Stephen   Austin  &f  Sons,   I.ta.,    J/ertfoni. 


CONTENTS 

PAGE 

Preface ix 

CHAPTEK 

I.  Preliminary 1 

II.  Pronunciation    ......  9 

Consonants — long  vowels  and  diphthongs — 
short  vowels — word  structure — differences 
of  dialect. 

III.  The    First    Lesson — The    Noun    and    the 

Simple  Nominal  Sentence      .         .        .        21 

Nouns— defined  and  undefined — use  of  the 
adjective — genders — the  nominal  statement 
— interrogative  sentences. 

Word  list. 

Exercise. 

Appendix — Variations  of  the  interrogative 
pronouns  in  the  leading  dialects. 

IV.  The  Second   Lesson — The    Personal    Pro- 
nouns and  the  Negative  Sentence        .        34 

Forms  of  the  personal  pronoun  (separate) — 
use  in  the  sentence — manner  of  forming 
the  negative  sentence. 

Word  list. 

Exercise. 

Appendix — Forms  used  in  address. 


vi  CONTENTS 

CHAPTER  VXU: 

V.  The  Third  Lesson — The  Personal  Pronoun 

AS  Suffixes 'lt> 

Forms  of  the  suffixed  pronoun — ^use — influence 
on  the  noun — suffixed  to  feminine  nouns — 
the  *'  nouns  of  kinship  " — colloquial 
expressions  denoting  "  property  ". 

Word  list. 

Exercise, 

Appendix — Gentile  nouns  in  -i. 

VI.  The  Fourth  Lesson — The  Suffixed  Pro- 
nouns with  Prepositions      ...        48 

The  commoner  prepositions — suffixed  pronoun 
attached — special  use  of  fih — special 
negative  employed  in  Syrian  Arabic — 
ways  of  expressing  "have". 

Word  list. 

Exercise. 

Additional  examples. 

VII.  The  Fifth  Lesson — The  Demonstratives  and 

Kelatives 55 

Demonstratives  (i)  "this",  (ii)  "this  (is)", 

(iii)  "  that  "  ;  summary  of  forms  according 

to  dialects. 
Examples. 

Relative  pronoun,  form  and  use. 
Word  list. 
Exercise  (A)  use  of  demonstrative  according 

to  dialects  of  Egjrpt,  Syria,  and  'Iraq. 
Exercise    (B) — use    of    demonstrative    and 

relative. 


CONTENTS  vii 


liiPTF.K 


PAGK 


\'III.  The  Sixth  I*essox— The  Plurals  of  Nouns  .        66 

Strong  Plural  (i)  masculine,  and  (ii)  feminine. 
Dual.    Broken  Plurals. 

Word  list,    nouns  forming   strong  plurals : 
broken  plurals  of  types  qitdl,  qutul. 

Exercise. 

IX.  The  Seventh  Lesson — The  Numerals  .         .        72 

Cardinal  numerals,  ordinal  numerals. 

Expression  of  price,  of  time.  Arithmetical 
processes. 

Examples. 

Word  list :  broken  plurals  of  type  qiUul, 
qutal,  qital,  quttol. 

Exercise. 

X.  The  Eighth  Lesson— The  GE^^TIVE      .        .        81 

The  true  genitive,  form  and  mode  of  use. 
Use  of  beta,  etc.  Formal  genitive.  Formal 
genitive  with  adjective. 

Special  use  of  "  master  ",  "  father ",  etc. 
Expression  of  "all  every  ",  "  part  ", "  like  ", 
"  unUke  ". 

Word  list.  Broken  plurals  of  type  aqtdl, 
qitldn,  qutldn. 

Exercise. 

Additional  examples. 

XI.  The    Ninth    Lesson — Adjectives    of    the 

Measure  ^Qr^L 91 


vyi  CONTENTS 

CHAl'TKll  TACiE 

Comparative  superlative.  Adjectives  denoting 

colour,  those  denoting  bodily  defects. 
Word  list. 
Exercise. 

XII.  The    Tenth    Lesson — The    Verb,    Perfect 

Tense,  Regular  Form  ....        97 

General  idea  of  the  verb.  The  tenses.  Perfect 
tense.  Verb  with  suffixes.  Negative  verb. 
Interrogative  verb.  Note  on  the  use  of  the 
persons. 

Word  list. 
Exercise. 

XIII,  The  Eleventh  Lesson — The  Imperfect  Tense 

OF  THE  Regular  Verb     ....       105 

Form  of  imperfect.  Colloquial  prefixed  be-,  bi-. 

Imperfect  with  suffixes.    Interrogative  and 

negative.    Principal  and  subordinate  verbs. 

Imperfect  modified  to  express  present — to 

express  future. 
Word  list. 
Exercise. 

XIV.  The  Twelfth  Lesson — The  Imperative,  the 

Participles,  the  Passive        .         .         .113 

Imperative  form,  suffixes,  use.  Imperfect  used 
for  the  imperative  in  negative  command, 
etc.     Active  participle,  form,  use. 

Passive  participle,  form,  use. 

The  passive  voice. 

Word  list. 

Exercise. 


CONTENTS  ix 

CHAPTER  PAGE 

XV.  The  Thirteenth  Lesson — The  Derived  Stems 

OF  the  Verb  .....       123 

(D)  The  doubled  medial.  (D*)  Shortened 
form  of  the  doubled  medial.  Reflexive  (t, 
'Dt,  D*t,  St). 

Summary. 

Word  list. 

Exercise. 

Appendix  :  Table  of  derived  stems  including 
those  rare  in  colloquial  speech. 

XVI.  The  Fourteenth  Lesson — Verbs  with  Weak 

Initial 132 

Verbs  with  initial  Hamza  : — khad,  kal. 
Verbs  with  initial  w  :  with  initial  y. 
Word  list. 
Exercise. 

XVII.  The  Fifteenth   Lesson — Verbs  with  Weak 

Medial 138 

Verbs  with  medial  -w-  :  with  medial  -y-. 
Word  list — Exercise. 

XVIII.  The  Sixteenth  Lesson — Verbs  with  Final 

Weak 149 

Verbs  with  final  -w  :    with  final  -y.     Final 

Hamza. 
Word  list. 
Exercise. 


X  CONTENTS 

CHAPTEB  PAOK 

XIX,  The     Seventeenth     Lesson — Verbs     with 

REPEATED  MeDIAL  :  MoDERN  TeNSE  FoRMS        156 

Verbs  with  medial  and  final  alike. 
Modern  tense  formations. 
Word  list. 
Exercise 

XX.  The     Eighteenth     Lesson — Use     of     the 

Participles 162 

Prepositions,  nouns  used  as  prepositions,  con- 
junctions, conditional  sentences,  sentences 
expressing  purpose,  manner  of  translating 
some  of  the  commoner  English  prepositions. 

Appendix  I.    Conversation 171 

(i)  Ordinary  Courtesies, 
(ii)  In  a  hotel  or  restaurant, 
(iii)  In  a  shop, 
(iv)  Military. 

Appendix  II.    The  Call  to  Prayer        .        .        .177 

Appendix  III.  The  Suratu  l-Fatihah    .         .         .      178 

Appendix  IV.    The  Algerian  Dialect 

Vocabularies 

(i)  Nouns, 
(ii)  Adjectives, 
(iii)  Verbs. 


PREFACE 

^PHIS  manual  aims  at  providing  an  easy  guide  to  the 
colloquial  Arabic  of  Egypt,  Syria,  and  Mesopotamia. 
There  are  differences  of  usage  and  pronimciation  between 
those  several  parts,  but  they  are  differences  in  detail,  not 
separate  languages,  and  there  seems  no  good  reason  why 
they  may  not  be  treated  reasonably  together  provided  that 
reference  is  made,  as  here,  to  those  differences.  To  a  very 
large  extent  those  countries  have  had  a  common  cultural 
life  with  close  and  constant  intercourse,  and  so  the  language 
which  has  served  as  a  medium  of  that  intercourse  has  a  very 
large  common  factor.  But  we  are  here  using  "  colloquial " 
to  mean  the  language  of  ordinary  speech  which  serves  as  the 
general  medium  of  communication  between  various  districts 
and  different  classes  and  groups  of  men.  Beneath  this  common 
speech  in  general  use  there  are  many  local  dialects,  just  as 
there  are  in  the  various  parts  of  England,  and  at  first  it  ls  not 
always  easy  to  understand  the  speech  of  a  man  who  uses  a 
dialect  of  marked  character,  a  difficulty  which  also  may  happen 
in  many  parts  of  England.  Certainly  these  local  dialects 
have  points  of  great  philological  interest,  and  are  well  worth 
accurate  observation  and  record,  but  it  seems  fair  and  reason- 
able to  treat  "  colloquial  Arabic  "  as  the  current  speech  in 
general  use  amongst  those  who  have  perhaps  received  some 
measure  of  education,  and  whose  intercourse  is  not  confined 
to  a  small  group  of  fellow  villagers.  In  these  pages,  therefore, 
although  note  is  frequently  taken  of  the  peculiarities  of  local 
dialects  which  wall  be  heard,  the  aim  has  been,  not  to  reproduce 
any  one  of  those  marked  dialects  in  its  entirety  but  to  set 


xii  PREFACE 

forth  the  type  of  speech  which  will  be  intelligible  generally 
throughout  the  area  stated,  and  will  serve  as  a  basis  for 
accurate  observation  of  a  local  dialect  if  occasion  arises  to 
render  that  desirable. 

It  has  been  assumed  that  the  learner  is  endeavouring  to 
teach  himself,  not  that  this  is  an  ideal  way  or  in  any  sense 
to  be  commended,  but  it  is  reasonable  that  a  manual  should 
be  self-explanatory  to  such  a  degree  that  it  is  not  necessary 
to  ask  a  teacher  what  it  means.  The  actual  teacher  will, 
no  doubt,  supplement  or  rearrange  its  contents,  for  in  every 
case  a  teacher  has  his  own  ideas  and  his  own  system,  but  it 
still  remains  a  more  satisfactory  method  that  the  book, 
so  far  as  it  goes,  should  be  written  with  the  aim  of  explaining 
itself  as  fully  as  possible,  and  for  this  end  it  may  often,  as  here, 
state  in  detail  simple  facts  which  the  reader  already  knows  : 
but  it  seems  wiser  not  to  assume  that  knowledge  lest  some, 
a  very  small  minority  no  doubt,  may  have  forgotten  or 
never  have  known  certain  elementary  facts  about  language. 
This  is  the  more  necessary,  in  the  writer's  opinion,  because 
some  readers  will,  in  all  probability,  work  with  native  teachers, 
whose  training  has  been  on  lines  so  different  from  those 
of  an  English  education  that  the  learner  will  not  easily 
recognize  principles  which  he  had  put  before  him  in  his 
school  days  in  quite  different  form. 

A  school  of  teachers  of  modern  languages  has  for  some 
years  past  aimed  at  what  is  known  as  the  "  direct  method  ", 
endeavouring  to  teach  the  adult  a  foreign  language  by  means 
similar  to  those  used  by  children  when  learning  their  own. 
Indirectly  their  work  has  certainly  freshened  our  current 
methods  of  teaching,  and  has  helped  to  break  down 
conventional  systems  which  have  shown  limitations,  but  it 
hardly  seems  that  this  direct  method  can  be  applied  generally  ; 
normally  we  have  not  the  years  and  leisure  at  our  disposal 
to  learn  a  new  speech  in  the  slow  way  we  learned  our  own, 


PREFACE  xiii 

guidance  as  to  general  principles  and  observation  of  tendencies 
which  hold  good  in  a  number  of  cases  shortens  and  simplifies 
our  work,  and  thus  we  are  brought  back  to  a  study  of  grammar, 
not  the  learning  of  arbitrary  rules  which  the  learned  have 
laid  down  as  the  literary  standard,  but  simply  the  observation 
and  statement  of  the  general  principles  which  ease  and 
shorten  our  work.  It  is  the  fashion  to  call  these  statements 
"  rules ",  but  they  are  more  properly  regarded  as 
generalizations  designed  to  shorten  and  simplify  the  student's 
work.  As  far  as  possible  these  have  been  expressed  in  the 
simplest  and  least  technical  language,  and  are  abridged  as 
much  as  is  consistent  with  an  intelligible  form  :  even  the 
adult  learner  looks  with  jealous  eye  at  the  theoretical  state- 
ments he  is  called  upon  to  master.  Occasionally  reference 
hscs  been  made  to  other  dialects  and  to  historical  principles, 
but  this  has  been  done  only  where  it  serves  to  show  that  there 
is  a  reason  for  a  "  rule  "  which  otherwise  would  appear 
entirely  arbitrary ;  it  is  easier  to  remember  something 
which  is  shown  to  have  a  reason  than  one  which  is  stated 
without   explanation. 

Many  modern  language  teachers  are  averse  from  the  use 
of  translation  as  a  method  of  teaching.  Their  protests 
certainly  have  served  to  correct  some  of  the  defects  which 
have  long  defaced  the  use  of  translation  for  this  purpose, 
but  it  seems,  on  the  whole,  that  a  certain  measure  of  trans- 
lation can  be  used  conveniently  in  teaching.  It  shows  how 
to  put  together  sentences  and  arrange  them  in  consecutive 
speech,  and  so  how  to  set  forth  a  train  of  thought  naturally 
in  the  foreign  medium  and  to  observe  the  general  tone  and 
"  genius  "  of  its  methods.  In  Arabic,  unfortunately,  we  are 
not  able  to  make  much  use  of  this  method  as  the  literary 
language,  apart  from  the  fact  that  it  is  written  in  a  different 
'  script,  has  a  form  very  far  removed  from  that  of  the  colloquial. 
At  the  end  of  this  manual  (Appendix  III)  we  give  one  short 


xiv  PREFACE 

Sura  of  the  Qur'an,  transcribed  in  Roman  letters,  because 
phrases  from  that  particular  Sura,  which  corresponds  with 
the  "  Lord's  Prayer "  of  Christians,  are  frequently  heard 
in  ordinary  speech  :  there,  as  in  poetry  and  the  classical 
language  generally,  the  short  vowel  endings  of  the  cases  and 
moods  will  be  observed,  things  unknown  to  the  colloquial. 
Probably  the  reader  will  gather  that  the  step  forward  to 
a  knowledge  of  the  classical  or  literary  language  would  not 
be  so  formidable  as  he  might  have  anticipated,  and  this 
will  perhaps  encourage  hijn  to  go  forward  to  a  study  of  Arabic 
literature,  classical  or  modern.  Amongst  Muslims  generally 
the  culture  derived  from  classical  Arabic  is  highly  esteemed, 
and  this  renders  it  much  to  be  desired,  though  later  it  will 
no  doubt  appeal  for  its  own  sake.  The  ability  to  quote  some 
poetic  passages  or  to  cite  ancient  proverbs  on  appropriate 
occasion  will  open  access  to  precincts  otherwise  closed,  and 
provoke  esteem  such  as  in  this  country  given  only  to  high 
rank  or  great  wealth.  This  manual,  however,  claims  only 
to  deal  with  the  colloquial,  and  so,  from  the  circumstances 
of  the  case,  it  is  impossible  to  introduce  the  pupil  to  the 
study  of  literature. 

Effort  has  been  made  to  render  the  form  of  this  manual  as 
easy  as  possible  to  the  unaided  learner.  Sounds  might  be 
represented  more  accurately  by  the  help  of  diacritical  points 
or  of  a  special  type  such  as  is  used  in  Canon  Gairdner's 
excellent  manual  of  Egyptian  Arabic.  But  these  methods,  so 
useful  for  representing  the  shades  of  local  dialect,  are  rather 
deterrent  to  the  average  learner,  who  wants  his  task  put 
before  him  in  the  easiest  form  possible.  The  only  diacritical 
signs  employed  are  the  marks  used  to  denote  the  long  vowels, 
and  these  are  in  so  general  use  that  they  can  hardly  be 
considered  as  a  new  thing  to  learn.  The  emphatic  consonants 
are  distinguished  by  the  use  of  dots  beneath  the  letters. 
The  official  system  recently  set  forth  for  use  in  the  British 


PREFACE  XV 

administrative  area  is  by  no  means  satisfactory,  as  it  takes 
no  note  of  the  difierence  between  the  ordinary  and  emphatic 
consonants,  and  failing  to  make  this  distinction  would  be 
fatal  in  colloquial  use,  as  there  are  many  instances  where 
words  differ  in  meaning  according  to  whether  an  emphatic  is, 
or  is  not,  used.  It  has  apparently  been  planned  to  suit  the 
typewriter  of  western  manufacture.  It  has  seemed  best  to 
make  only  a  very  sparing  use  of  capital  letters.  The  use  of 
capitals  is  a  late  mediseval  invention  of  doubtful  value,  and 
it  is  not  clear  that  Arabic  would  gain  by  the  introduction 
of  this  custom.  Similarly,  only  slight  use  has  been  made 
of  the  extremely  artificial  and  questionable  system  of 
punctuation  now  in  vogue  in  English  ;  this  also  is  a  com- 
paratively recent  introduction,  and  the  system  which  is  now 
generally  adopted  and  which  some  people  desire  to  enforce 
as  "  correct "  is  an  extremely  mechanical  one,  which  has 
but  little  to  say  in  its  favour.  Of  course,  Arabic,  written 
in  its  own  script,  has  neither  capitals  nor  any  save  a  very 
rudimentary  punctuation,  and,  whilst  it  is  convenient  for 
anyone  learning  the  colloquial  to  have  the  Arabic  transcribed 
into  European  script,  it  does  not  follow  that  it  would  be 
made  more  intelligible  by  introducing  those  peculiarities 
which  adorn  or  deface  modem  English. 

The  transcription  endeavours  to  represent  fairly  the  speech 
of  the  educated  Arabic-speaking  people,  and  the  system  of 
transliteration  gives  approximate  English  sounds,  but  these 
will  not  be  found  always  observed  consistently,  especially 
after  the  first  few  lessons.  There  is  no  standardized  system 
of  transliteration,  and  Arabic  script  itself  does  not  represent 
the  actual  colloquial.  In  these  pages  the  long  vowels  (not 
final)  and  diphthongs,  as  well  as  most  of  the  consonants, 
are  transliterated  consistently  in  accordance  with  the  values 
given  in  Chapter  I,  but  the  short  vowels,  especially  short 
a,  as  there  stated,  frequently  modifies  to  e  and  to  i,  so  that  it 

b 


xvi  PREFACE 

is  sometimes  nearer  truth  to  transcribe  it  as  e  or  i,  in  reality- 
it  has  rather  the  indeterminate  sound  of  the  -a-  in  "  beggar  "  : 
this  variation  ought  not  to  cause  much  trouble,  variants 
a,  e,  i,  will  be  heard  in  the  colloquial  in  the  rendering  of  the 
same  word,  not  merely  as  differences  of  dialect  but  even  as 
differences  between  different  social  groups  in  the  same  town  : 
a  strict  consistency  in  rendering  those  sounds  would  lead  the 
learner  to  suppose  that  there  was  an  absolutely  fixed  standard 
and  that  would  be  to  mislead  him.  So  u  short  may  often 
be  short  o  and  it  is  as  well  to  face  from  the  first  that  those 
short  vowel  sounds  are  not  finally  fixed.  Of  course  they 
should  be  represented  quite  correctly  as  spoken  if  we  are 
making  a  study  of  a  particular  dialect,  but  in  that  case  our 
results  will  not  hold  good  for  places  only  a  few  miles  distant. 
In  the  following  pages,  as  already  said,  we  are  not  aiming 
at  the  dialect  of  a  special  locality  but  the  current  speech 
generally  intelligible  amongst  the  educated  and  partly 
educated  of  Egypt,  Syria,  and  'Iraq.  In  the  case  of  the 
consonants  matters  are  rather  different :  the  main  variations 
in  the  aspirate  dentals  and  in  the  g  and  q  sounds  are  clearly 
defined  dialectal  differences  and  these  are  stated  in  detail. 
But  even  here  there  is  some  inconsistency  admitted  :  normally 
"  dh  "  sounds  in  Egypt  and  Syria  as  "  d  ",  but  on  occasion 
we  have  rendered  it  as  "  z  "  :  in  fact  that  happens  when 
the  word  has  come  through  Persian  influence,  directly  or 
via  Turkish,  or  else  is  a  word  more  or  less  technically 
theological  in  its  character  and  so  represents  "  nahwy  ",  i.e. 
the  artificial  attempt  of  the  educated  to  reproduce  the  true 
Arab  sounds.  Thus  "  dhikr  "  =  "  remembering  "  ought  to 
be  "  dikr  "  in  Egypt,  but  used  of  the  religious  exercise  of  the 
darwishes  which  has  become  so  popular  a  form  of  devotion 
it  is  invariably  called  "  2dkr  ",  the  reason  being  that  the 
darwishes  and  their  religious  exercises  were  introduced 
into  Egypt  by  Saladin  and  so  came  with  a  Persian-Turkish 


PREFACE  xvii 

origin.  In  using  vocabularies,  examples,  etc.,  the  reader 
should  remember  that  short  a,  e,  i,  often  interchange  and  it 
is  not  necessary  to  adhere  strictly  to  one  of  these  unless, 
of  course,  in  contact  with  a  "  throat "  sound  when  the  true 
"  a  "  must  be  retained  :  so  I  can  write  al-gamal,  el-gemel, 
il-gemel  and  can  hear  all  these  various  renderings  in  use. 

When  all  is  done,  however,  the  representation  of  phonology 
in  the  printed  text  is  no  more  than  approximate  :  I  do  not 
believe  that  the  learner  can  ever  get  the  sounds  correctly 
from  written  symbols,  nor  even  from  a  teacher,  nor  from 
gramophone  records :  it  cannot  be  learned  until  he  sojourns 
in  the  midst  of  an  Arabic-speaking  community  and  hears 
Arabic  spoken  all  round  him  in  every  different  tone  of  voice 
and  without  any  conscious  effort  to  reach  a  foreigner.  All 
that  can  be  hoped  is  that  the  book-taught  pupil  will  then 
get  hold  of  the  language  more  rapidly  and  more  correctly 
than  one  who  has  not  had  such  preparation. 

Such  a  manual  as  this  present  is  written  that  it  may  be 
thrown  aside  in  due  course,  when  the  usages  of  colloquial 
speech  have  become  second  nature  to  the  learner  and  its 
modest  vocabularies  are  replaced  by  an  abundant  supply 
of  words  appropriate  to  the  particular  needs  of  his  occupation. 
But  imtil  that  much  to  be  desired  consummation  it  wiU 
often  be  necessary  to  refer  back  to  statements  of  principles 
and  to  vocabularies :  for  this  reason  pains  have  been  taken 
to  classify  and  index  the  matter  and  to  classify  the  vocabularies 
in  a  way  easy  for  reference.  The  average  adult  who  learns 
a  thing  does  not  remember  it  and  has  t^  refresh  his  memory 
a  good  many  times  until  at  length  the  information  clings 
and  reference  is  needed  no  more.  The  utility  of  such  a  manual 
very  largely  depends  upon  easiness  of  reference. 

Finally,  a  word  of  advice  as  to  further  studies.  For 
grammar  the  learner  cannot  do  better  than  use  the  Alfiyya 
of  Ibn  Malik  and  Ibn  'Aqil's  commentary  on  it :   the  work 


xviii  PREFACE 

has  been  in  use  for  centuries  and  the  text  itself  has  difficulties, 
but  nothing,  I  venture  to  suggest,  can  give  quite  such  good 
results  if  steadily  used  with  the  help  of  a  good  native  teacher 
or  with  Ibn  'Aqil's  commentary  and  patient  work.  A 
scientific  knowledge  of  grammar  according  to  modern 
European  standards  means,  of  course,  a  comparative  study 
of  Arabic  and  some  other  Semitic  language  or  languages. 
Literature  implies  either  the  classical  material  which  will  be 
found  outlined  in  such  works  as  Nicholson's  Literary  History 
of  the  Arabs,  or  modern  material  which  has  been  produced 
in  considerable  abundance,  some  of  it,  such  as  the  poetry 
of  Shawki  Bey,  of  the  highest  merit.  Quite  of  recent  years 
special  attention  has  been  given  to  the  special  forms  of  local 
dialects  and  some  of  the  material  produced  as  a  result  of  such 
study  is  deserving  of  careful  attention  :  of  this  class  we  may 
note  the  admirable  dialogues  contained  in  Gairdner's  Egyptian 
Colloquial  Arabic  and  the  stories  published  by  Miss  Pad  wick 
in  the  Bull,  of  the  ScJwol  of  Oriental  Studies,  III,  3,  pp.  421-446, 
both  dealing  with  Lower  Egyptian  and  Dulac's  Conies  Arabes 
gives  stories  in  the  dialect  of  Upper  Egypt,  and  Malinjoud 
in  the  Journal  Asiatique  for  April-June,  1924,  gives  some 
excellent  specimens  of  the  dialect  of  Damascus.  This,  how- 
ever, is  a  subject  in  which  much  remains  still  to  be  done. 

De  Lacy  O'Leary. 

April,  1925. 


COLLOQUIAL   ARABIC 


Chapter    I 

PRELBIINARY 

The  object  of  the  following  pages  is  to  supply  a  convenient 

manual    of    colloquial    Arabic    as    used    in   Egypt,    Syria 

(including  Palestine),  and  'Iraq  or  Mesopotamia,  with  some 

reference  to  North  Africa.     There  are  differences  of  detail 

distinguishing  the  languages  of  these  countries,  but  those 

differences    are    small   when   compared    with   the    material 

common  to  them  all,  and  it  is  unpractical  to  treat  each  dialect 

as  though  it  were  a  separate  language.    As  occasion  arises 

attention  has  been  drawn  to  the  chief  points  of  difference, 

and  sometimes  reference  is  made  to  the  dialectal  characteristics 

of  Oman  and  of  Western  Arabic  (Morocco,  Algeria,  and  Tunis), 

^  but  no  effort  has  been  made  to  give  complete  guidance  to  those 

!  other  dialects.   The  area  in  view  in  these  pages  forms  a  rough 

i  semi-circle  round  the  desert  which  forms  the  northern  part 

of  Arabia,  the  home  of  the  Arabic  language,  and  the  whole  of 

:  this  area  has  had  a  imity  of  cultural  life  throughout  the 

;  Mushm  period,  the  resultant  intercourse  producing  a  com- 

j  munity  of  speech  in  spite  of  distinctive  local  differences. 

It  must  be  understood,  however,  that  there  are  limitations 
to  our  use  of  the  word  "  colloquial  "  ;  it  is  not  so  used  as  to 
include  each  type  of  local  dialect.  A  person  who  learned 
colloquial  English  would  hardly  expect  to  know  in  detail  the 


2  PRELIMINARY 

dialects  prevailing  in  the  various  rural  districts,  many  of  which 
would  be  very  difficult  to  the  average  educated  Englishman. 
Local  dialect  is  a  highly  specialized  study  which  has  only 
received  serious  attention  of  quite  recent  years,  and,  whilst 
it  is  useful  to  point  out  local  peculiarities,  it  is  not  usually 
expedient  to  learn  a  language  in  strict  conformity  with  the 
speech  of  the  peasant  population  in  one  particular  district. 
In  any  case,  the  specialized  study  of  local  dialect  may  properly 
be  regarded  as  supplementary  to  a  general  knowledge  of  the 
language  as  spoken  over  the  wider  area.  To  a  very  large 
extent  the  Arabic  of  Lower  Egypt,  Palestine,  and  Syria 
shows  a  common  character,  that  of  Upper  Egypt  inclines  more 
towards  the  speech  of  the  desert  Arabs,  and,  in  some  respects, 
to  that  of  North  Africa,  whilst  the  Arabic  of  'Iraq  is  closer  to 
the  parent  speech  from  which  all  have  been  derived. 

A  satisfactory  colloquial  knowledge  implies  four  things, 
(i)  a  sufficient  number  of  words,  (ii)  the  right  manner  of 
pronouncing  them,  (iii)  the  necessary  modifications  of  those 
words  as  they  are  grouped  together,  e.g.  the  different  persons 
of  the  verb,  the  formation  of  the  plural,  etc.,  and  (iv)  the 
correct  arrangement  of  words  in  intelligible  sentences.  Of 
these  (i)  the  formation  of  a  vocabulary  is  mainly  a  matter  of 
memory,  supplemented  by  reading  and  by  conversation.  ThisJ 
present  manual  contains  a  selection  of  the  commonest  words 
which  form  a  fair  basis  for  ordinary  conversation,  but  these 
should  be  supplemented  by  the  use  of  a  dictionary  and  by  the 
compilation  of  special  vocabularies  according  to  special 
needs,  e.g.  technical  terms  of  medicine,  engineering,  for 
commercial  purposes,  etc. 

(ii)  The  pronunciation  of  a  foreign  language  is  always  a 
leading  difficulty  and  this  cannot  be  learned  from  books, 
hardly  even  from  a  teacher,  however  good.    The  only  satis- 


I 


PRELIMINARY  3 

factory  method  is  to  mix  in  intercourse  with  those  who  speak 
the  language  ;  in  some  mysterious  way  the  ear  co-operates 
with  the  tongue,  and  so  one  begins  to  tune  one's  speech  into 
conformity  with  the  words  heard.  But  to  go  amongst  native 
speakers  without  previous  preparation  simply  means  waste 
of  time,  and  the  amount  acquired  will  be  very  little  indeed. 
The  present  manual  indicates  the  general  lines  to  be  followed, 
and  if  the  work  here  outlined  is  done  carefully  it  ought  not  to 
be  difficult  to  pick  up  a  fair  speech  in  a  short  time. 

As  for  (iii)  and  (iv),  these  requirements  are  best  covered  by 
an  elementary  knowledge  of  grammar.  It  is  hardly  possible 
for  us  to  learn  a  foreign  language  in  the  same  way  that  a  child 
learns  his  native  speech  ;  for  one  thing  we  could  not  afiord 
to  spend  the  ten  or  twelve  years  which  a  child  takes  before 

j  it  learns  to  speak  intelligently,  nor  could  we  give  the  undivided 
attention  which  it  gives,  having  a  mind  as  yet  unoccupied 

I  by  any  other  language.      We  need  some  shorter  method, 

I  and  grammar  is  an  attempt  to  shorten  the  work  by  giving 
general  rules  and  guiding  principles  which  help  us  to  cover  the 
ground  more  quickly.  In  a  language  like  Arabic,  where  so 
many  words  are  formed  on  standard  "  measures  ",  grammar 

,  may  help  us  to  acquire  an  extensive  vocabulary  in  a  fairly 
short  time.  But  it  must  be  understood  that  any  "  rules  " 
are  not  the  theoretical  ideas  of  pundits,  but  simple  statements 
intended  to  save  the  learner's  time  and  trouble.  At  the  same 
time  it  is  well  to  bear  in  mind  that  amongst  Arabs  a  knowledge 
of  grammar  is  the  hall-mark  of  an  educated  man. 

V  manual  like  the  present  is  necessarily  written  more  or 
less  on  the  supposition  that  the  learner  is  trying  to  teach  him- 
self. Of  course,  this  is  not  the  ideal  method,  but  it  seems  most 
satisfactory  that  rules  should  be  explained  in  such-  simple 
terms  that  they  do  not  necessarily  require  further  explanation 


4  PRELIMINAKY 

by  a  teacher,  thougli  such  addition  may  be  of  assistance. 
It  is  probable  that,  in  most  cases  at  least,  anyone  taking  up  the 
subject  of  Arabic  will  be  an  adult,  but  in  spite  of  this  there  are 
certain  "  rules  ",  conclusions  learned  in  the  course  of  practical 
work,  which  still  seem  convenient.  In  the  first  place  even 
an  adult,  himself  desirous  of  mastering  the  language,  is 
deterred  by  the  appearance  of  difficulty  and  views  jealously 
the  length  of  the  portions  set  for  him  to  master ;  this  being 
the  case,  it  is  important  that  the  "  rules  "  be  stated  as  briefly 
as  is  consistent  with  clearness  and  the  illustrations  be  no  more 
than  reasonably  suffice  to  make  the  meaning  clear.  It  does  not 
seem  expedient  to  take  for  granted  even  the  simpler  principles 
and  processes  of  grammar,  which  up  to  a  point  are  common  to 
English  and  Arabic  and  then  diverge  on  different  lines ; 
it  seems  safer  to  state  even  simple  points  which  are  probably 
known  to  the  average  learner  rather  than  to  allow  anyone  to 
waste  time  in  searching  for  the  meaning.  It  will  probably 
happen  that  the  learner  will  sometimes  work  with  a  native 
teacher,  and  may  then  experience  either  a  lack  of  systematic 
method  or  the  assumption  of  grammatical  principles  quite 
different  from  those  learned  in  an  English  education,  and  his 
only  safeguard  will  be  a  plain  statement  in  the  very  simplest 
terms  of  the  chief  principles  underlying  the  language.  The 
matter  in  which  the  average  learner  most  needs  help  is  the 
way  in  which  words  should  be  grouped  together  so  as  to  form 
intelligible  sentences,  and  in  this  instruction  cannot  be  too 
simple  and  detailed. 

It  may  be  presumed  that  anyone  who  takes  up  the  study  of 
colloquial  Arabic  intends  to  make  colloquial  use  of  it,  and  so 
to  mingle  in  intercourse  with  Muslims.  In  such  intercourse 
etiquette  means  a  very  great  deal,  and  such  etiquette  means 
a  rather  elaborate  and  formal  politeness  which  is  valued  much 


I 


PRELDnXARY  5 

more  than  the  hearty  good-fellowship  which  is  preferred  by 
Westerns.  Some  of  the  younger  generation  are  inclined  to 
discard  this  and  to  adopt  a  brusque  free  and  easy  tone, 
which  they  suppose  to  be  more  "  European  "  and  so  more 
modem.  It  is  generally  best  not  to  encourage  this ;  quite 
unintentionally  it  is  likely  to  lead  to  familiarities  which  wiU 
be  distasteful  and  not  at  all  easy  to  stop,  whilst  such 
familiarities  displayed  before  onlookers  will  seriously  damage 
their  esteem  of  the  one  who  permits  them.  It  is  much  better 
to  keep  to  the  formal  and  conventional  usages  of  established 
custom,  to  know  and  use  them  stamps  one  as  a  ci\Tlized  person 
in  Arab  eyes  and  is  respected  even  by  those  who  pride  them- 
selves on  being  most  modern.  A  European  is  narrowly 
watched,  and  the  treatment  he  receives  will  depend  largely 
upon  his  own  attitude.  Nearly  everyone  who  speaks  of 
*'  natives  '"  with  strong  dislike  and  finds  intercourse  with  them 
intolerable  will  be  found  guilty  cf  one  or  more  of  three  defects, 
either  (i)  he  has  never  mastered  enough  of  the  language  to  make 
himself  understood  or  to  understand  what  is  said  to  him,  or 
(ii)  he  has  encouraged  familiarities  and  then  resented  their 
natural  consequences,  or  (iii)  he  has  scorned  the  forms  of 
politeness  and  consequently  has  not  been  treated  with  respect. 
Some  people,  admittedly,  are  unable  to  adapt  themselves  to 
standards  different  from  those  to  which  they  have  been 
accustomed,  and  some  regard  differences  of  manner  and  colour 
with  aversion ;  for  such  there  is  no  alternative  but  to  stay 
in  their  own  country.  A  person  able  and  willing  to  adapt  him- 
self to  ^lusiim  standards  wiU  find  much  courtesy,  a  great  deal 
of  friendliness,  and  in  spite  of  what  is  commonly  said  will, 
I  believe,  meet  with  some  real  attachment.  But  the  open 
display  of  gratitude  and  sympathy  which  is  encouraged  and 
esteemed  in  the  West  is  not  expected,  desired,  or  encouraged 


6  PRELIMINAEY 

in  the  East.  After  a  death  the  expression  of  the  conventional 
forms  of  condolence  is  greatly  esteemed,  but  the  expression  of 
sympathy  is  not  asked  for,  nor  desired  ;  in  most  cases  it  would 
not  be  understood.  "  I  have  given  a  dying  creature  the  draught 
of  water  that  has  saved  his  life,  and  heard  him  thank  God 
in  accents  of  the  most  heartfelt  gratitude,  without  so  much 
as  a  '  Go  to  '  for  me  "  (Keane,  Six  months  in  the  Hejaz, 
p.  192).  Exactly;  thanks  always  are  given  to  God,  not  to  the 
person  w^ho  has  conferred  the  benefit,  and  this  should  not  be 
expected.  The  further  we  move  from  cosmopolitan  centres 
such  as  Alexandria,  Cairo,  and  Beirut,  the  more  punctilious 
should  our  manners  become,  until  amongst  the  desert  tribe 
courtesy  takes  the  most  elaborate  and  conventional  form  and 
meets  with  similar  courtesy  in  return. 

Courtesy  involves  the  use  of  many  special  phrases  to  which 
Muslims  attach  great  importance,  but  which  Englishmen  are 
sometimes  tempted  to  regard  as  waste  of  time  ;  their  use  gives 
the  impression  that  the  speaker  is  a  man  of  culture  and  causes 
him  to  be  treated  with  more  respect,  and  others  are  then  more 
ready  to  be  at  his  service,  which  means  a  saving  of  time  in 
the  long  run.  Some  of  the  commoner  forms  will  be  noted  in 
the  following  pages  as  opportunity  arises. 

Unrestrained  laughter  rather  tends  to  lower  one  in  the  eyes 
of  Arab  observers  ;  one  should  keep  a  dignified  yet  cordial 
attitude  without  an  air  of  aloofness.  It  is  customary  to  permit 
servants,  villagers,  etc.,  a  greater  familiarity  of  speech  than 
is  usual  in  modern  England,  but  the  forms  of  respect  should 
be  expected  and  their  absence  corrected.  Conversation  is 
sprinkled  with  many  religious  expressions,  and  religious  topics 
enter  more  freely  than  is  customary  in  this  country.  These 
expressions  should  be  used  in  the  recognized  way,  but  no 
discussion  or  inquiry  about  religion  should  be  entered  upon ; 


I 


PRELimNARY  7 

the  Muslim  does  not  welcome  outside  interest  or  criticism  in 
such  matters,  but  opens  out  when  he  finds  that  one's  attitude 
is  neither  hostile  nor  supercilious  ;  the  subject  must  be 
started  by  him.  Do  not  try  to  purchase  a  copy  of  the  Qur'an, 
and  if  you  have  one  keep  it  carefully  out  of  sight  when  a 
Muslim  calls  upon  you.  Be  careful  not  to  touch  one  in  a 
mosque  or  house.  You  can  usually  visit  mosques  if  you  take 
off  your  boots  (sometimes  over-shoes  are  provided  so  that  this 
is  not  necessary),  but  you  may  not  attend  the  services. 
Generally  one  is  not  permitted  to  enter  a  chapel  where  a 
saint's  body  is  buried. 

Pigs  and  dogs  are  unclean.  It  is  best  not  to  include  pork 
or  bacon  amongst  one's  provisions,  or  to  wear  gloves  or  gaiters 
of  pig-skin  or  dog-skin.  Do  not  try  to  make  friends  with  a 
dog  or  to  pat  his  head. 

The  Qur'an  forbids  the  making  of  images.  The  Ulema  of 
the  al-Azhar  mosque  hold  that  this  does  not  forbid  the  taking 
of  photographs,  but  many  old-fashioned  people  of  the  stricter 
sort  object  to  photographs,  and  some  of  the  more  ignorant 
peasants  and  desert  Arabs  fear  that  the  one  who  owns 'a 
photograph  may  perhaps  have  some  power  for  e\'il  over  the 
one  depicted,  so  do  not  assume  that  the  taking  of  photographs 
will  always  be  welcome.  In  strictly  MusHm  countries  coins 
and  postage  stamps  do  not  bear  representations  of  any  human 
figure  and  it  is  prudent  for  a  commercial  agent  not  to  show 
trade  catalogues  containing  pictures  of  human  beings  :  it  is 
often  likely  to  cause  aversion. 

In  eating  and  drinking  only  the  right  hand  should  be  used, 
and,  of  course,  it  is  necessary  to  shake  hands  (if  this  is  done) 
with  the  right.  The  left  hand  is  used  only  for  purposes  which 
though  necessary  are  unclean. 

It  is  a  grave  discourtesy  to  refer  to  the  women  of  a  family  ; 


8  PRELIMINARY 

no  inquiry  after  them  can  be  made  nor  any  remark  which 
betrays  a  consciousness  of  their  existence.  Never  should  any 
remark  be  made  which  sounds  like  admiration  of  children  or 
a  compliment  on  their  good  looks,  good  health,  etc.,  and  if  by 
inadvertence  any  such  comment  is  made  or  heard  it  is  proper 
to  add  "  I  take  refuge  with  the  Lord  of  the  day-break  "  (cf. 
p.  147)  ;  those  are  the  opening  words  of  a  Sura  in  the  Qur'an, 
which  continues  in  words  which  are  taken  as  an  exorcism  of 
the  evil  eye  :  neglect  of  this  precaution  may  cause  one  to  be 
held  responsible  if  the  child  is  taken  ill  or  suffers  any  mis- 
fortune. In  no  case  admire  what  belongs  to  another,  it  is 
practically  asking  for  a  gift ;  admire  a  thing  only  as  that  which 
God  has  created  (cf.  p.  147  for  a  suitable  form). 

Practise  privately  the  manner  of  sitting  on  cushions  or  on 
a  divan  without  a  chair  :  you  will  find  chairs  are  rare  outside 
the  large  towns.  Also  take  some  private  practice  in  eating 
without  the  help  of  spoon  or  fork.  It  is  best  to  be  a  strict 
abstainer  in  intercourse  with  Muslims.  The  use  of  wine  is 
unlawful  to  them,  and  it  is  a  great  relief  when  they  find  that 
you  do  not  expect  any  to  be  procured  for  you.  If  a  Muslim, 
himself  a  strict  abstainer,  sends  for  spirits  or  beer  for  you 
you  are  likely  to  get  some  abomination  decocted  by  a  Greek 
trader,  and  your  well-intentioned  host  will  wonder  why  you 
find  it  so  hard  to  finish  what  he  took  no  little  trouble  to 
procure.  When  you  find  men  accustomed  to  drink  spirits 
you  may  generally  suspect  that  they  are  not  the  most 
reputable  members  of  the  community. 


Chapter    II 
PRONUNCIATION 

(1)  The  Consonant  Sounds 

The  Arabic  alphabet  contains  twenty-seven  consonant 
sounds,  which  may  be  represented  by  : — 

',  b,  t,  th,  g,  h,  kh,  d,  dh,  r,  z,  s,  sh,  s,  d,  t,  z,  \  gh,  f,  q,  k, 
1,  m,  n,  h,  w,  y. 

It  will  be  noticed  that  there  is  no  p  or  v  and  the  Arab 
usually  cannot  pronounce  these  sounds  so  the  loan  words 
"  post  "  and  "  police  "  appear  as  "  busta  "  and  "  bulls  ". 
Most  of  the  consonants  given  do  not  present  any  great 
difficulty,  and  those  represented  by  b,  t,  d,  z,  s.  f,  k,  1,  m,  n, 
h,  w,  y,  nearly  resemble  the  letters  so  denoted  in  English, 
though  with  differences  of  timbre  which  must  be  learned  by 
imitation  of  native  speakers. 

(a)  The  Emphatic  Consonants. 

It  will  be  noted  that  the  sounds  t,  d,  s,  z,  and  h  are  given 
twice  over,  once  in  ordinary  type  and  once  in  italic.  The  sounds 
represented  by  the  italic  letters  are  those  which  give  much 
trouble  to  English  speakers,  and  must  be  mastered  carefully. 
For  the  first  four,  t,  d,  s,  z,  take  two  words  for  each,  one  con- 
taining the  letter  as  initial,  the  other  containing  it  as  a  final, 
thus  for  t  take  the  English  words  top,  hot — for  d  take  day, 
had — for  s  take  such  as  sop,  boss,  and  for  z  substitute  z- 
for  s-  in  the  preceding.  After  pronouncing  the  word  naturally, 


10  '  PRONUNCIATION 

repeat  it  several  times,  each  time  exaggerating  the  t,  d,  etc., 
sound  and  dwelling  upon  it  until  you  feel  that  you  are  making 
yourself  ridiculous  by  the  amount  of  exaggeration  ;  the  first 
time  you  hear  a  native  speaker  you  will  find  that  he  exaggerates 
it  even  more  than  you  have  done.  But  whilst  exaggerating 
these  sounds  you  must  also  try  to  thrust  them  a  little  further 
back  into  the  throat.  The  emphatic  or  exaggerated  z  is  for 
Syria  and  Egypt  alone  :  in  'Iraq  its  sound  will  be  that  of  the 
th  at  the  beginning  of  such  words  as  "  there,  then  ",  much 
emphasized  ;  this  is  the  truer  sound  and  very  often  in  Egypt 
z  is  altered  to  d,  which  is  an  attempt  to  reproduce  it  more  truly. 
You  must  remember  that  in  all  these  dialects  Arabic  is  spoken 
by  those  whose  ancestors  learned  it  as  a  foreign  language,  and 
so  have  never  completely  attained  ease  in  the  use  of  sounds 
which  were  not  in  their  own  former  language.  The  true  sound 
of  the  emphatic  letters  can  only  be  heard  from  the  lips  of  a 
desert  Arab. 

The  emphatic  ^  is  a  consonant  which  usually  gives  much 
trouble  to  English  learners.  You  must  breathe  out  over  this 
aspirate  with  more  force  than  over  an  ordinary  h,  and  dwell 
longer  on  the  sound,  it  is  an  h  with  an  aspiration  produced 
with  effort,  but  in  which  no  other  sound  than  pure  h  should 
enter.  Such  a  word  as  yaAfazak  is  a  fair  test  of  one's  ability 
to  speak  Arabic  intelligibly. 

In  similar  way  q  is  really  the  emphatic  form  of  k,  and  here 
it  is  possible  to  perceive  the  real  difference  between  the  simple 
and  emphatic  consonants  by  contrasting  the  initial  sounds  in 
the  words  "  king  "  and  "  queen  ". 

(b)  Tlie  Dental  Aspirates. 

The  two  sounds  given  as  th  and  dh  occur  in  English  and 
present  no  difficulty  to  an  English  learner.     The  sound  th 


PRONUNCIATION  11 

is  that  which  appears  at  the  beginning  of  such  words  as 
"thin",  "theory",  "three",  and  as  final  in  "  vdth ", 
"  truth  ",  etc.  The  sound  dh  is  the  softer  th  which  com- 
mences such  words  as  "  than  ",  "  then  ",  "  there  ".  But 
these  sounds,  correctly  pronounced  by  the  desert  Arabs, 
have  always  proved  difficult  to  the  people  of  Syria  and  Egypt, 
and  in  a  less  degree  to  those  of  'Iraq.  As  a  result  th  is  sounded 
either  as  t  or  as  s,  dh  as  d  or  z.  In  Egypt  the  sounds  are 
generally  t  and  d,  in  Syria  they  are  most  often  t  and  d  but  s 
and  z  also  occur.  In  the  following  pages,  where  we  are 
concerned  with  colloquial  speech,  the  th  and  dh  will  rarely 
occur  save  in  the  words  peculiar  to  'Iraq,  but  the  history  of 
these  sounds  will  explain  the  apparent  inconsistency  of  t 
and  d  occasionally  interchanging  with  s  and  z.  Sometimes 
the  correct  th  and  dh  will  be  heard  from  the  lips  of  educated 
persons.  Thus  the  demonstrative  pronoun  "  this  "  appears 
in  'Iraq  as  ha-dha,  in  Syria  it  becomes  ha-da,  and  in  Egypt 
the  first  syllable  is  dropped  and  we  have  da.  Both  in  Syria 
and  Egypt  this  da  can  be  heard  as  za,  and  that  pronunciation 
is  often  regarded  as  nahwi  or  "  grammatical ".  Wherever 
there  is  Turkish  or  Persian  influence  there  is  a  strong  tendency 
to  use  s  and  z  not  only  for  the  classical  th  and  dh,  but  even 
for  the  emphatic  t  and  d,  thus  a  Persian  will  speak  of  a  qadi, 
"  judge,"  as  a  qazi :  it  is  well  to  bear  in  mind  that  there  is 
a  strong  Persian  element  in  'Iraq,  and  the  Turkish  element  is 
still  well  represented  amongst  the  higher  orders  in  Egypt 
and  Syria. 

(c)  The  Laryngds. 

The  kh  sound  is  often  difficult  to  Englishmen  ;  it  is  the 
same  as  the  "  ch  "  in  Scottish  words,  such  as  "  loch  ",  etc., 
or  German  "  hoch  ".  Three  consonants  are  left  which  we  have 


12  PRONUNCIATION 

represented  by  the  signs  ',  ',  and  gh.  Make  a  slight  pause 
and  then  say  such  a  word  as  "  and  "  ;  you  will  notice  that  as 
you  commence  the  vowel  sound  your  throat  makes  a 
contraction  which  is  just  audible  as  an  effort  at  the  beginning. 
This  effort  is  the  Hamza,  which  we  represent  by  '.  It  is  quite 
easy  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  but  it  is  not  easy  to  introduce 
it  at  the  close  of  a  syllable.  Natives  find  it  quite  as  difficult 
as  we  do,  and  it  generally  results  simply  in  lengthening  the 
vowel  which  goes  before,  so  that  one  commonly  hears  ras 
for  ra's,  or  else  it  is  changed  to  w  or  y,  so  that  we  get  the 
classical  qara'  "  read  "  treated  as  though  it  were  qaray.  A 
careful  observance  of  the  correct  sound  is  the  mark  of  a  well 
educated  man  or  of  a  desert  Arab,  who,  of  course,  produces 
these  sounds  quite  naturally.  The  sound  '  is  the  same,  but 
made  emphatic,  so  as  to  seem  like  a  catch  in  the  thi'oat ;  try  the 
effort  with  which  you  begin  to  say  the  word  "  and  "  after  a 
pause,  then  increase  this  effort  and  exaggerate  it  as  much  as 
you  can,  at  the  same  time  trying  to  thrust  it  back  into  your 
throat.  The  gh  is  best  described  as  an  attempt  at  gargling ; 
if  you  cannot  succeed  in  this  sound  make  it  like  a  hard  g 
emphasized. 

Pains  must  be  taken  especially  over  the  emphatic  consonants, 
which  in  many  cases  entirely  change  the  meaning  of  a  word. 
It  is  ludicrous  to  hear  a  missionary  telling  people  that  God 
wants  a  man's  kalb,  "  dog,"  when  he  really  means  qalb, 
"heart."  So  sif  means  "sword",  but  sif  =" summer ", 
sew^  =  "  whip",  sawt  ==  "  voice",  fikr  =  "thought",  faqr  = 
"  poverty  ",  fitna  =  "  sedition  ",  fu^na  —  "  prudence  ",  in 
many  cases  the  short  vowel  being  obscure  so  that  the  difference 
in  the  vowel  sounds  is  scarcely  audible. 

Do  not  be  discouraged  at  the  difficulty  of  some  of  the  sounds. 
You  cannot  learn  fluent  Arabic  by  yourself,  and  probably  no 


PRONUNCIATION  13 

teacher,  however  eflP.cient,  can  make  you  correct ;  aU  you  can 
do  is  to  get  some  approximate  pronunciation  which  may  be 
understood  by  a  patient  listener,  then,  when  opportunity 
offers,  you  must  spend  your  time  in  the  midst  of  an  Arabic- 
speaking  community  and  by  hearing  and  imitating  wiU  soon 
learn  to  speak  intelligibly.  The  better  your  previous 
knowledge  of  grammar  and  vocabulary  the  quicker  will  this 
result  be  attained. 

See  below  (sect.  4)  for  notes  on  some  of  the  chief 
differences  in  pronunciation  between  Egypt,  Syria,  and  'Iraq. 

(2)  The  Long  Vowels  and  Diphthongs 

The  vowel  sounds  properly  are  three  only,  a,  i,  and  u.  When 
long  these  are  pronounced  thus  : — 

a  as  a  in  "  father  ",  "  rather  ",  etc. 

i  as  the  ee  in  "  feet  ",  "  sweet  ",  etc. 

u  as  the  oo  in  "  moon  ",  "  soon  ",  etc. 

Very  soon,  however,  the  a  inclines  towards  the  a  in  "  fate  ", 
and  this  is  particularly  the  case  in  Egypt,  but  the  true  ah 
sound  (as  above)  is  always  intelligible  and  preferable. 

e  is  pronounced  like  the  a  in  "  rate  ",  "  hate  ",  etc. 

6  is  like  the  long  o  in  "  holy  ",  "  roll ",  etc. 

These  two  long  vowels  are  really  diphthongs,  e  =  ay, 
6  =  aw,  and  remembering  this  will  greatly  help  to  explain 
the  cases  in  which  they  occur,  e.g.  the  verb  fafayt  becomes 
necessarily  iafet,  "  I  extinguished  "  ;  the  grammars  call  this 
an  "  irregular  "  verb,  but  if  we  remember  the  origin  of  the 
e  there  is  no  irregularity  but  simply  the  application  of  a 
phonetic  rule. 

(3)  The  Short  Vowels 

The  short  vowels  are  a,  i,  u.  Very  commonly  a  can  be 
sounded  as  e  and  even  as  i,  provided  it  does  not  come  next 


14  PRONUNCIATION 

to  one  of  the  h,  h,  kh,  or  *  sounds.  This  modification  of  a  is 
most  common  in  Egypt,  but  such  variation  will  be  found  in 
different  degrees  in  local  dialects,  often  differing  in  districts 
quite  near  one  another.  All  the  short  vowels  are  obscured  by 
the  fact  that  Arabic  is  a  more  "  throaty  "  language  than 
English,  the  sounds  are  thrust  more  back  into  the  throat 
and  the  throat  muscles  exercised  more  freely  than  in  speaking 
English.  We  may  regard  the  short  a  as  an  obscured  a  like 
that  in  the  English  word  "  beggar  ".  Unless  we  are  trying  to 
reproduce  accurately  the  local  dialect  of  some  particular 
district  there  is  no  need  to  be  strictly  consistent  in  the 
rendering  of  the  short  a :  we  may  say  al-madine,  el-medine, 
or  il-medine.  In  the  following  pages  the  short  a  generally 
appears  as  e  unless  near  one  of  the  consonants  which  restrain 
the  modification,  and  this  is  the  most  practical  representation, 
though  the  Egyptian  peasant  will  most  often  sound  it  as  i. 
On  the  other  hand,  the  more  educated  tend  to  reproduce  the 
purer  a  sound.  So  short  i  may  often  sound  as  e,  and  short  u 
generally  does  sound  like  o.  After  or  before  an  emphatic 
consonant  (one  of  those  here  given  in  italics)  all  the  short 
vowels  incline  towards  an  o-u  sound.  But  you  will  find  much 
diversity  in  the  sounding  of  short  vowels,  not  only  between 
one  district  and  another,  but  even  between  different  quarters 
of  the  same  town,  and  sometimes  the  difference  shows  whether 
the  speaker  is  a  Muslim,  or  a  Jew,  or  a  Christian.  Unless  you 
desire  to  make  a  detailed  study  of  peculiarities  of  dialect  it 
is  hardly  necessary  to  acquire  these  very  accurately.  Willmore, 
in  his  Spoken  Arabic  of  Egypt  (p.  10),  gives  the  sensible  remark, 
"  take  care  of  the  consonants  and  the  vowels  wiU  take  care 
of  themselves,"  referring,  of  course,  to  the  short  vowels.  He 
further  notes  that  "  Vowels  are  in  English  pronounced  more 
in  the  front  of  the  m(.uth,  in  Cairene  Arabic  more  in  the  upper 


PRONUXCLiTION  15 

part  of  the  throat  ",  and  so  "  vowels  are  one  and  all  thicker 
and  more  rounded  in  Arabic  than  they  are  in  our  language  ". 
But  again  it  must  be  repeated  that  we  can  at  best  get  only  a 
rough  approximation  until  we  actually  hear  the  spoken 
language  and  set  ourselves  to  reproduce  what  is  heard,  not 
the  speech  of  one  teacher  but  the  natural  converse  of  many 
who  are  speaking  without  any  efEort  to  make  their  words 
intelligible  to  a  foreigner  ;  it  is  only  by  a  stay  in  an  Arabic 
speaking  atmosphere  that  any  satisfactory  colloquial  powers 
can  be  developed. 

(4)  Word  Structure 

In  Arabic  every  syllable  must  be  pronounced  quite 
distinctly,  and  so  in  qattal  it  must  be  clear  that  there  are 
lWo  t's,  as  qat-tal,  for  qatal  is  a  different  word  not  quite  the 
sair.e  in  meaning.  The  Arab  cannot  normally  sound  a  con- 
sonant without  the  help  of  a  vowel,  and  so  "  Platon  "  (Plato) 
becomes  "  Aflatun  "  and  "  Frank  "  appears  as  "  Ifrang  "  or 
"  Firang  ",  and  when  three  consonants  come  together  it  is 
necessary  to  insert  a  vowel,  usually  -i-,  sometimes  a  vowel 
assimilated  to  another  near.  As  modern  Arabic  has  lost  the 
vowel  endings  which  in  ancient  Arabic  marked  the  cases  of 
nouns  and  the  moods  of  verbs,  it  often  happens  that  this 
addition  has  to  be  made.  Thus  shuft  =  "  I  saw  "  and  "  I 
saw  her",  ought  to  be  shuftha,  but  as  this  would  mean  three 
consonants  together  it  becomes  shuftiha;  but  "I  saw  them" 
changes  shufthum  to  shuftuhum,  where  -u-  is  due  to  the  vowel 
following.  Arabs  who  are  able  to  sound  a  consonant  group 
without  sufficient  vowel  help  have  learned  to  do  so  in  schools 
where  they  have  been  in  contact  with  European  teachers, 
and  their  speech  is  not  to  be  copied.  In  Western  speech 
(i.e.  the  Arabic  of  Morocco,  Algeria,  and  Timis)  the  tendency 


16  PRONUNCIATION 

is  to  slur  over  short  unaccented  vowels,  and  so  the  words  seem 
to  contain  grouped  consonants,  but  in  reality  it  is  that  the  short 
vowel  is  hurried  over  and  has  only  about  half  the  time  value 
of  an  ordinary  short  vowel.  Thus  in  Egypt,  etc.,  we  find 
sabaA  =  "  morning  ",  but  in  the  West  this  becomes  s'hah  ; 
the  first  -a-  is  like  the  "  obscure  "  a  in  "  beggar  ",  but  reduced 
to  about  half  its  duration.  This  shortening  of  the  unaccented 
vowels  before  the  accent  is  one  of  the  most  characteristic 
marks  of  "Western"  Arabic,  and  it  is  well  to  note  that 
Western  influences  extend  right  up  to  the  western  suburbs  of 
Alexandria. 

Accentuation,  i.e.  the  emphasis  due  to  the  accent  of  stress 
as  on  the  e  in  "  invent  ",  varies  and  its  variations  are  amongst 
the  characteristics  distinctive  of  the  dilierent  dialects. 
Originally,  no  doubt,  the  accent  generally  rest-ed  on  the 
penultimate  or  syllable  before  the  last,  but  the  decay  of  the 
final  vowels  used  to  denote  cases  and  moods  has  caused  the 
tendency  to  accentuate  the  last  syllable  of  a  word.  In  the 
colloquial  speech  of  Syria  and  Lower  Egypt  the  accent  rests 
on  the  last  syllable  when  that  syllable  has  a  long  vowel  or  a 
short  vowel  followed  by  two  consonants ;  if  the  last  syllable 
is  short  and  closed  by  one  consonant  the  accent  generally 
falls  on  the  preceding  syllable.  The  present  accentuation  of 
Syria  and  Lower  Egypt,  in  which  the  accent  is  controlled  by 
the  vowel  quantity,  seems  to  be  the  Syrian  usage  which  has 
been  adopted  by  scholars  and  gradually  spread  by  their 
influence.  The  rustic  speech  of  Egypt  rather  tends  to  advance 
the  accent  towards  the  end  of  the  stem,  and  this,  probably 
the  older  usage,  is  still  further  emphasized  in  Maghrabi,  i.e. 
"  Western  "  Arabic,  and  largely  accounts  for  the  slurring  over 
of  a  preceding  short  vowel :  thus  in  Egypt  and  Syria  we  hear 
iinta,  "  thou,"  but  in  the  West  this  becomes  anta  and  even 


PRONUNCIATION  17 

nta.  (See  p.  34  below.)  Attention  should  be  paid  to 
differences  of  accent  in  speech,  as  these  will  often  furnish  a 
key  to  the  local  dialect,  which  at  first  seems  so  different 
from  Arabic  heard  elsewhere.  In  so  far  as  local  dialect  is 
distinguished  by  peculiarity  of  accent,  this  will  be  found  to 
follow  some  particular  tendency  fairly  consistently,  and  the 
tendency  will  soon  be  noted  by  the  attentive  listener. 

(5)  Dialectal  Differences 
(a)  Consonant  g. 

In  Egypt  the  g  is  sounded  hard,  as  in  the  English  word 
"  garden  ",  but  elsewhere  it  is  soft,  as  in  "  general  ".  This  is 
to  be  taken  as  distinctive  of  the  Egyptian  dialect.  When 
Syria  was  given  back  to  Turkey  in  1840 — it  had  been  attached 
to  Egypt  in  1833 — some  of  the  Egyptians  who  had  settled 
there  wanted  to  remain  and  pretended  to  be  Syrians.  The  test 
used  was  to  make  them  pronounce  the  word  for  "  camel "  ; 
if  they  said  "  jemel "  they  were  accepted  as  Syrians,  but  if 
they  said  "  gemel "  with  a  hard  g  they  were  sent  back  to 
Egj-pt.  In  the  following  pages  the  letter  is  always  written  g, 
for  g  is  allowed  to  have  both  sounds,  but  note  that  in  Syria 
and  'Iraq  g  has  to  be  pronounced  soft,  like  an  English  j,  but 
in  Egj-pt  it  has  to  be  a  hard  g  as  in  "  gold  ".  When  Greek 
and  other  W(.>rd8  containing  hard  g  are  put  into  Arabic  the 
letter  gh  is  generally  used.  Occasionally  some  peculiar 
renderings  of  the  g  sound  may  be  heard,  due  to  dialectal 
tendencies  amongst  those  who  are  least  in  touch  with  the 
outer  world.  Thus  amongst  the  fellahin  and  Bedwin  of 
Upper  Egypt  a  "  dy  "  sound  can  be  heard  making  gemel, 
"  camel "  sound  like  dyamel  (diamel),  and  along  the  Lower 
Euphrates  this  goes  further  and  produces  a  y  sound,  making 
"  yemel  ",  etc.   On  the  other  hand,  the  soft  g  sound  (Mke  j  or 


18  PRONUNCIATION 

the  g  in  English  "  gem  ")  becomes  zh  (i.e.  Kke  the  -dg-  in 
"  edge  ")  along  the  Syrian  coast  and  amongst  the  Christian 
population  of  Jerusalem.  As  the  various  religious  communities 
in  the  East  live  very  much  amongst  themselves  and  do  not 
mix  with  those  of  other  religions,  it  is  not  uncommon  to  find 
dialectal  peculiarities  which  betray  a  man's  religious 
adherence. 

(b)  Consonant  l\ 

Usually  there  is  no  difficulty  about  the  pronunciation  of  the 
consonant  k,  but  in  'Iraq  sometimes  we  find  k  with  vowel 
-i-  sounded  as  ch,  like  the  initial  of  the  English  word  "  church  " 
contrasted  with  the  Scottish  "  kirk  ".  Thus  "  thy  "  addressed 
to  a  woman  is  -ik  in  Egypt,  Syria,  etc.,  but  -ich  (as  though 
-itch)  in  'Iraq.  This  is  not  e;sclu8ive  to  'Iraq,  however,  as  it 
may  be  heard  also  amongst  the  Bedwin  of  the  Syrian  desert 
and  the  fellahin  of  Palestine. 

(c)  Consonant  q. 

The  sound  represented  as  q  in  the  following  pages  is  as  the 
q  followed  by -u- in  such  English  words  as  "question",  "queen", 
etc.    It  will  be  noted  that  it  is  thrust  further  down  into  the 
throat  than  the  ordinary  k  and  so  tends  to  affect  the  vowel 
sound  following :    a  similar  (inevitable)  modification  of  the 
vowel  sound  occurs  in  Arabic  and  results  from  contact  not 
only  with  q  but  with  all  the  "  emphatic  "  sounds,  i.e.  those 
which  are  represented  by  italics  in  this  book.     In  Upper  j 
Egypt,  and  to  some  extent  also  in  'Iraq,  and  amongst  the 
desert  Arabs  generally,  this  q  is  sounded  as  g,  and  so  we  hear! 
gal  (=qal),  "say",  gult  (=qult),  "I  said",  Gurnah  (for 
Qurnah)  as  the  name  of  a  well-known  village  near  Theves,  ji 
and  this  modification  of  q  to  g  hard  should  be  borne  in  mind  - 
by  anyone  in  Upper  Egypt,  and  should  be  actually  adopted 


PRONUNCIATION  19 

by  those  who  are  living  in  'Iraq.  It  is  not,  however,  usual 
thus  to  sound  the  first  letter  of  the  name  of  the  holy  book, 
the  Qur'an.  In  Lower  Egypt,  in  the  towns  of  Syria,  and  in 
the  neighbourhood  of  Jerusalem  the  q  has  quite  a  different 
sound  and  becomes  either  the  strong  effort  we  have  represented 
by  (*)  or  the  weaker  effort  {'),  or  passes  away  altogether.  Thus 
the  words  qam  qal  =  "  he  began  to  say  "  (lit.  "  he  arose,  he 
said  ")  may  be  heard  as  gam  gal  in  Upper  Egypt  and  'Iraq, 
as  'am  'al  or  even  am  al  in  Lower  Egypt,  etc.  Occasionally 
the  q  sound  becomes  the  strong  gh,  the  gargling  sound  which 
is  best  learned  by  trying  to  imitate  the  grunting  sound  a 
camel  makes  ;  this  particular  modification  will  be  met  with  in 
certain  districts  of  'Iraq,  often  amongst  the  Bedwin.  Near 
Jerusalem  q  often  sounds  as  k. 

(d)  The  Aspirate  Consonants. 

As  we  have  already  noted,  the  sounds  th,  dh,  are  rendered 
truly  in  'Iraq  (as  a  rule),  but  generally  become  t,  d,  in  Egypt 
and  Syria,  sometimes  s,  z,  which  shows  an  (unsuccessful) 
effort  to  give  the  true  sounds  (and  so  likely  to  be  met  with  in 
the  partly-educated)  or  else  betrays  a  Turkish  or  Persian 
influence.  In  some  cases,  however,  the  z  for  dh  is  fairly 
regular,  e.g.  it  is  quite  common  in  Egypt  to  hear  ki-za  = 
"thus",  "like  this  ",  for  ka-dha. 

(e)  The  Vowels. 

Both  in  Egypt  and  Syria,  perhaps  to  a  less  extent  in  'Iraq, 
there  is  a  general  tendency  to  weaken  short  -a-  to  -e-  and  -i-, 
in  Lower  Egypt  the  -i-  is  the  commonest  resultant,  and  so  we 
hear  ir-ragil,  "  the  man,"  rather  than  er-ragU,  but  the  -i-, 
-€-  of  this  sort  is  the  obscure  vowel  of  indistinct  timbre, 
especially  the  unaccented  short  before  the  accent,  in 
"  Western  "  Arabic  (Morocco,  etc.),  very  often  such  vowels 


20  PRONUNCIATION 

disappear  altogether,  and  there  we  hear ' '  m'dine  "  f  or  "  medine  ", 
etc.  In  the  following  pages  this  short  vowel  is  most  often 
represented  by  -e-,  but  we  have  not  kept  to  this  consistently, 
it  is  sometimes  -a-,  sometimes  -i-,  and  it  is  best  for  the  learner 
to  regard  these  sounds  as  fluctuating,  not  definitely  fixed ; 
very  often  a  perceptible  variation  may  be  heard  within  a 
few  miles  distance  or  in  adjacent  districts  in  a  town.  "When  in 
contact  with  a  "  throat  "  sound  such  as  h,  kh,  ',  or  one  of  the 
emphatic  letters,  the  -a-  sound  should  be  preserved,  and  in 
any  passages  of  "  classical "  character,  e.g.  quotations,  etc., 
this  should  be  done.  The  dictum  of  the  grammarians  is  that 
-a-  is  always  correct,  -e-,  -i-  is  permitted  under  certain  con- 
ditions, and  these  conditions  colloquial  speech  extends  far 
beyond  anything  the  grammarians  approved. 


Chapter    III 

THE  FIRST  LESSOX— THE  NOUN  AND  THE  SIMPLE 
NOMINAL   SENTENCE 

(1)  For  convenience  we  start  with  the  classification  of 
words  according  to  the  grammarians,  who  divide  them  into 
(i)  nouns,  (ii)  verbs,  and  (iii)  particles.  Every  sentence  contains 
a  noun  expressed  or  implied,  sentences  which  contain  verbs 
are  called  "  verbal  sentences  ",  those  which  do  not  are  called 
"  nominal  sentences  "  ;  the  particles  are  used  only  as  accessory 
to  verbs  and  nouns.  The  noun  or  name  (ism)  is  the  name  of 
anything  which  may  be  real,  as  "  man  ",  "  house  ",  etc.,  or 
merely  an  idea  as  "  virtue  ",  "  truth  ",  etc.,  or  may  be  a 
quality  (adjective)  as  "  black  ",  "  good  ",  etc.,  or  a  pronoun 
Buch  as  "  he  ",  "  this  ",  etc.  All  these  are  classed  together 
as  nouns  and  the  function  which  any  one  of  them  fulfils  in 
a  sentence  normally  holds  good  for  any  other. 

Nouns  thus  include  : — 

(a)  Substantives  (i)  names  of  real  things,  (ii)  names  of  ideal 
things  (abstract  nouns),  including  the  infinitives  of  verbs. 
(6)  Adjectives  or  descriptives,  including  participles  of  verbs, 
(c)  Pronouns. 

(2)  The  Definite  and  Indefinite 

Nouns  may  be  definite  and  so  denote  one  particular  person 
or  thing,  as  "  Muhammad  ",  "  Cairo  ",  "  he  ",  etc. — or  they 
may  be  indefinite  and  so  denote  any  one  of  a  class,  as  "  man  ", 
"  town  ",  etc.    Proper  names  and  pronouns  are  definite  by 


22  THE    FIRST    LESSON 

their  own  nature.  An  indefinite  noun  becomes  definite  by 
having  the  defining  article  "  the  "  placed  before  it,  as  indefinite 
"  man  ",  definite  "  the  man  ". 

(3)  The  Defining  Article 

In  Arabic  the  defining  article  "  the  "  is  1-.  When  this  is 
preceded  by  a  vowel  the  1-  alone  suffices,  as  in  abii  1-walad  = 
"  the  father  of  the  boy  ",  where  1-  does  not  need  anything 
further  to  enable  it  to  be  pronounced.  When  it  is  not  preceded 
by  a  vowel  the  sound  a-  or  e-  (Egyptian  often  i-)  is  added 
(as  already  explained  e-,  i-,  are  only  dialectal  modifications 
of  short  a-  not  next  to  a  throat  sound),  and  so  "  the  "  —  al-, 
el-,  or  il-.  Thus  walad  =  "  boy  ",  el-walad  =  "  the  boy  ". 

But  when  the  noun  following  begins  with  one  of  the  letters 
t,  t,  th,  d,  d,  dh,  s,  s,  sh,  z,  z,  r,  or  n,  the  1-  assimilates  to  that 
letter  and  so  "  the  man  "  =  er-ragil  (not  el-ragil,  though  that 
is  written  in  Arabic  but  pronounced  with  the  assimilation), 
so  shams  =  "  sun",  ash-shams  =  "the  sun",  etc.  (In  Egyptian 
dialect  the  same  assimilation  is  sometimes  applied  to  k-  and 
so  we  hear  ak-kull  for  al-kuU  =  "  the  whole  "  ;  this  is  a 
piece  of  dialect  and  should  not  be  regarded  as  regular. 
In  the  following  pages  the  article  1-,  al-,  el-,  il-,  is  written 
thus  with  the  hyphen  connecting  it  with  the  noun  it  defines. 

(4)  The  Indefinite 

There  is  no  Arabic  word  for  the  indefinite  "  a  "  or  "  an  ". 
If  we  mean  "  a  man  "  we  say  simply  ragil  =  "  man  "  without 
adding  any  article  ;  if  we  mean  "  a  certain  man  "  we  may  use 
the  numeral  wahid  =  "  one  "  and  say  "  one  man  ",  or  we 
may  express  "  a  certain  town  "  by  a  paraphrase  "  a  town  from 
the  towns  ",  e.g.  fi  medina  min  medayin  es-Sin  =  "  in  a 


THE    FIRST    LESSON  23 

certain  town  of  China  "  ( =  in  a  town  of  the  towns  of  China. 
Story  of  'Ala  d-Din). 

The  word  wahid  is  the  numeral  "  one  ",  and  is  used  with 
the  masculine  as  wahid  walad  =  "  a  certain  boy  ",  with  the 
feminine  it  is  wahde  as  waLde  bint  =  "  a  certain  girl ".  It 
naturally  cannot  be  used  in  the  plural  and  there  its  nearest 
equivalent  is  ba'd  "  some  "  (cf.  p.  85  below). 

Very  often  Arabic  requires  the  definite  article  where  it  is 
not  required  in  English,  e.g.  with  abstract  nouns  as  el-'adl  = 
"justice",  and  such  as  es-sef,  "summer,"  in  fi  s-sef  =  "in 
summer  "  ;  sometimes  it  may  be  used  or  omitted  without 
difference  to  the  meaning,  as  el-arba'a  nuss  et-tamanya  or 
arba'a  nuss  tamanya  =  "  four  is  half  of  eight  ". 

(5)  The  Descriptive 

The  adjective  or  other  descriptive  (noun  in  apposition, 
participle)  follows  the  noun  it  describes,  thus  ragil  =  "man  ", 
keblr  =  "  great  ",  ragil  kebir  =  "  great  man  ",  Muhammad 
esh-shekh  =  "  Muhammad  the  sheikh,"  etc. 

If  the  first  noun  is  defined  the  descriptive  which  follows  must 
also  be  defined,  if  the  first  is  indefinite  the  descriptive  must 
be  undefined  also,  thus  ragil  kebir  =  "  great  man  ",  er-ragil 
el-kebir  =  " the  great  man",  Muhammad  el-kebir  =  "  the 
great  Muhammad  ",  where  the  proper  name  is  defined  by  ite 
own  nature. 

Proper  names  are  necessarily  definite,  but  there  are  some 
which  originally  were  common  nouns  and  have  become  proper 
names  ;  these  may  have  the  article,  but  they  may  equally  well 
''-ppear  without,  the  addition  or  omission  of  the  article  makes 
no  difierence  ;  thus  we  may  say  Hasan  or  el- Hasan,  both  are 
equally  correct,  and  both  are  equally  defined. 


I 


24  THE    FIRST    LESSON 

If  the  noun  defined  be  feminine  the  descriptive  adjective 
must  be  feminine  also,  the  feminine  being  usually  formed  by 
adding  -a*  or  -e*  to  the  masculine,  thus  kebir  =  "  great " 
(of  a  man),  kebire  =  "  great  "  (of  a  woman).  Thus  final  -a, 
-e,  represents  an  ancient  -at,  -et,  of  which  the  -t  has  fallen 
away.  In  Hebrew,  which  may  be  regarded  as  an  early  dialect 
of  colloquial  Arabic,  the  change  had  already  taken  place  in 
the  Siloam  inscription  written  under  the  old  Hebrew 
monarchy — but  when  the  termination  is  not  a  final,  i.e.  when 
a  suffix  is  added  or  a  genitive  is  attached,  the  -t  is  preserved, 
so  medine  appears  as  medinet,  kebire  as  kebiret,  etc.  In  the 
vocabularies  below  we  mark  this  termination  *,  e.g. 
medine*,  etc. 

Normally  the  male  is  masculine,  the  female  is  feminine, 
but  care  must  be  taken  not  to  assume  that  the  genders  of 
grammar  necessarily  connect  with  the  sexes  :  things  without 
life,  and  so  without  sex,  are  still  treated  as  masculine  or 
feminine.  Usually  words  ending  in  -a,  -e,  are  feminine,  as 
medine,  "  city,"  but  the  feminine  form  of  the  adjective  is 
regularly  used  with  the  (collective)  plural  (see  p.  G8  below), 
and  very  generally  the  -a*,  -e*,  ending  is  added  to  denote  the 
individual  of  a  species,  e.g.  naml  =  "ants",  namle*  =  "a 
single  ant ",  etc.,  so  we  must  not  assume  that  grammatical 
gender  (whatever  its  origin)  is  always  connected  with  sex, 
nor  are  we  entitled  to  assume  that  the  Arabs  because  they 
make  all  nouns  masculine  or  feminine  therefore  regarded 
every  object  in  nature  as  alive,  an  unverified  idea  which  has 
become  popular  with  some  theorists. 

(6)  The  Simple  Nominal  Statement 

We  see  that  ragil  kebir  =  "great  man",  and  er-ragil 
el-kebir  =  "  the  great  man  ",  in  either  case  the  adjective 


THE    FIRST    LESSON  25 

agrees  with  the  preceding  noun  in  being  defined  or  undefined. 
If  we  say — 

er-ragil  kebir 
we  get  a  simple  nominal  statement  meaning  "  the  man  is 
great  ".  There  is  no  need  to  translate  the  word  "  is  "  into 
Arabic,  the  sentence  is  complete  as  it  stands,  and  on  this 
model  a  large  number  of  simple,  but  very  useful,  sentences 
can  be  formed.  The  simple  form  we  thus  use  as  a  model 
contains  two  elements,  (i)  a  defined  noun  referring  to  some 
person  or  thing  already  known  to  us,  and  (ii)  a  new  piece  of 
information  now  first  added  to  our  previous  knowledge. 
Thus:— 

er-ragil  marid  =  The  man  is  ill 

er-ragil  el-kebir  marid  =  The  great  man  is  ill 

Muhammad  esh-shekh  el-  =  The  great  sheikh  Muhammad 
kebir  marid  is  ill. 

We  shall  see  later  that  as  the  sentence  becomes  longer  it 
becomes  more  usual  to  "  resume  "  the  thread  of  our  speech 
by  inserting  a  pronoun,  as  "  the  great  sheikh  Muhammad 
(he)  is  ill ",  etc.,  but  we  still  have  a  perfectly  sound  model 
in  our  general  scheme  of  : — 

(i)  A  noun  defined  and  already  known  ; 

(ii)  An  additional  piece  of  information  conveyed  by  a  noun 
undefined. 

Sentences  of  this  "nominal"  time  are  only  descriptive; 
they  cannot  be  used  to  describe  events  taking  place  in  time. 
Thus  I  can  say  "  Muhammad  is  great "  in  two  words, 
(i)  the  defined  name  (defined  by  its  own  nature),  and  (ii) 
the  undefined  information  now  added ;  but  if  I  mean 
"  Muhammad  is  great  "  in  the  sense  that  he  is  so  now  but 
was  formerly  not  so,  i.e.  "  he  has  become  great  ",  or  if  I  mean 


26  THE    FIRST    LESSON 

"  lie  is  great "  in  the  sense  that  he  now  is  but  will  cease  to 
be  so,  in  either  of  these  cases  I  must  use  a  verb  meaning 
**  be,  is  ",  etc.  A  sentence  without  a  verb  can  be  only 
descriptive  without  reference  to  a  happening  in  time. 

(7)  The  Interrogative  Sentence 

Any  sort  of  statement  in  Arabic  can  be  turned  into  a 
question  in  any  one  of  three  ways,  (i)  it  may  be  spoken  in  an 
interrogative  tone  of  voice,  and  this  rising  tone  is  denoted 
in  the  following  pages  by  the  use  of  the  sign  (?) :  thus  er-ragil 
kebir  =  "  the  man  (is)  great,"  er-ragil  kebir  ?  =  "  is  the  man 
great  ? " — interrogative  simply  by  reason  of  the  tone  in  which 
it  is  uttered,  (ii)  Or  the  particle  hal,  or  the  prefix  'a-  may  be 
used  before  the  sentence  ;  this  is  the  classical  usage  and  is 
now  rare  save  in  the  speech  of  the  educated.  Or  (iii)  an 
interrogative  pronoun  or  compound  derived  from  a  pronoun 
may  be  used,  as  el-medine  fen  ?  =  "  the  town  (is)  where  ?  " 
(i.e.  "  where  is  the  town  ?  "). 

A  fourth  way  (iv)  may  be  mentioned  as  heard  in  vernacular 
(or  vulgar)  speech,  which  adds  -sh,  or  -esh,  meaning  shay  = 
"  thing,  somewhat,"  etc.,  to  the  word  which  is  the  subject 
of  question,  e.g.  'etshan  =  "  thirsty,"  'etshanesh  ?  =  "  at 
all  thirsty  ?  "  i.e.  "  are  you  at  all  thirsty  ?  " 

(8)  General  Summary  of  this  Lesson 

(a)  Nouns  are  defined  (made  to  refer  to  a  particular 
individual)  (i)  by  their  own  nature  (proper  names,  pronouns, 
etc.) ;   (ii)  by  the  prefixed  article. 

(b)  Article  "  the  "  =  1-,  al-,  el-,  il-.  1-  assimilates  before 
t,  t,  th,  d,  d,  dh,  s,  s,  sh,  z,  z,  r,  n. 

(c)  Order :  substantive — adjective  (or  descriptive  noun), 
both  of  same  gender,  equally  defined  or  undefined. 

(d)  Nominal  sentence  :    (i)  Subject  of  which  statement  is 


THE   FIRST   LESSON  27 

made — defined,     (ii)  Predicate,  the  statement  made  about 
it — ^undefined. 

(e)  Interrogative :  Made  so  (i)  by  tone  of  voice,  (ii)  by 
particle  hal,  or  prefixed  a-,  (iii)  by  interrogative  pronoun, 
(iv)  by  added  -sh,  -esb. 

VOCABULARY   I 
(i)  Adjectives  of  the  measure  qdU. 

It  will  greatly  ease  our  labour  in  learning  vocabularies  of 
Arabic  words  if  we  note  that  many  words  are  formed  on 
regular  "  measures  ".  Thus  we  note  that  adjectives  such  as 
kebir  "  great  ",  ketir  "  much  ",  saghir  "  little  ",  etc.,  are 
formed  on  the  measure  -a-i-,  or  -e-i-  (where  -e-  is,  of  course, 
a  dialectal  variation  of  -a-),  that  is  to  say,  each  contains 
three  consonants  with  -a-  or  -e-  between  the  first  and  second, 
long  -i-  between  the  second  and  third.  All  these  form  their 
feminine  by  adding  -a  or  -e  which  becomes  -at,  -et,  before  a 
suffix  or  connected  word.  In  the  vocabulary  adjectives  of 
this  kind  are  fairly  numerous.  For  the  present  we  wiU  content 
ourselves  with  twelve  specimens  of  such  adjectives  : — 

faqir  =  poor  ne^if    =  dean 

gedid  =  new  qelil     =  little,  small  (quantity) 

kebir  =  great  qasir     =  narrow,  short 

ketir  =  much  qawi    =  strong 

letif  =  pretty  saghir  =  small  {in  size) 

marid  =  ill  tawil    =  long 

All  these  are  of  the  same  "  measure"  qatil,  though  one  (qawi) 
does  not  at  first  seem  to  fit  in.  This  introduces  us  to  what  is 
called  an  "  irregular  "  form,  though,  in  fact,  the  majority  of 
such  irregularities  in  Arabic  are  simply  instances  of  phonetic 
modifications  which  are  all  subject  to  certain  fixed  principles. 


28  THE   FIRST   LESSON 

This  word,  for  example,  is  properly  qawiy  and  might  be  so 
written,  but  it  is  impossible  to  give  a  separate  consonant  sound 
to  -y  after  -i  in  any  language  unless  another  vowel  follows, 
then  it  can  be  sounded  clearly,  and  thus  the  feminine  is 
qawiyye*.  In  Lower  Egypt  the  words  qelil,  qawi,  will  sound 
as  'elil,  'awi  (see  p.  19  above),  and  in  'Iraq  qawi  sounds  gawi, 
guwi,  with  hard  g-  (see  p.  18  above).  Thes6  difTerences  occur 
whenever  a  word  contains  q,  and  we  shall  not  return  to  them 
again  in  each  case,  but  content  ourselves  with  noting  the 
general  dialectal  tendency. 

(ii)  Strengthening  of  the  Adjective. 

The  adjectives  ketir,  qawi,  as  well  as  the  adjective  giddan  = 
"  very  "  can  be  added  to  other  adjectives  as  a  means  of 
strengthening,  thus  letif  =  "  pretty  ",  letif  qawi  =  "  very 
pretty",  letif  qawi  ketir  =  "very  very  pretty",  "very  pretty 
indeed",  also  halqet  (peculiar  to  Palestine).  Adverbs  properly 
do  not  occur  in  Arabic,  they  are  nouns  (or  adjectives)  used 
adverbially  and  (originally)  with  the  accusative  -an  added, 
so  that  the  classical  forms  would  be  ketir-an,  qawiy(y)-an, 
gidd-an. 

Sometimes  we  are  told  that  bi-ziyade  =  "  by  excess " 
serves  for  the  English  "  too ",  or  the  adjective  zayid= 
"  excessive "  is  thus  used,  and  bi-1-kifaye  = "  by  the 
su£&ciency  "  for  "  enough  ",  as  kabir  bi-ziyade,  "  too  large," 
kab'r  bl-1-kifaye,  "  large  enough,"  and  huwa  <uluh  zayid,  "  it, 
its  length  (is)  excessive,"  but  these  forms,  though  they  would 
be  understood  by  an  Arab,  would  never  be  used  by  him,  they 
are  essentially  alien  to  the  spirit  and  character  of  Arabic, 
and  we  must  reconcile  ourselves  to  the  fact  that  "  too  "  and 
"...  enough  "  cannot  be  expressed  in  Arabic.  Our  only  way 
of  saying  "  too  large  "  is  "  very,  very  large  "  (see  Van  Ess, 
Spoken  Arabic  of  Mesopotamia,  p.  108). 


i 


THE    FIRST    LESSON  29 

(iii)  Particular  note  must  be  made  of  the  measure  qutayil 
(for  qutayl),  which  is  a  diminutive  form,  and  is  very  much 
used  in  colloquial  Egj^tian  and  by  the  Arabs  living  along 
the  rivers  in  Mesopotamia.  Some  of  the  commonest  instances 
are : — 

sughayir  for  saghir  =  little 
kuwayis  =  good,  pretty 

tayyib  (for  tuyayib)  —  good 

(iv)  Interrogatives. 

The  following  list  gives  the  commonest  forms  of  interrogative 
particles  and  pronouns  : — 

en,   wen    ('Iraq,    S}t.),    fen  =  Where? 
To  this  we  can  add  prepositions,  and  say : — 

min  en  ?  (min  wen  ?)  =  from  where  ?  {whence  ?) 

ila  en  ?  (ila  wen  ?)  =  to  where  {whither  ?) 

kef,  kif  (Syr.)  =  how  ? 

min,men  ('Iraq)  =  who  ?  whom  ?  whose  ? 

may  be  used  of  singular  or  plural, 
ma  (only  of  things)  =  what  ? 

in  colloquial  only  used  in  a  few  expressions,  such  as  : — 
ma  lu  ?  =  what  is  the  tnatter  with  him  ? 

(lit.  what  to  him  ?) 
ana  ma  li  ?  =  what  is  tliat  to  me  ? 

eh,  ey,  e  =  what  ?     singular    or    plural, 

the  more  usual   form  in 
colloquial  speech. 

May  have  the  prepositions  added : — 

'eh  ?  ( =  b-eh)  =  Jor  what  ?—why  1 

bi-sabab  ey  ?  =  jor  what  reason  ? 


30 


THE   FIRST   LESSON 


*ala  slian  ey  ?  ('ashan  ey  ?) 
shu  (Syr.),  shinu  ('Iraq),  esh 
(Egypt.) 


=  why  ?  (Egyptian) 

=  what  ?  all  these  are  com- 
pounds of  shayy  =  thing 
(cf .  Egyptian  *ala  shan  ey  1 
above) 


(v)   Other  particles  in  common  use. 

aiwa  (Eg.),  na'am  (Eg.,  Syr.,     =  yes 
'Iraq),  belli  ('Iraq  only) 

1&  =  no.      In     classical    Arabic, 

sometimes  in  the  speech 
of  those  who  affect  the 
literary  style,  and  in  the 
dialects  of  South  Arabia 
this  can  be  used  for  the 
ordinary  negative  not 

aho,  ahe  (Egyptian,  chiefly)  =  here  is  (really  a  demon- 
strative made  from  a- 
(ha-)  with  the  personal 
pronoun  suffixed,  see  p.  40 
below) 


(vi)  Nouns  Substantive. 

bab 

bet 


dar  (fern.) 


bint  (fem.) 
moya  (ma) 
ragil  (ragul) 
tariq  (masc.  or  fem.) 


:  door 
house  (household,  house  in 

town,  etc.) 
house   (word   used   by   the 

Bedwin  people  of  Upper 

Egypt,  etc.) 
girl, 
water 
man 
road,  way. 


THE    FIRST    LESSON  31 

EXERCISE 

(1)  bet  kebir- -«I-bet  el-kebir  =  A    large    house — the    large 
— el-bet  kebir  house — the  house  is  large. 

(2)  dar    saghire — ed-dar    es-  =  A    little    house — the    httle 
saghire — ed-dar  saghire  house — the  house  is  small. 

(3)  et-tariq  tawil  ? — ^aiwa,  et-  =  Is  the  road  long? — Yes,  the 
tariq  tawil  ketir  qawi  road  is  very  long  indeed. 

(4)  fen  el-bab  ? — ^ahe  el-bab   =  Where  is  the  door  ? — Here 

is  the  door. 

(5)  fen    moya  ? — aho    moya  =  Where    is    there    water  ? — 
ketir  Here  is  plenty  of  water. 

(6)  el-bet  tayjib  ? — aiwa,  el-  =  Is  the  house  all  right  ? — Yes, 
bet  tayyib  qaAvi  the  house  is  quit*  all  right. 

(7)  el-bint    kebire  ?— la,     el-  =  Is  the  girl  big  (old)  ?— No, 
bint  saghire  (sughayire)  the  girl  is  a  httle  one. 

(8)  ed-dar     tayyibe  ? — aiwa,  =  Is  the  house  nice  ? — Yes,  the 
ed-dar  kuwaise  kuwaise  house  is  very  nice  indeed. 

(9)  el-moya     ketir  ? — ^la,     el-  =  Is  there  much  water  ? — No, 
moya  qelil  giddam  -  the  water  is  very  scanty, 

(10)  er-ragil  faqir  qawi  =  The  man  is  very  poor. 

(11)  fen    el-moya  ? — ^aho    el-  =  Where  is  the  water  ? — Here 
moya  is  the  water. 

(12)  el-bet  fen  ? — ahe  el-bet  =  Where  is  the  house? — ^Here 

it  is. 

(13)  ed-dar  es-saghire  fen  ?      =  Where  is  the  httle  house  ? 

Notes 

In  the  words  given  above  long  vowels  within  a  word  are 
marked,  but  final  long  vowels  are  not.  It  may  be  taken  as  a 
general  rule  that  short  final  vowels  have  been  lost  and  those 


32  THE    FIRST    LESSON 

represented  are,  as'  they  stand,  long;  indeed  it  is  not  so  easy  to 
pronounce  a  final  short,  which  is  probably  the  reason  why  they 
have  dropped  out.  When  suffixes  are  added,  the  long,  now  no 
longer  final,  may  be  shortened  or  it  may  remain  long,  and  in 
this  latter  case  this  long  vowel  is  noted  like  every  other  long 
occurring  within  a  word. 

It  is  probably  needless  to  say  that  it  is  not  practicable  to 
translate  literally  from  one  language  to  another  and  it  is 
certainly  not  desirable  to  make  the  attempt.  In  translating 
from  English  to  Arabic,  or  from  any  language  to  another,  the 
first  thing  is  to  observe  the  meaning  at  the  bottom  of  the 
sentence,  the  next  is  to  express  it  naturally  in  the  language 
into  which  we  are  making  the  translation :  to  translate  word 
for  word  means  certain  disaster,  we  ought  not  to  try  to  repro- 
duce what  we  say  in  the  language  of  the  Arab,  but  rather  to 
express  in  Arabic  the  meaning  previously  expressed  in  English. 
For  example,  if  we  want  to  say  in  Arabic  "  Is  there  much 
water  ? "  the  sentence  contains  four  words,  but  we  can 
dispense  with  two  of  these,  one  "  there  "  thus  used  is  a  peculiar 
English  idiom,  another  "  is  "  is  not  necessary  in  an  Arabic 
nominal  sentence  ;  it  is  quite  sufiicient  to  say  "  the  water — 
much  ?  "  in  an  "  interrogative  "  tone  of  voice,  i.e.  rising 
inflection,  and  we  have  all  that  is  necessary  for  an  Arabic 
sentence  ;  the  essential  points  are  (1)  that  we  define  the 
"  water  "  as  already  known  to  us,  and  (2)  do  not 
define  the  "much"  as  being  that  about  which  we  need 
information. 

Supplementary  Note  on  the  Interrogative  Pronouns 

who  ? — Classical  Arabic  man — 'Iraq  men.  mi  ?  Central 
Arabia,  Egypt,  Syria,  min. 

what  ? — (1)  ma  (as  class.  Ar.)  rare,  m'hu,  mu,  Oman,  'Iraq. 


THE    FIRST    LESSON  33 

(2)  ajy  (class.)  ej,  e,  (eh),  Egypt,  ev,  e,  eiya,  Syria, 
Palestine,  C.  Arabia.  (With  interrogative  -sh),  esh,  she,  sh, 
'Iraq,  esh  (Damascus),  S.  Arabia,  Egypt,  ash,  Morocco, 
wush,  Transjordania.    shu,  Syria  ( =  ash-hu). 

(3)  en-hu,  -hi,  hum  (Egypt),   en-u,  -a,  -hom,  Syria. 
which} — class.  Ar.  anna(y),ani,  Egypt,  anu,  anu,  Palestine. 


Chapter  IV 

THE  SECOND  LESSON— THE  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS 
AND    THE    NEGATIVE    SENTENCE 

(9)  We  have  already  used  two  kinds  of  nouns,  the  substantive 
and  the  adjective,  we  now  turn  to  the  third  kind,  the  pronoun. 
The  commonest  pronoun  is  the  personal  "  I  ",  "  he  ",  "  she  ", 
etc.,  and  because  of  its  very  common  use  there  are  perceptible 
differences  in  the  several  dialects,  though  these  are  for  the 
most  part  no  more  than  phonetic  modifications. 

The  personal  pronoun  appears  in  two  forms,  (a)  the  separate 
form  which  is  used  in  the  nominative  "  I  ",  "  he  ",  etc.,  and 
(b)  the  suffixed  form  which  is  used  for  the  possessive  "  my  ", 
"  his  ",  etc.,  or  for  the  objective  "  me  ",  "  him  ",  etc.  The 
first  form  stands  alone,  the  second  can  only  be  used  attached 
to  a  noun,  verb,  or  certain  particles. 

(10)  The  Personal  Pronoun  :  Separate  Form 

Sing.   1.   "  I  "  ana,  ani. 

2.  masc.   "thou"  ente  (Eg.),  ent  (Syr.),  inte  (Eg., 

Ir.). 
fern.     "  thou  "  inti  (Eg.,  Ir.),  enti  (Eg.,  Syr.). 

3.  masc.   "he"  huwa  (Eg.,  Syr.),  hu  (Syr.),  hu'a 

(Ir.),  hua  ('Ir.). 
fem.     "she"  hiya  (Eg.,   Syr.),  hi  (Syr.),  hi'a 
('Ir.),  hie  ('Ir.). 

Plur.   1.  "we"ehna(Eg.,'Ir.),ihna(Eg.,Syr.),nehn(Syr.). 

2.  "  you  "  entu  (Eg.,  Syr.),  entum  (Eg.),  intu  ('Ir.), 

intum  ('Ir.). 

3.  "  they  "  hum  (Eg.,  Syr.),  humma  (Eg.,  Syr.,  'Ir.). 


THE    SECOND   LESSON  35 

The  plural  "  we  "  is  very  often  used  for  the  singular  "  I  ", 
and  the  plural  "  you  "  is  used  for  "  thou  "  though  this  is  not 
at  all  so  common  as  in  the  European  languages,  and  the  2nd 
person  singular  is  neither  familiar  nor  discourteous.  In  the 
compounds  hadretek  =  "  your  honour  ",  etc.,  it  is  the  most 
respectful  form. 

The  3rd  person  may  be  used  very  much  as  a  demonstrative, 
as  in  huwa  mush  salih  .  .  .  =  "  is  it  not  true  that  .  .  ." 

It  is  generally  possible  to  omit  the  personal  pronoun  when 
it  is  obvious,  thus  'atshansh  ?  =  "  thirsty  ?  ",  i.e.  "  are  you 
thirsty  ?  " 

The  personal  pronouns  are  all  defined  by  their  own  nature 
as  they  refer  to  known  persons  or  things  :  thus  we  form 
sentences : — 

ana  faqir  =  /  am  poor 

ente  keslan  =  Thou  art  lazy 

huwa  kebir  qawi  =  He  is  a  very  great  one,  etc. 

Very  often  a  personal  pronoun  is  added  to  a  word  already 
defined,  and  this  added  pronoun  may  become  necessary  when 
the  predicate  is  also  defined.  Thus  used  the  pronoun  seems 
to  be  an  equivalent  to  the  verb  "  to  be  ",  thus — 

el-walad  huwa  keslan  =  The  boy  {he)  is  lazy 
ana  huwa  et-tagir       =  I  am  the  merchant 

{I  am  he  who  is  the  merchant) 
ente  huwa  er-ragil  ?     =  Art  thou  the  man  ? 
ente  marid  ?  =  Are  you  iU  ? 

luya  maride  =  She  is  ill 

(11)  The  Negative  Sentence 

A  sentence  may  be  made  negative  by  inserting  ma  ('Iraq 
mu)  before  the  part  denied,  as  er-ragil  ma  kebir  =  "  the  man 


36  THE    SECOND    LESSON 

is  not  great  ",  but  colloquial  speech,  especially  in  Egypt  and 
Syria,  commonly  adds  -sh  (-she  before  a  following  consonant), 
a  corruption  of  shayy  =  "  thing  ",  after  the  word  negatived, 
thus  ma  anish  rayih  =  "  I  am  not  going  ",  tegi  =  "  come  ", 
ma  tegish  =  "  do  not  come  ",  etc. 

Combined  with  the  personal  pronouns  we  get  negatives  : — 

manish  (ma  anish)         =  /  am  not 

mantash  (ma  enta-sh)  =  Thou  art  not 

mantish  (ma  enti-sh)     =  Thou  (fem.)  art  not 

mush  (ma  hu-sh)  =  He  is  not 

ma  hish  =  She  is  not 

malmash  (ma  ehna-sh)  =  We  are  not 

mantush  (ma  entu-sh)  =  You  are  not 

ma  humsh  =  They  are  not 

The  3rd  sing.  masc.  mush  is  in  very  general  use  as  a  negative 
particle  and  may  be  found  with  the  other  persons,  thus  mush 
kebir  =  "  not  great  ",  ana  mush  gu'an  =  "  I  am  not  hungry  " 
(vulg.). 

Summary  of  Lesson  II 

I.  Personal  pronouns  as  separate  words  ana  =  "  I  ",  ante  = 
"  thou  ",  etc.,  are  used  as  nominatives. 

By  nature  they  are  defined  as  referring  to  known 
persons,  etc. 

In  sentences  they  acquire  the  meaning  of  "  is  ",  "  are  ", 
etc. 

11.    Negative  Sentences. 

Necessary  to  use  ma  (mu)  =  "  not  ". 
Colloquial  commonly  adds  -sh  (-she). 
la  =  "  no  "  (used  for  "  not  "  in  classical  Arabic  and  in 
South  Arabia). 


THE    SECOND   LESSON 


37 


VOCABULARY    TO    LESSON    II 


(i)  Conjunctions,  we-  (wa-,  wi-) 
"  and  "  (must  be  attached  to 
following  word),  lakin,  we- 
lakin  "  but ". 

(ii)  Adjectives  with  -an, /cm.  -ane*, 
added  to  the  stem. 

'at-shan  =  thirsty 

gu'an  =  hungry 

keslan  =  lazy,  idle 

ta'ban  =  tired 

za'lan  =  angry 

(iii)   Other  words. 

'esh  =  bread      (Egypt), 

life  (ebie- 

where). 

habl  =  rope 


hawa 

=  weather,  air 

himar 

=  ass 

bi^an 

=  horse 

khubz 

=  bread        (Syria, 

•Iraq) 

kitab 

=  book 

mal 

=  property 

mara* 

=  woman 

9a'ab  (sa'b) 

=  difficult 

shughl 

=  task,       business, 

work 
=  merchant 

tagir 

walad 

=  child 

keman 

=  likewise,       also. 

similarly 

EXERCISE 
(Fob  Fobms  of  Address,  see  p.  39  below). 


(1)  ente  walad  keslan 

(2)  la,  ya  sidi,  manish  keslan 

(3)  el-bint  hiya  maride  ? — la, 
ya  sitt,  hiya  ma  hish 
maride 

(4)  ana  faqir 

(5)  huwa  ta'ban  qawi 

(6)  ya  bint,  enti  keslane  ketir 

(7)  ente  'atshansb  ? — la,  ana 
gu'an 

(8)  el-habl  mush  tawil  ? — 
aiwa,  el-habl  tawil  ketir 


(9)  el-mara  hiye  faqire 

(10)  ana  ta'ban  we-gu'an 

(11)  huwa  za'lan  ketir  qawi 


You  are  an  idle  boy. 
No,  sir,  I  am  not  idle. 
Is  the  girl  ill  ?— No,  madam, 
the  girl  is  not  ill. 

I  am  poor. 

He  is  very  tired. 

Girl,  you  are  very  idle. 

Are  you  thirsty? — No,  I  am 
hungry. 

The  rope  is  not  long 
(enough)  ? — Yes,  it  is  very 
long  (  =  it  is  long 
enough). 

The  woman  is  poor. 

I  am  tired  and  hungry. 

He  was  very  angry  indeed. 


38  THE    SECOND   LESSON 

(12)  ed-dar  ma  hish  nedife      =  The  house  is  not  clean. 

(13)  el-walad  es-saghir  huwa  =  The  httle  boy  is  very  lazy. 
keslan  qawi 

(14)  el-mara  hiye  ta'bane  ketir  =  The  woman  is  very  tired. 

(15)  el-walad  es-saghir  =  Is  the  httle  boy  tired  ? 
ta'bansh  ? 

(16)  el-'esh (khubz) tayyib  ? —  =  Is    the    bread    good?— No, 
la,  el-'esh  mush  tayyib  the  bread  is  not  good. 

(17)  el-mara  el-faqire  hiye       =  Is  the  poor  woman  tired  ? 
ta'bane  ? 

(18)  la,  we-lakin  hiye  gu'ane  =  No,  but  she  is  very  hungry. 
ketir 

(19)  er-ragil  huwa  za'lan  qawi  =  The  man  is  very  angry. 

(20)  'atshansh  ?— la,  we-lakin  =  (You)   thirsty  ?— No,   but  I 
ana  gu'an  qawi  am  very  hungry. 

(21)  esh-shughli    huwa    sa'ab  =  The  work  is  very  hard. 

ketir 

(Here,  as  often,  it  becomes  necessary  to  insert  a  vowel  to  prevent  three 
consonants  coming  in  contact.  Usually  the  inserted  vowel  is  -i-  or  -e-, 
but  it  often  becomes  -u-  when  the  vowel  -u-  follows  in  the  next  syllable. 
Thus  "  shughl  huwa  ..."  has  three  consonants  in  contact  (of  course 
-gh-  is  only  one  consonant  sound,  though  we  are  obliged  to  represent  it  by 
two  letters)  and  so  -i-  is  inserted  between  -1  and  h-,  but  this  must  be  a  very 
short  vowel  sound  hurried  through  as  much  as  possible.  The  necessity 
of  these  inserted  vowels  is  increased  in  the  modern  colloquial  by  the  loss 
of  the  final  short  vowels  used  in  classical  Arabic  to  denote  the  cases  of  nouns 
and   moods   of   verbs.) 

(22)  la,  esh-shughli  mush  sa'ab  =  No,   the  work  is  not  very 
ketir  hard. 

(23)  gu'ansh  ? — aiwa,  we-ana  =  (You)  hungry? — Yes,  and  I 
'atshan  keman  am  thirsty  as  well. 

(24)  el-mal  ketir  ? — la,  el-mal  =  Is   the   property   much? — 
mush  ketir  No,   the  property  is  not 

much. 

(25)  er-ragil  el-faqir  huwa        =  The  poor  man  is  hungry  and 
gu'an  we-ta'ban  keman  tired  as  well. 


THE    SECOND   LESSON  39 

(26)  el-himar  huwa  keslan  =  The  donkey  is  very  lazy. 
qawi — la,  mush  keslan  No,  it  is  not  lazy. 

(27)  el-hisan  el-kebir  huwa  =  The  big  horse  is  very  tired. 
ta'ban  qawd 

(28)  el-bint  es-saghire  fen  ?—  =  Where  is  the  little  girl?— 
ya  sidi,  ahe  el-bint  es-  Here  is  the  Uttle  girl,  sir. 
saghire 

(29)  er-ragil  huwa  tagir  we-  =  The  man  is  a  merchant  and 
huwa  mush  faqir  he  is  not  poor. 

(30)  el-mara  el-faqire  hiya  =  The  poor  woman  is  very 
ta'bane  ketir  we-1-bint  hiya  tired  and  the  girl  is  tired  as 
ta'bane  keman                               well. 

(31)  ente  keslansh  ? — la,  =  Are  you  lazy? — No,  I  am 
manish  keslan  not    lazy. 

APPENDIX    TO    LESSON    II 
Terms  used  rs  Addbess,  etc. 

ya  =  0,  call  to  one  near 

ayy-  =  call  to  one  distant 

walad  =  boy 

eabiyy  =  boy 

shabb  =  boy  (courteous  form) 

ghnlam  =  boy  (only  to  servant,  boy  of  the  lower  order,  etc.) 

kebir  =  old  man  (courteous) 

'aguz  =  old  woman 

(la  Egypt  'aguz  =  old  man,  'aguze  =  old  vx>man) 
'ammi  =  my  uncle  (polite  to  elderly  man) 

shekh  =  sir  (to  elderly  man,  courteous) 

ente  =  you  (to  person  unknown,  familiar) 

sayyid  =  sir  (to  those  who  claim  to  be  of  the  kindred  of  the 

Prophet) 
sidi  =  sir  (used  by  servants,  etc.,  addressing  their  master) 

khawaga  =  sir,  Mr.  (middle  classes,  etc.,  much  used  "  up  country  " 

to  Europeans) 
effendi(Turki8h)=  sir,  Mr.  (ofi&cials,  clerks,  professional  classes,  etc.) 
sitt,  sitti  =  madam 

sayyide  ==  madam  (to  lady  of  rank) 

khatun  =  (in  speaking  of,  not  to,  a  young  lady  of  good  position, 

in  addressing  letters,  etc.) 
h^hratek  =  your  honour  (proper  form  of  courteous  address) 

genabek  =  your  honour  (chiefly  to  clergy,  Europeans,  etc.) 


Chapter  V 

THE    THIRD    LESSON— THE    PERSONAL   PRONOUN 
AS    SUFFIXES 

(12)  The  personal  pronouns  ana,  ente,  etc.,  which  we  have 
already  considered,  are  only  used  in  the  nominative,  i.e.  as 
meaning  "  I  ",  "  he  ",  "  she  ",  etc.  ;  for  the  oblique  cases, 
possessive  such  as  "  my  ",  "  his  ",  "  our  ",  etc.,  or  objective 
such  as  "  me  ",  "  him  ",  "  us  ",  etc.,  a  different  system  is 
employed  and  the  pronoun  is  expressed  by  a  shortened  form 
which  is  added  to  the  end  of  a  noun,  verb,  or  certain  particles. 
Thus  -i  is  used  for  "  my  ",  e.g.  beti  =  "  my  house  ",  hisani  = 
"  my  horse  ",  etc.  The  suffixes  thus  used  are  : — 
Sing.   1.   -i 

2.  masc.   -ak,  -ek,  -k* 
fern,     ik,  -ki* 

3.  masc.   -uh,  -u,  -o,  -h* 
fern,     -ha 

Plur.   1.   -na,  -ne 

2.  -ku,  -kum,  -kon 

3.  -hum,  -um,  -om 

The  forms  marked  (*)  are  only  used  after  vowel  endings. 
For  the  most  part  these  endings  hardly  differ  in  the  various 
dialects,  but  perhaps  2nd  plur.  -ku  is  more  often  heard  in 
Egypt  than  elsewhere.  The  tendency  of  Syrian  Arabic  is 
towards  the  -o  sound  for  the  3rd  masc.  sing,  and  very  often 
the  2nd  and  3rd  plural  in  Syria  sound  -kon,  hon.  'Iraq  has 
a  peculiar  form  (sometimes)  heard  in  the  2nd  fem.  sing. : 
after  a  consonant  instead  of  -ik  we  may  get  ech,  the  -ch 
sounding  like  the  first  two  letters  of  "  church  ",  which  is 
a  palatalized  rendering  of  "  kirk  ".     In  'Iraq  also  we  may 


THE   THIED   LESSON  41 

get  -eki,  for  this  person,  and  -ekum,  -ehum  in  the  2nd  and 

3rd  pluT.  after  a  consonant. 
Thus  beti  =  "  my  house  ",  betek  =  "  thy  house  ",  betuh  = 

"  his  house  ",  betna  =  "  our  house  ",  etc. 
A  pronominal  suffix  added  to  a  noun  defines  it  completely 

just  as  the  article  would  do,  for  "  my  house  "  specifies  a 

particular  house  as  much  as  "  the  house  ".    Hence  we  are 

able  to  form  sentences  : — 

shughli  sa'ab  =  My  work  i^  difficult 

betek  wasi'  =  Your  house  is  spacious 

daruh  hiya  saghire  =  His  house  is  small 
betna  mush  kebir    =  Our  house  is  not  large 
huwa  tagir  =  He  is  a  merchant 

huwa  shughli  =  It  is  my  business 

hiya  darek  =  It  is  thy  house 

betkum  fen  ?  =  Where  is  your  house  ? 

When  an  adjective  is  added  to  a  word  having  a  suffixed 

pronoun  it  is  necessary  to  make  the  adjective  definite  to  agree 

with  the  noun  and  for  this  purpose  the  defining  article  has 

to  be  used  : — 

beti  el-kebir  =  My  large  house 

daruh  es-saghire      =  His  little  cottage 

(13)    The  Suffixes  with  a  Feminine  Noun 

Feminine  nouns  in  -a*,  -e*,  as  already  noted,  make  this 
termination  into  -at,  -et,  before  a  suffix,  or  rather  the  original 
-t  is  preserved  by  the  protection  of  the  suffix.  So,  medine 
"  city  ",  medineti  =  "  my  city  ",  medinetek  =  "  thy  city  ", 
medinetha  =  "  her  city  ",  etc. 

(14)    The  Three  Nouns  of  Kinship 

The  three  nouns,  ab  =  "  father  ",  akh  =  "  brother  ",  and 
ham  =  "  father-in-law  ",  are  treated  as  though  they  ended 


42  THE    THIKD   LESSON 

in  -u  and  so  make  abuk  =  "  thy  father  ",  abuna  =  "  our 
father  ",  abuh  =  "his  father  ",  akhuk  =  "  thy  brother  ",  etc. 
In  the  1st  pers.  sing,  we  (usually)  find  -ye,  -ya,  -yi  added,  thus 
abuya  =  "  my  father  ",  akhuye  =  "  my  brother  "  (also 
akhui).  The  "  Western  "  dialect  (Morocco,  Algiers,  etc.)  has 
buy  a  =  "  my  father  ". 

abuk  huwa  za'lan  ?  =  Is  your  father  angry  ? 

akhukum  es-saghir  huwa  ta'ban  =  Your  little  brother  is  very 

qawi  tired 

hamuha  mush^hani  =  Her  father-in-law  is  not 

rich 

(15)    Colloquial  Insertion  of  "  Property  " 

Colloquial  speech  frequently  introduces  an  entirely 
superfluous  noun  denoting  "  property "  with  the  suffixed 
pronoun  after  the  noun  to  which  the  possessive  refers,  it 
then  becoming  necessary  that  that  noun  be  defined  by  the 
addition  of  the  defining  article,  thus  in  Egypt  we  find  beta' 
{fern,  beta't,  plur.  butu')  as — 

el-kitab  beta'i    =  kitabi  =  My  hook 
ed-dar  beta'tek  =  darek  =  Thy  house,  etc. 

In  Syria  the  inserted  word  appears  as  taba*,  fem.  taba't, 
which  is  employed  in  the  same  way ;  and  in  'Iraq  the  word  is 
mal,  as — 

al-himar  mali  =  himari  =  My  ass 
Sometimes  also  haqq  is  thus  used,  chiefly  by  Bedwin  and  by 
tribes  bordering  on  Arabia,   as  el-kitab  haqqi  =  kitabi  = 
"  my  book  ". 

The  form  beta'  is  used  in  Egypt  and  Palestine,  but  in 
Palestine  it  often  becomes  taba',  presumably  a  "  Spoonerism  ". 
Its  original  form  was  meta',  and  in  Tripoli  this  is  still  used 
and  may  occur  anjrwhere  up  to  Mex  on  the  western  outskirts 
of  Alexandria.    In  Morocco  this  contracts  to  n'ta'  (=  neta' 


THE    THIRD   LESSON 


43 


with  a  very  short  -e-,  note  that  the  -t-  has  become  emphatic) 
and  to  ta',  e.g.  I'm'dma  ta'at  s-sultan  =  "  the  Sultan's  city  ", 
which  gives  a  fair  idea  of  the  way  in  which  the  vowels  are 
"  swallowed  "  in  the  west,  one  of  the  chief  difficulties  in 
adapting  colloquial  Arabic  to  Western  use.  In  the  ^■emacula^ 
of  Malta  (which  is  Arabic  with  a  large  intrusion  of  Italian 
in  the  vocabulary  not  in  the  grammar)  this  produces  the 
possessive  ta  =  "  of  ". 

In  Palestine  and  Syria  we  also  get  shet,  jH.  shiyut,  which 
appears  in  the  vernacular  of  Damascus  as  shit,  both  derived 
from  shayy(et)  "  thing  ".  The  form  mal  is  common  in  'Iraq, 
spreading  do\sTi  south  into  Oman  and  north  into  Mesopotamia 
as  far  at  least  as  Mosul ;  haqq  or  hagg  properly  belongs  to 
South  Arabia  and  is  likely  to  be  met  with  in  the  speech  of 
seamen  from  Aden  and  the  district  east  of  that  port,  practically 
the  only  area  from  which  Arab  seamen  come  in  any  numbers. 


WORD 

LIST 

(i)      Adjectives     in     '  -i '     maMng 

ism 

=  name^ 

femimne  '  -iwe*  '. 

Ubaa 

=  garment,  clothes 

'ali 

=  high 

liasa 

=  not  yet,  no  longer 

ghali 

=  dear  (in  price) 

medine* 

=  cUy 

ghani 

=  rich 

mubarak 

=  blessed* 

radi 

=  bad 

nehar 

=  day  {not  night) 

(For   '  gentile 

'   nouns  in   '  -i '   see 

rigl 

=  foot 

P- 

46  below) 

sa'id 

=  prosperous 

(ii) 

9abib 

=  friend,  master 

ab,  abu- 

=  father 

«alih 

=  honest 

akh,  akhii- 

=  brother 

9anduq 

=  box 

beled 

=  country,  town. 

ukht 

=  sister 

district 

amm 

=  mother 

baiy 

=  alive 

was' 

=  broad,  spacious 

bal 

=  condition 

yom 

=  day  {twenty-fovr 
hours) 

*  Classical  Arabic  does  not  treat  the  '  i-  '  as  part  of  the  stem  but  simply 
as  a  prefixed  vowel  which  is  dropped  after  a  preceding  vowel,  but  the 
colloquial  treats  it  as  though  '  'ism  *. 

*  It  is  common  to  hear  words  beginning  in  '  mu- '  pronounced  as  though 
beginning  '  em- '. 


44  THE    THIRD    LESSON 


EXERCISE 


(1)  shughlukum  sa'ab  ketir  ?    =  Is  your  work  very  hard? — 
— aiwa,  huwa  sa'ab  Yes,  it  is  hard. 

(2)  al-walad   es-saghir  ismuh  =  What    is    the    little    boy's 
ey  ? — ^ya  sidi,  ismuh  Mahmud      name  ? — Sir,  his  name  is 

Mahmud. 

(3)  er-ragil  el-faqir  betuh  fen  ?  =  The  poor  man,  where  is  his 

house  ? 

(4)  fen    kitabek  ?  —  ya  =  Where  is  your  book  ? — Sir, 
khawage,  ahe  cl-kitab  beta'i         here  is  my  book. 

(5)  er-iagil  huwa  abiiya  we-1-  =  The  man  is  my  father  and  the 
walad  huya  akbuya  s-saghir         boy  is  my  httle  brother. 

(6)  ahe  ummi  we-ukbti  keman  =  Here  is  my  mother  and  my 

sister  as  well. 

(7)  et-tagir   huwa  ghani  we-  =  The  merchant  is  wealthy  and 
maluh  ketir  qawi  his  property  is  very  great 

indeed. 

(8)  cl-*esh    (khubz)    ghali       =  The  bread  is  very  dear. 
giddan 

(9)  esh  halek,  ya  sahibi  ?        =  How  are  you,  my  friend  ? 

(10)  himarek  (el-himar  beta'ik)  =  Your  ass  is  very  sturdy  and 
huwa  qawi  giddan,  we-himari        my  ass  is  stiu:dy  also. 
(el-himar  beta'i)  huwa  qawi 

keman 

(11)  betek  fen  ?  =  Where  is  your  house  ? 

(12)  shughli  huwa  sa'ab  ketir  =  My  work  is  very  hard  and  I 
we-ana  ta'ban  qawi  am  very  tired. 

(13)  beto  saghir  =  His  house  is  small. 

(14)  beto    es-saghir   mush       =  His  little  house  is  not  clean. 
nedif 

(15)  es-sanduq  malek  wen  ? —  =  Where   is   your   box? — My 
es-sanduq  mali  hena  (ahe  as-  box  is  here. 

sanduq  beta'i) 


THE    THIRD    LESSON  45 

(16)  darhum  hiye  saghire  we-  =  Their  house  is  small  but  my 
lakin  dari  wasi'e  ketir  house  is  very  spacious. 

(17)  min  huwa  ?— hliwa  abuna  =  Who    is    he  ?— He    is    our 

father. 

(18)  abukum  ismuh  ey  ? —  =  Your  father,  what  is  his 
ismuh  Ahmed  we-ismi  name  ?  —  His  name  is 
Ahmed  keman                              Ahmed,  and  my  name  is 

Ahmed  as  well. 

(19)  we-akhuk  es-saghir  esh  =  And  your  Uttle  brother,  what 
ismuh  ? — ismuh  Muhammad         is  his  name? — His  name 

is  Muhammed. 

(20)  abuh  tagir  ghani  ketir  =  His  father  is  a  very  rich 
qawi  merchant. 

(21)  et-tagir  el-ghani  mush  =  The  wealthy  merchant  is  not 
saUh  trustworthy. 

(22)  abukum  huwa  haiy  ? —  =  Is  your  father  ahve  ?— No, 
la,  ya  sidi  abuna  lissa  haiy  sir,  our  father  is  no  longer 

ahve. 

(23)  libasi  el-gedid  huwa  =  My  new  clothes  are  not 
kuwayyis  mush  ketir  altogether    good. 

(24)  ente  huwa  Muhammed  =  You  who  are  called 
we-ismuh  akhuk  ?  Muhammed,  what  is  your 

brother's  name  ? 

ADDITIONAL  EXAMPLES 
neharkum  sa'id  =  May  your  day  he  prosperous  ( =  Good  day) 
(Reply)   neharkum  sa'id   we-mubarak  =  May   your  day   he 

prosperous  and  hlessed 
kef  halkum  ?  \ . 


eshhalek?(S>Tian)|^"^'''-^2^^- 


(When  inquiring  after  anyone's  health  the  inquirer  should  gaze  earnestly 
into  the  face  of  the  one  he  addresses  as  though  searching  for  any  sign  of 
ill-health.  To  neglect  this  makes  the  inquiry  seem  perfunctory  and  even 
supercilious.) 


46 


THE    THIRD   LESSON 


we-kef  akhuk  ?  =  And  how  is  your  brother  ? 

(It  is  becoming  to  ask  after  male  relatives  or  friends  but  not  after  anyone's 
family  as  this  would  include  the  women,  and  virtuous  women  may  not 
have  their  names  dragged  into  conversation  amongst  males  nor  even  be 
thus  referred  to  by  implication.) 

riglek  !  =  Your  foot ! 
yeminek  !  =  Your  right ! 

(These  and  such  like  are  street  cries  warning  the  foot-passenger  to  take 
care  of  some  one  riding,  driving,  or  carrying  a  burden.) 

min  ?  =  Who  {is  there)  ?,  Who  is  it  ? 

(Challenge  of  sentry,  or  call  of  one  inside  to  know  who  is  knocking. 
The  most  proper  reply  is  to  invoke  the  name  of  God  (see  p.  89)  or  to  bless 
the  Prophet  (see  p.  89).) 

el-wa'd  din  =  A  'promise  is  an  obligation. 

(Example  of  nominal  sentence  formed  of  two  nouns  instead  of  noun  and 
adjective,  din  =  "  religion,"  not  religious  opinions  in  the  European 
fashion,  but  the  observance  of  sacred  obligations.  Muslims  do  not  talk 
of  missionaries  "  bearing  the  gospel "  but  describe  them  as  "  introducing 
the  sacred  law  ".) 

dinek  ey  ?  =  What  is  your  religion  ? 


APPENDIX     TO     LESSON    III 

Gentile  nouns  in  -i,  fern,  iyye  :   some  of  these  use  the  fem. 
as  a  (collective)  plural. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

Abyssinian 

habeshi 

habash 

(so  often  for  negro) 

Arab 

'arabi 

'arab 

(desert  Arab) 

bedawi 

bedawi 

Copt 

qibti 

qibt 

(Egyptian  Christian) 

Christian 

nasrani 

nasara 

masihi 

masihiyye 

(The  former  term  is  in  more  general  use,  but  Christians  often  prefer  the 
latter.) 


THE   THIRD   LESSON 


47 


Egyptian 

English 
European 
French 
German 


Singular. 
misri 

inkelizi 
firengi 
faransawi 
nimsawi 


Plural. 
misriyye 
inkeliz 
afrang 

faransis 
nimsawiyye 


(Really  thia  denotes  Austrian,  the  branch  of  the  German  race  which  had 
earliest  contact  with  the  Muslim  world.  More  correctly  (but  not  commonly) 
the  North  German  is  "  alamani  ".) 


Greek 


rumi 
vunani 


rum 
yun 


(rumi  =  "  Roman,"  i.e.   subject  of  the  Byzantine  Empire,  yunani 
Ionian.    The  Greek  language  is  called  rumi,  Latin  is  firengi.) 


Indian 

Italian 
Jew 

Muslim 

Persian 

Syrian 
Turk 


Western 
(Morocco,  etc.) 


hindi 
italiya 
yehudi 
muslim 


hunud 
talyani 
yehud 
muslimin 


(Do  not  use  the  term  "  Muhammedan  ".) 


agemi  agem 

farisi  furs 

shami  sham 

turki  etrak 
'usmani 
'usmanli 

( =  Turkish  horseman) 

maghribi  magharibe 


Chapter  VI 

THE  FOURTH  LESSON— THE  SUFFIXED  PRONOUNS 
WITH    PREPOSITIONS 

(16)  The  suffixed  pronouns  may  be  attached  to  prepositions 
and  then  denote  the  objective  "  me  ",  "  thee  ",  "  him  ",  etc. 
Thus  ma'  =  "  with  ",  ma'i  =  "  with  me  ",  ma'ek  =  "  with 
thee  ",  etc. 

List  of  Commoner  Prepositions 

*an     "  with,  from  ". 

'ala     "  upon  ",  really  *alay  ('ale)  and  so  'ale-  with  a  suffix, 

as  'alek  =  "  upon  thee  ",  'alekum  =  "  upon  you  ", 

etc.    With  the  1st  sing,  -i  the  suffix  becomes  -ya, 

-ye,  or  -yi  (as  with  abu-)  thus  'aleya  =  "  upon  me  ". 
'and   "with". 
bi-      "  in  ",  bi  =  "  in  me  ",  bek  =  "  in  thee  "  (for  bi-ek), 

buh,   bo  =  "  in   him  ",    biha  =  "  in   her  ",   bina  = 

"  in  us  ",  etc. 
f!        "  in  ",   fi  =  "  in   me  ",   fik  =  "  in   thee  ",   fih  =  "  in 

him  ",  etc. 
ila      "  to,  towards  ",  like  'ala  its  final  -a  =  -ay  and  so  -e 

before    suffixes,    ileya  =  "  towards     me  ",    ilek  = 

"  towards  thee  ",  etc. 
ka-     "  like  ". 
li-fi     "to",  li  =  "to  me",  lik  =  "  to  thee",  luh  =  "  to 

him  ",    lana  =      "  to    us  ",    lakum  =  "  to    you  ", 

lahum  =  "  to  them  ". 


1 


THE   FOURTH   LESSON  49 

ma'    "with". 

min    "  from  ",  with  suffixes  minn-,  as  minni  =  "  from  me  ", 
minnek  =  "  from  thee  ",  etc. 

The  prepositions  bi-,  ka-,  li-  can  only  be  used  as  prefixes 
before  nouns  or  pronouns,  the  others  can  stand  alone,  though 
still  of  course  before  the  nouns  they  govern.  Thus  we  can 
say  fi  1-medine  =  "  in  the  city  ",  but  "  to  the  city  ",  if  we 
use  li-,  must  have  the  li-  joined  up  as  in  "  li-1-medine  ". 

(17)  Special  Use  of  Fi 

The  form  fih  =  "  in  it  "  is  conmionly  used  in  the  colloquial 
as  meaning  "  there  is  ",  and  so  fish  as  "  is  there  ?  "  and  ma  fish 
"  there  is  not  ".     Thus  :— 

honak  fih  moya  =  There  is  water  there 

(Of  course  this  can  be  a 
question  if  uttered  in  an 
interrogative  tone.) 

fish  khubz  ?  (Eg.  'esh)  =  Is  there  aiiy  bread  ? 

ma  fish  moya  =  There  is  tw  water 

(18)  Special  Negative  is  Syrian  Arabic 

In  Syrian  dialect  we  find  mann-  (=ina  aim-,  the  ann- 
being  a  particle)  with  the  personal  suffix  used  as  a 
negative,  thus  manni  katib  =  "  I  am  not  writing  ",  mannek 
katib  =  "  thou  art  not  writing  ",  mannuh  katib  =  "  he  is  not 
writing  ",  etc. 

(19)  Ways  of  Expressing  "  Have  " 

The  preposition  'and  means  "  with  ",  "  in  the  possession 
of  ",  and  with  the  personal  suffixes  this  conveys  the  sense  of 
"  have  ",  thus  : — 


50 


THE   FOUETH   LESSON 


'andi 

=  I  have 

'andek 

=  Thou  hast 

'andik 

=  Thou  (fern 

)  hast 

'anduh 

=  He  has 

'andiha 

=  She  has 

'andine 

=  We  have 

'andukum 

=  You  have 

'anduhum 

=  Thefj  Jiave. 

'and 

'and-u-hum,  -u-  by  assimilation. 

Possession  can  be  represented  by  li-,  'and-,  or  ma'-.  The 
first  of  these  means  "  have  "  in  the  sense  of  being  the  owTier, 
'and-  is  used  for  smaller  things  actually  in  one's  possession 
and  ma'-  for  movable  things  which  are  with  one  at  the 
moment.  Thus  "  the  house  belongs  to  me  "  =  el-bet  li 
(I  am  the  owner  of  the  house)  ;  "  have  you  any  books  ?  " 
addressed  to  a  shop-keeper  =  'andikum  kutub  ?  Again  owner- 
ship but  of  smaller  movable  articles  :  "  have  you  your  books 
with  you  V  —  kutubkum  ma'ek  ? 

In  such  a  sentence  as  "  come  for  a  walk  with  me  "  the 


witn     IS 

01  course  ma  -  as  n 

leanmg     m  my  company    . 

WORE) 

LIST 

'abd  ('ebd) 

=  slave 

gawab 

=  letter 

AUah,  -llah 

=  God 

badir 

—  present,  ready 

'azba* 

=  farm 

^akim 

=  governor 

ba'id 

=  remote 

bakim 

=  physician 

baqare* 

=  cow 

^amd 

=  praise 

bardan 

=  cold  (of  persons) 

baqq 

=  right,        justice, 

barid 

=  cold   {of  things  ; 

claim 

also  of  persons 

burriye* 

=  liberty 

in  tbe  sense  of 

izn  (idhn) 

=  permission 

irresponsive, 

kelam 

=  speech 

indifferent) 

khatir 

=  danger 

dahab 

=  gold 

le'ab 

=  sport,  play 

felus,  fuliis 

—  money 

mahir 

—  skilful 

fikr 

=  thought,  opinion 

matar 

=  rain 

gamuse* 

—  buffalo 

sa'a* 

=  hour,  watch 

THE   FOURTH   LESSON  51 

EXERCISE 

(1)  rain  en  entum  ? —  =  Where  are  you  from  ? — Your 
'abadkum  min  el-Higaz  servants    are    from    the 

EQjaz. 

(2)  fish  'andukum  moja  ? —  =  Have  you  any  water  ? — Yes, 
aiwa,  ahe  moya  ketir  here  is  plenty  of  water. 

(3)  'azbetek  fen? — el-'azba  =  Where  is  your  farm?— My 
beta'eti    hiya    qaribe    min         farm  is  near  here. 

hena 

(4)  'andek  baqare  ? — aiwa,  =  Have  you  a  cow  ? — Yes,  here 
ahe  el-baqare  beta'eti  is  my  cow. 

(5)  'andek  felus  ?  —  ma'ek  =  Have  you  any  money  ? — 
f elus  ?  Have  you  any  money  with 

you? 

(6)  ia,  ma  fish  ma'i  felus       =  No,  I  have  no  money  with 

me. 

(7)  el-moya  barid  ? — la,  -el  =  Is  the  water  cold  ? — No,  the 
moya  mush  barid  water  is  not  cold. 

(8)  'andi  sa'a  min  dahab  =  I  have  a  gold  watch. 

(9)  fi  fikri  sa'at^k  mush  min  =  I  think  your  watch  is  not 
dahab  gold. 

(10)  el-hakim  hadir  ? — la,  ya  =  Is  the  doctor  present  ? — No, 
sidi,  ma  fish  hakim  fi  beledna         Sir,  there  is  no  doctor  in 

GUI  village. 

(11)  min  el-khawage  *ala  =  Who  is  the  gentleman  on 
yeminek  ? — el-khawage huwa  your  right? — The  gentle- 
el-hakim  man  is  the  governor. 

(12)  ker  akhiilnim  ? — akhuna  =  How  is  your  brother? — Our 
huwa  marid  'ala  khatir  brother  is  dangerously  ill. 

(13)  fih  ma'ek  sikkin  ? — aiwa,  =  Have  you  a  knife  with  you  ? 
ma'i  sikkin  — Yes,  I  have  a  knife. 


52  THE    FOURTH   LESSON 

(14)  li  haqq  *alek  —  I  have  a  claim  against  you. 

(15)  'andek  waqt  ? — ma  =  Have  you  any  time  ? — I  have 
'andish  waqt  li-1-le'ab  no  time  for  play. 

(16)  'andek  akhbar  ?  =  Have  you  any  news  ? 

(17)  mush  li  khof  =  I  have  no  fear. 

(18)  Mahmud  fen  ?— huwa  fi  =  Where  is  Mahmud? — He  is 
1-gami'  el-azhar  ma'  abuh         in  the  al-Azhar  mosque 

with  his  father. 

(19)  li  kelam  ma'kum  =  I  want  to  have  a  word  with 

you. 

(20)  'ala   1-bab   hammal   we-  =  There  is  a  porter  at  the  door 
ma'uh  sanduq  and  he  has  a  box  with  him. 

(21)  'and   min   cl-haqq  ? — el-  =  Who  is  in  the  right? — I  am 
haqq  'andi,  el-haqq  'alek  in    the    right,    you    are 

incorrect. 

(22)  bi-abuya  ente  =  You  are  like  a  father  to  me. 

(23)  'an  iznek  (idbnek)  =  With  your  leave. 

(On  taking  a  seat,  on  taking  leave,  on  going  away  from  the  company 
for  any  purpose,  and  on  entering  a  latrine  in  which  case  the  expression 
is  a  propitiatory  remark  addressed  to  the  evil  spirits  which  haunt  such 
places,  the  more  necessary  because  guardian  angels  do  not  accompany  men 
there  but  wait  for  them  outside.) 

(24)  ya  li-r-rigal  =  Help,  0  men  (=0    to   the 

men). 

(25)  lesh  ente  heua  ?  =  Why  ( =  for  what)  are  you 

here  P  J 

(26)  fi  Masr  ma  fish  hurriya  =  There  is  no  Uberty  in  Egypt.    ' 

(27)  fish'esh? — la, ya sidi, ma  ==  Is    there   any   bread?— No, 
fish  'esh  sir,  there  is  no  bread. 

(28)  ahe  gawab  li-hacjretek      =  Here  is   a  letter  for  your 

honour. 


THE   FOUETH   LESSON 


53 


(29)  bedelek  Mye  ba'ide  min  =  Is  your  town  far  from  here  ? 
hena  ? 


(30)  ya    salam, 
marid 


fi   fikri   ana  ==  Good  heavens,  I  think  I  am 
ilL 


(31)  et-tariq  ila  medineti  huwa  =  It  is  a  long  way  to  my  city, 
tawil  qawi 


(32)  enta  malek 


(33)  ma'alesh 

(34)  honak  fih  maqam 


(What  is  the  matter?  (Syria). 
=  iMind    your  own  business 

I    (Egypt). 

=  No    matter. 

—  There  is  a  holy  place  there 
(Damascus). 


(35)  salam  'alekum- 
'alekum  salam 


-we-         =  Peace  be  on  you. — And  on 
you  be  peace. 

(Greeting  of  one  Muslim  to  another.  It  should  not  be  used  by  Muslims 
to  unbelievers  or  by  non-Muslims  at  all.  If  addre-ssed  by  a  non-Muslim  to 
a  Muslim  it  should  not  be  retiimed.  Non-Muslims  use  some  such  form 
as  : — ) 

(36)  neharkum  sa'id —  =  May  your  day  be  prosperous 

neharkum  sa'id  we-mubarak  and  blessed. 

(It  is  very  seemly,  though  not  necesspry,  to  return  a  compliment  with 
interest.) 


(37)  kef  halkum  ? 
ezayyek?  (Egypt, 

familiar) 
esh  halek  %  (Syria) 

(38)  el-hamdu  li-Uah 

(The  -u  properly  (but  not  always)  given  at  the  end  of  hamd-  is  the 
classical  nominative  termination.  Only  the  tone  of  voice  shows  whether 
this  is  thanks  for  good  health  or  resignation  in  ill-health.  To  say  "  I  am 
well "  is  unlucky,  as  it  has  a  tone  of  boasting  and  invites  the  attention  of 
malevolent  spirits,  whilst  to  say  "  I  am  ill  "  sayonrs  of  petulance.) 


How  are  you  ? 


=  Praise  be  to  God. 


54  THE    FOURTH    LESSON 

(39)  khatirek. — ma'a  (ma')       =  (Guest  about  to  depaxt  says) 
8-selame  or  awaqatek  sa'ide  •*  Your  permission. — (Go) 

with  peace  or  May  your 
times  be  prosperous". 

(40)  ma  'anduhumsh  'esh        =  They  have  no  bread. 

(41)  'andekshe  heteb  li-l-bi'  ?  =  Have  you  any  fuel  for  sale? 

(42)  ya  khangi,  kam  el-hisab  ?  =  Landlord,  how  much  is  the 

bill? 

(-gi  is  a  Turkish  ending,  khan-gi  means  "  man  of  the  khan  (inn).") 

(43)  ya   khangi,   'esh   'andek  =  Landlord,  have  you  anything 
li-l-'asha  (li-l-ghada)  ?  for  supper  (dinner)  ? 


Chapter  YJl 

THE  FIFTH  LESSON— THE  DEMONSTRATH^ES  AND 
RELATmE 

(I)  The  Demonstrative 

Farm  (i)  "  this  ",  "  these  ". 

In  the  form  and  use  of  the  demonstrative  there  is  a  marked 
difference  between  the  various  dialects,  and  when  such  is  the 
case  it  is  generally  a  saving  of  time  to  begin  with  the  classical 
form  and  trace  the  way  in  which  the  dialects  diverge  from  it. 
The  classical  "  this  "  may  appear  as  dha,  or  reinforced 
by  the  prefix  ha-,  which  probably  was  at  first  an  emphatic 
as  ha-dha.    From  these  we  get : — 

Singular.  Plural. 

Masculine.      Feminine. 
(a)         dha  (ti)  ('ula) 

(6)  hadha  hadhi  ha'ula 

These  may  be  used  (1)  as  demonstrative  pronouns,  as 
hadha  kitab  =  "  this  is  a  book  ",  hadhi  bint  =  "  this  is 
a  girl ",  such  a  pronoun  being  naturally  defined ;  or  (2)  as 
demonstrative  adjectives  attached  to  nouns  which  must  then 
be  defined,  as  hadha  1-kitab  "  this  book  "',  hadhi  1-bint  "  this 
girl ",  etc.,  used  thus  adjectivally  it  is  necessarily  followed 
by  the  defining  article. 

The  Dialect  of  'Iraq  foUows  this  very  closely,  save  that 
it  discards  the  rather  peculiar  plural  and  forms  a  new  one 
from  the  singular  stem,  thus : — 

hadha  hadhi  hadhol 


56  THE   FIFTH   LESSON 

These  are  used  (1)  as  demonstrative  pronouns,  hadha  bet  = 
"  this  is  a  house  ",  hadhi  bint  —  "  this  is  a  girl ",  etc.,  but 
(2)  used  as  adjectives  they  tend  to  contract  with  the  definite 
article  which  invariably  follows  and  so  make  : — 

hadhel  hadhil  hadhol 

The  plural  hadhol  is  as  before,  but  the  two  singular  forms 
include  the  article,  thus  hadhel-bet  —  "  this  house  ",  hadhil- 
bint  =  "  this  girl "  and  the  final  -1  assimilates  like  that  in 
the  article,  thus  hadher-rigal  "  this  man  ",  etc.  Both  these 
singular  forms  can  be  further  contracted  into  hel  as  hel-kitab= 
"  this  book  ",  her-rigal  =  "  this  man  ",  etc.,  and  this  hel 
can  even  be  used  for  the  plural  provided  it  refers  to  things  not 
persons.     Thus  : — 

hadhel  (hel)  kitab  tayyib  =  This  book  is  good 
hadhil  (hel)  bint  marida    =  This  girl  is  ill 
hadha  kitab  tayyib  =  This  is  a  good  hook 

hadhi  dar  kebira  =  This  is  a  large  home 

Very  much  the  same  holds  good  with  Maghrabi  (Moroccan) 
Arabic  where  we  find  sing.  masc.  hadha,  fem.  hadhi,  plur. 
hadhum  ;   but  no  contraction  with  the  article  takes  place. 

In  the  dialect  of  Syria  naturally  dh  becomes  d  but  other- 
wise the  same  forms  are  maintained,  thus  : — 

hada  hadi  hadol 

These  are  used  (a)  as  pronouns,  as  hada  kitab  =  "  this  is 
a  book  ",  hadi  bint  —  "  this  is  a  girl  ",  hadol  'arab  =  "  these 
are  Arabs  "  ;  (b)  as  adjectives  where  they  may  either  stand 
before  the  article  or  contract  with  it  to  hal,  thus  hada  1-kitab 
or  hal-kitab  "  this  book  ",  hadi  1-bint  =  "  this  girl ",  or 
hal-bint,  hadol  el-'arab  or  hal-'arab  =  "  these  Arabs  ",  the 
hal  being  capable  of  free  use  with  either  gender  or  number, 
though  it  is  more  commonly  found  with  the  singular.     The 


THE    FIFTH    LESSON  57 

-1  ol  hal  assimilates  in  the  usual  way,  thus  har-ragul  =  "  this 
man",  has-sa'a  =  "  this  hour  ",  etc. 

In  Syrian  Arabic  we  also  hear  (rarely)  the  form  sing.  masc. 
hai-da,/ew.  hai-di. 

In  Egyptian  Arabic  the  ha-  prefix  is  missing  altogether 
and  so  we  get — 

sing.  masc.  da       fern,  di        plur.  dol 

These  forms  are  used  (a)  as  pronouns,  thus  da  bet  =  "  this 
is  a  house  ",  di  shughli  sa'abe  =  "  this  is  a  hard  task  ", 
ey  dol  =  "  what  are  these  ?  "  ;  (h)  as  adjectives  they  follow 
the  noun  which  must  have  the  article  before  it,  as  el-kitab  da  = 
"  this  book  ",  el-bint  di  =  "  this  girl ",  el-'arab  dol  =-  "  these 
Arabs  ".  If  the  noun  has  a  descriptive  adjective  attached 
the  demonstrative  may  follow  the  noun  itself  or  the  descriptive 
and  so  for  "  this  great  man  "  we  can  say  er-ragil  da  el-kebir 
or  er-ragil  el-kebir  da,  and  for  "  this  little  girl  "  either  el-bint 
di  es-saghire  or  el-bint  es-saghire  di. 

Form  (ii)  "  this  {is)  ",  etc. 

This  is  a  special  (and  occasional)  use  of  the  ha-  which  we 
have  already  seen  prefixed  to  the  demonstrative  dha  in 
hadha  ;  it  occurs  : — 

(1)  In  Palestinian  Arabic  as  hei  (heiy  )  "  here  is  ",  which 
can  take  the  personal  suffixes.  With  the  suffix  of  the  Ist 
sing,  a  "  supporting  n  "  is  used,  as  heini  =  "  here  am  I  ", 
with  the  other  persons  heiy-  is  used,  as  heiyek  =  "  here 
you  are  ",  heiyo  =  "  here  is  he  ",  etc. 

(2)  In  Egyptian  Arabic  it  appears  as  a-,  which  can  only  be 
used  with  a  suffix  of  the  3rd  sing,  as  aho,  ahe  :  properly 
the  first  of  these  is  masculine,  the  second  feminine,  but  this 
distinction  is  no  longer  carefuUy  observed  :  fen  kitabi  ? — 
aho  kitabek  =  "  where  is  my  book  ? — Here  is  your  book  ". 


58  THE   FIFTH   LESSON 

Form  (iii)  "  that  ",  "  those  ". 

"  Tliat  "  is  formed  from  "  this  "  by  adding  the  "  k  of  the 
remote  ",  thus  : — 

classical  sing.  masc.  dhak      Jem.  tilk       'plur.  'ula'ik 

In  the  dialect  of  'Iraq  we  get  (by  adding  -k  to  the  "  nearer  ",) 
this  : — 

hadhak  hadhik  hadholak 

hadhich 

The  reduction  of  -k  to  -eh  (like  the  ch-  in  "  cheese  ")  we 
have  already  observed  in  the  suffixed  pronoun  (cf.  p.  40 
above).  These  forms  can  be  used  as  pronouns  or  adjectives, 
thus  hadhak  bet  =  "  that  is  a  house  ",  hadhak  el-bet  = 
"  that  house  ",  etc.  The  plural  hadholak  must  be  used  with 
persons,  but  for  things  in  the  plural  it  is  permitted  to  use  the 
feminine  hadhik,  hadhich. 

Syrian  dialect  uses  hak  for  all  genders  and  numbers  but 
permits  an  alternative  haidik  for  the  singular  and  plural 
masc.  hadolak,  fern,  hadolik,  but  the  use  of  these  forms  is 
commoner  in  Palestine  and  is  (perhaps)  a  mark  of  Palestinian 
dialect. 

Egyptian  Arabic  uses  dik,  dak,  for  all,  but  permits  also  : — 

sing.  masc.  dukha  fern,  dikha    'plur.  dukham,  dukhamma 

In  Syria  and  in  'Iraq  this  demonstrative,  like  "  this,  these  " 
has  to  be  placed  before  the  noun  when  used  adjectivally  and 
the  noun  must  have  the  article,  thus  hak  el-kitab  mufid  = 
"  that  book  is  useful ",  etc.,  but  in  Egyptian  it  is  placed 
after  the  noun  defined  by  the  article,  as  er-ragil  dak  huwa 
tagir  =  "  that  man  is  a  merchant  ",  etc.  It  is  a  marked 
peculiarity  of  Egyptian  that  even  the  ha-  is  placed  at  the  I 
end,  and  so  we  get  duk-ha,  etc. 

We  have  given  the  forms  for  both  "  this  "  and  "  that ", 
but  in  fact  Arabic  often  uses  "  this  "  where  we  would  have 


THE    FIFTH   LESSON 


59 


"  that ",  thus  da  o  da  =  "  this  or  that  "  and  very  often  the 
hada,  da,  of  Arabic  can  best  be  translated  in  English  by  "  that" 
rather  than  "  this  ". 

Summary  of  the  Demo>"stkati\'e  Forms. 


Classical. 

'Iraq. 

Syria. 

Egypt. 

(i)  "this" 

dha 

ti 

'ula 



da 
di 
dol 

hadha 
hadhi 
ha'ula 

hadha 
hadhi 
hadhol 

hada 
hadi 
hadol 

(ii)  "this" 

(ha-) 



hei  (heiy-) 

a- 

(iii)  "that" 

dhak 

tilV 

'ula'ik 

hadha k 
hadhik  (-ch) 
hadholak 

hak  haidik 
rhadolak 
\hadolik 

( dak  dukha 
\dik  dikha 
dukham 

EXAMPLES 
(Chiefly  Egyptian) 


1)  el-bab  da  maftuh  ? 

2)  di  lokanda  tayyib  ? 

3)  el-lokanda  di  mush  taliq 
U-hadretek 

4)  el-6da  di  nedife  ? 

5)  aiwa,    el-oda    di    nedife 


=  Is  that  door  open  ? 

=  Is  this  a  good  hotel  ? 

—  That  hotel  is  not  suitable  for 

for  your  honour 
=  Is  this  room  clean  ? 
=  Yes,  this  room  is  very  clean 


ketir 

6)  fi    fikri    hadi   1-lokanda    =  /  think  this  hotel  is  not  dean 
mush  nedifa 

7)  na'am,     ya     sidi,     hal-    =  Yes,  sir,  this  hotel  is  clean 
lokanda  nedifa 

8)  da  hisan  da'if 

9)  el-hisan  da  da'if 


=  That  is  a  weak  horse 
=  That  horse  is  weak 


60 


THE    FIFTH    LESSON 


(10)  ed-darsi  da  sa'ab  qawi 

(11)  di  shughli  sa'abe 

(12)  ]ek  dar  fi  1-beled  di  ? 

(13)  min  el-khawage  da  ? 

(14)  el-khawage  da  huwa  el- 
qonsul  faransawi 

(15)  eydi? 

(16)  ey  da  fi  miqtafek  ? 

(17)  hada  nawari  asli  (Syr.) 

(18)  da  kelam  mufid 

(19)  hadol    el-'arab    (el-'arab 
dol)  haramiye 

(20)  en-nas  dol  hum  bedawiye 
min  es-Sina 

(21)  er-ragil    dak    huwa    et- 
tagir  el-'agcmi 

(22)  es-sitt  di  hiya  inkclizi 

(23)  el-inkelizi  da  huwa  min 
el-Hind 

(24)  hada  asad 

(25)  hal-asad 

(26)  hada  1-bortuqan  taiyib 

(27)  hal-bortuqan      mush 
tayyib 

(28)  hada  bortuqan  tayyib 

(29)  da  huwa  el-mudir 

(30)  di  hiya  s-sitt  Zeinab 

(31)  hadha  kitab  mufid 

(32)  hel-kitab  mufid 


=  This  lesson  is  very  difficult 

-  This  is  a  hard  task 

-  Have   you   a   house   in   this 

town  ? 

-  Who  is  thai  gentleman  ? 

-  That  gentleman  is  the  French 

consul 
--  What  is  this  ? 

-  What  is  that  in  your  basket  ? 

--  This  man  is  a  thorough  gipsy 

-  That  is  a  useful  remark 
■  Those  Arabs  are  thieves 

■■  These  men  are  bedwin  from 

Sinai 
That    man    is    the    Persian 

merchant 
That  lady  is  English  (E.) 
That    Englishman    is   from 

India  (E.) 
This  is  a  lion  (S.) 
This  lion  (S.) 
This  orange  is  good  (S.) 
This  orange  is  no  good  (S.) 

This  is  a  good  orange  (S.) 
That  is  the  mudir  (E.) 
This  is  the  lady  Zeinab  (E.) 
This  is  a  useful  book  (I.) 
This  book  is  useful  (I.) 


THE    FIFTH    LESSON  61 

(IE)  The  Relative 

In  'Iraq,  Syria,  Palestine,  and  Egypt  colloquial  Arabic  uses 
iJli,  elli,  as  the  relative,  occasionally  ma.  The  relative  refers 
normally  to  a  defined  antecedent,  with  an  antecedent  unde- 
fined the  relative  may  be  altogether  omitted  or,  if  it  is 
a  thing,  ma  can  be  used. 

It  is  sometimes  said  that  Arabic  has  no  relative :  that  is 
not  true,  but  it  must  be  admitted  that  the  Arabic  relative 
is  very  restricted  in  its  use.  One  noteworthy  peculiarity  is 
that  it  is  nominative  only  and  so  can  only  express  the  possessive 
or  objective  by  means  of  a  suffixed  pronoun  following  :  thus 
for  "  the  man  whose  horse  (came,  etc.) ..."  we  must  say 
"  the  man  who  his  horse  (came)  .  .  .  "  =  er-ragil  iUi  hisanuh 
.  .  .  :  for  "  I  saw  the  man  whom  you  saw  "  it  has  to  be 
"  I  saw  the  man  who  you  saw  him  ",  etc. 

el-kitab  illi  'andekum  =  The  book  ichich  you  have 

(This  is  quite  straightforward  because  "  have  "  is  expressed 
"  is  with  you  ".) 

el-kitab  illi  ketebtiih  =  The  hook  which  I  lorote 

(=  which  I  wrote  it) 

In  many  cases,  however,  Arabic  does  not  express  the  relative 
where  it  would  be  needed  in  English,  thus  : — 

ragil  ga  =  The  nuiJi  who  came 

ragil  huwa  sahibi  =  The  man  who  is  my  friend 

marret  bi-ragil  abuh  nayim  =  /  passed  by  tlie  man,  his 

father  was  asleep 
(=  whose  father  .  .  .) 

Very  often  the  article  with  a  participle  serves  for  a  relative 
clause,  as  el-mu'menin  =  "  the  believers  "  =  "  they  who 
believe  ",  etc. 


62 


THE    FIFTH   LESSON 


WORD 

LIST 

ayye? 

=  of  what  kind  ? 

sir^g                     =  lamp 

dara 

=  lesson 

taliq                      =  suitable 

gaz 

=  petrol 

tarabeza               =  table  (Greek) 

kh6f 

=  fear 

5'6m  (pi.  aiyam)  =  day  (twenty-four 

kitab      {pliir. 

=  book 

hours) 

kutub) 

el-yom                  —  to-day  ('Iraq) 

lei,  lele*  (masc. 

=  night 

hal-y6m                =  to-day  (Syr.) 

or  fem.) 

zet                         =  oil 

ma'rife 

=  knowledge, 

mush  kida  ?         =  is  it  not  so  ? 

sense 

(=  ka-da) 

meshghul 

=  busy 

(kida  also  as 

mufid 

=  useful 

kiza,  cf.  p.  11) 

^ehar 

=  day  (not  night), 

da  1-waqt  da        =  it  is  already  .  .  . 

en-nehar  da  = 

(this  is  this 

to-day  (Eg.). 

time  (that)  .  .  .) 

otom6bil 

=  automobile  (Fr.) 

we-fi  aiyam          =  and      in      those 

qalam 

=  pen 

dol  .  .  .                 days  .  .  . 

qon^ul 

—  consul 

ragil  (plur.  rigal, 

==  man,  men 

but  cf.  p,   C£ 

\ 

below) 

EXERC 

)ISE    A 

(The  use  of  the  demonstrative  is  one  of  the  few  cases  in  which  there  is 
a  material  difference  between  the  colloquial  of  Egypt,  Syria,  and  'Iraq,  and 
therefore  this  first  exercise  illustrates  the  way  in  which  the  demonstrative 
is  employed  in  these  various  dialects,  the  English  of  (I)  being  rendered 
according  to  each  in  the  three  sections  following.) 

(I)  (1)  This  is  a  large  house.  This  house  is  large.  This 
large  house.  (2)  This  is  a  small  house.  This  house  is  small. 
This  small  house.  (3)  What  is  this? — this  is  a  pen.  And 
what  is  this  ? — this  is  my  book.  (4)  Is  this  book  large  ? — no, 
this  book  is  small.  (5)  Where  are  these  books  ? — these  books 
are  on  the  table. 


(II)   Egyptian. — (1) 
el-bet  el-kebir  da.    (2) 
ed  dar  di  es-saghire. 
(w-ey  da)  ? — da  kitabi. 


da    bet    kebir — el-bet    da    kebir — 

di  dar  saghire — ed-dar  di  saghire — 

(3)    ey  da  ? — da  qalam — ^we-ey  da 

(4)   el-kitab  da  kebir  ? — la,  el-kitab 


THE   FIFTH   LESSON  63 

da  saghir.    (5)  fen  el-kutub  dol  ? — el-kutub  dol  'ala  t-tarabeza 
('at-tarabeza). 

(Ill)  Syrian.— (!)  hada  bet  kebir— hada  1-bet  (hal-bet) 
kebir — ^hal-bet  el-kebir.  (2)  badi  dar  saghire — ^had-dar 
sagbire — ^bad-dar  es-sagbire.  (3)  ey  bada  ? — ^bada  qalam — 
w-ey  bada  ? — ^bada  kitabi.  (4)  bal-kitab  kebir  ? — la,  bal- 
kitab  sagbir.    (5)  en  bal-kutub  ? — bal-kutub  'ala  t-tarabeza. 

[TV)  Iraqi. — (1)  badba  bet  kebir — ^badbel-bet  kebir — 
badbel-bet  el-kebir.  (2)  badbi  dar  sagbire — badbed-dar 
sagbire — ^badbed-dar  es-sagbire.  (3)  ey  badba  1 — ^badba 
qalam — ^w-ey  badba  ? — badba  kitabi.  (4)  bel-kitab  kebir  ? — 
la,  bel-kitab  sagbir.  (5)  wen  badbol-kutub  ? — ^badbol  kutub 
'ala  t-tarabeza. 

EXERCISE    B 

(1)  ayye  el-kitab  da   (badba  =  What  kind  o!  book  is  this  ? 
1-kitab,  bal-kitab)  ? 

(2)  el-kitab  da  mufid  =  This  is  a  useful  book. 

(3)  ed-darsi  da  sa'ab  ? — aiwa,  =Is  this  lesson  hard? — Yes, 
ed-darsi  da  sa'ab  ketir  this  lesson  is  very  hard. 

(4)  esb-sbugbli    da    sa'ab  ? —  =  Is  this  task  diflficult  ? — Yes, 
aiwa  da  sbugbli  sa'ab  this  task  is  difficult. 

(5)  da  nebar  letif  ? — en-nebar  =  Is  it  a  fine  day  ? — To-day  is 
da  letif  fine. 

(6)  er-ragil  da   huwa    'arabi  =  This  man  is  an  Arab  from  the 
min  el-Higaz  Hijaz. 

(7)  er-rigal    dol    bum    'arab  =  These  men  are  Arabs  from 
min  es-sina  Sinai. 

(8)  el-kelam  da  mufid  qawi    =  That  statement  is  very  useful. 

(9)  mafisb  zet  fi  s-sirag  da    =  There  is  no  oil  in  this  lamp. 


64  THE    FIFTH   LESSON 

(10)  el-hakim  da  huwa  =  Is  this  doctor  very  busy? — 
meshghul  qawi  ? — la,  huwa  No,  he  is  very  indolent. 
keslan  ketir 

(11)  en-nehar   fi    s-sef   huwa  =  The  day  is  long  in  summer. 
tawil 

(12)  el-lele  di  liiya  tawile       =  This  night  is  very  long. 
tawile 

(13)  el-hakim  el-kebir  dak  =  That  chie!  governor  is  to-day 
huwa    el-yom    mari(J    'ala  seriously  ill. 

khatir 

(14)  fi  r-ragil  da  mafish  khof  =  In  this  man  is  no  fear. 

(15)  fi  l-otomobil  beta'i  mafish  =  There  is  no  petrol  in  my 
gaz  automobile. 

(16)  fi  r-ragil  da  ma'rife  ketir  =  There  is  much  good  sense  in 

this  man. 

(17)  ey  di  ? — di  gaz.  w-ey  =  What  is  this  ?— It  is  petrol. 
di  ? — di  moya.  And  this  ? — It  is  water. 

(18)  el-kitab  da  kebir,  we-1-  =  This  book  is  big,  and  that 
kitab  da  saghir,  mush  kida  ?  book  is  small,  is  it  not  so  ? 

(19)  fen  el-kutub  dol  ? — el- =  Where  are  these  books? — 
kutub  dol  hum 'ala  t-tarabeza       These  books  are  on  the 

table. 

(20)  el-walad  es-saghir  en-  =  Where  is  the  little  boy 
nehar  da  i en  ?— el-walad  to-day?  —  To-day  the 
es-saghir  huwa  ma'  abuh  little  boy  is  at  home  with 
fi  1-bet  beta'uh  his  father. 

(21)  has-sa'a  hiya  tayyib  mush  =This  watch  is  not  very  good. 
ketir 

(22)  el-bet  da  lek  ?--aiwa,  el-  =  Does  this  house  belong  to 
bet  da  li  you  ?— Yes,  this  house  is 

mine. 


THE    FIFTH   LESSON  65 

(23)  er-ragil  da  huwa  inkelizi  =  This  man  is  English. 

(24)  el-inkelizi   da   huwa   el-  =  This    Elnglishman   is    the 
qonsul  consul. 

(25)  dik   huwa   el-qonsul   el-  =  That  is  the  English  consul, 
inkelizi 

(26)  el-yehudi  dik  huwa  el-  =  That  Jew  is  the  Grerman 
qonsul  el-nimsawi  Consul. 

(27)  hadha  1-bedawi  hiiwa  min  =  That  Bedawi  is  from  the 
el-Higaz  Higaz. 

(28)  di  lokanda  tayvibe  ? — la,  =  Is  this  a  good  hotel  ?— No, 
el-lokanda  di  mush  taliq  li-  that  hotel  is  not  fit  for  your 
hadretek  honour. 

(29)  lokanda  nedife  fen  ? —  =  Where  is  there  a  clean  hotel  ? 
'ala  fikri  el-lokanda  di  hiye  — In  my  opinion  this  is  a 
nedife                                            clean  hotel. 

(30)  aiwa,  ya  khawage,  el-  =  Yes,  sir,  this  is  a  very  clean 
lokanda  di  nedife  giddan  hotel. 

(31)  esh  el-kalam  da  ?  =  What  is  the  meaning  of  this  ? 

( =what  is  this  saying  ?) 

(32)  da  1-waqt  el-ezan  (edan,  =  This  is  the  time  for  the  call  to 
edhan)  prayer  (it  is  already  .  .  .  ) 

(33)  da  lek  ?  =  Is  this  yours  ? 

(34)  esh  min  shagare  di  ?        =  What  kind  of  tree  is  this  ? 

(35)  el-kitab  da  kebir  *an  =  This  book  is  bigger  than  that 
dukha  one    (  =  is    large    above 

that  one). 

(36)  'andakum  kutub  inkelizi  ?  =  Have  you  any  English  books? 

(37)  aiwa,  ya  khawage,  'andi  =  Yes,  sir,  I  have. 

(38)  ayye  el-kutub  illi  =  What  sort  of  books  have 
'andalmm  1  you  ?    (  =  what  sort  the 

books  which  you  have  ?) 


Chapter   VIII 
THE    SIXTH    LESSON— THE    PLURALS    OF   NOUNS 

Formation  of  the  Plural 

In  Arabic  there  are  two  kinds  of  plurals  which  are  commonly 
termed  the  "  strong  "  and  the  "  weak  "  or  "  broken  "  plurals. 
The  former  are  formed  by  adding  plural  terminations  to  the 
stem  just  as  English  adds  plural  -s,  -es,  to  the  stem  in  such 
words  as  "  book,  books  ",  "  house,  houses  ",  etc. — the  weak 
or  broken  plurals  are  those  formed  by  internal  change  similar 
to  that  employed  in  English  in  forming  such  plurals  as  "  mouse. 


hu  until/  euijjiuy  eu  ill  Ji/iigiisu . 

mice  ",  "  man,  men  ",  etc. 


Strong  Plurals  Masculine 

Strong  plurals  of  masculine  inouns  are  formed  by  adding  -in 
to  the  stem,  thus  mu'allim  "  teacher  ",  mu'allimin  "  teachers  " 
— ^Muslim,  Muslimin,  etc.  Strong  plurals  of  this  kind  are  formed 
with  nouns  (adjectives,  etc.),  which  were  originally  participles 
of  verbs,  as  shatir  "  crafty  ",  pi.  shatirin — mablul  "  wet  ", 
mablulin,  etc.  ;  with  words  of  the  form  qattal  denoting 
trades  such  as  haddad  "  smith  ",  haddadin,  etc.  A  selection 
of  some  of  the  commonest  words  of  this  kind  will  be  found  in 
the  word  list  below. 

Strong  Plurals  Feminine 

The  strong  plural  of  the  feminine  is  formed  by  changing 
the  -a,  -e,  of  the  singular  which,  as  we  have  already  noted 
(p.  24),  really  represents  -at,  -et,  into  at-  and  in  this  plural 
the  final  -t  does  not  fall  away.    It  must  be  noted,  however, 


THE    SIXTH   LESSON  67 

that  not  all  feminines  ending  -a,  -e,  in  the  singular  make  this 
strong  plural,  there  are  many  which  make  broken  plurals 
instead  :  on  the  other  hand,  there  are  feminine  nouns  not 
ending  in  -a,  -e,  in  the  singular  which  nevertheless  make  their 
plural  by  adding  -at.     Thus  : — 

hara         =  "  street "  pi.  harat 

muslima  =  "  Muslim  woman  "  musUmat 

gawab      =  "  letter  "  gawabat 

Especially  it  must  be  noted  here  that  the  singular  -a,  -e  does 
not  always  denote  a  feminine  singular,  but  it  is  sometimes  used 
to  form  the  noun  of  the  individual  from  the  noun  of  species, 
as  tin  =  "  fig,  figs  ",  tina  =  "  a  single  fig  ",  in  such  cases 
of  course  the  plural  is  simply  the  noun  without  the  -a,  -e, 
used  to  form  the  name  of  the  individual. 

The  Dual 

A  special  termination  in  -en  is  used  to  denote  the  dual, 
i.e.  two  things.  This  is  chiefly  used  for  words  which  naturally 
denote  things  which  are  in  pairs,  thus  id  "  hand  ",  iden  "  two 
hands  ",  etc.,  but  it  is  used  (though  not  consistently)  for 
other  instances  of  twos,  as  sa'a  "  hour ",  sa'aten  "  two 
o'clock  ",  etc.  There  is  no  "  weak  "  alternative  for  the  dual 
and  the  same  termination  is  used  for  masculine  and  feminine 
nouns. 

Broken  Plurals 

Broken  plurals  are  formed  by  internal  change,  such 
as  kitab  =  "  book  ",  kutub  =  "  books  ",  kelb  =  "dog", 
kilab  =  "  dogs  ",  etc.,  some  of  these  plurals  adding  termina- 
tions such  as  -an,  or  prefixes  such  as  a-  but  preserving  the 
three  (or  four)  basal  consonants  of  the  stem.  When  the  singular 
has  more  than  four  letters  (i.e.  consonants  and  long  vowek) 
the  plural  always  reduces  the  number  to  four. 


68  THE    SIXTH   LESSON 

The  broken  plurals  are  fairly  numerous  and  usually  prove 
a  difficulty  to  the  learned,  though  by  no  means  so  serious  a 
one  as  at  first  appears.  The  various  "  measures  "  must  be 
found  from  the  dictionary  or  from  word-lists.  There  is  indeed 
a  system,  but  little  if  any  time  will  be  saved  by  trying  to 
learn  it.  For  example,  plurals  of  the  measure  qital  are  formed 
from  singulars,  of  measures  qatl,  qitl,  qutl,  qatal,  qatul,  qatle*, 
qatale*,  qutle*,  qatil,  qatil ;  and  singulars  of  the  measure 
qatl  form  plurals  of  the  measures  qitla*,  qitala*,  qutul, 
qutula*,  qital,  qatil ;  so  the  different  forms  of  the  singular 
do  not  regiilarly  correspond  with  fixed  plural  forms.  But  many 
of  the  forms  given  in  the  lists  of  the  grammarians  are  very 
rare  in  colloquial  speech  so  that  it  is  best,  perhaps,  to  content 
oneself  with  learning  the  plural  forms  as  they  occur.  In  the 
word-lists  following  the  plurals  are  given  in  brackets  after  the 
singular.  Some  nouns,  of  course,  do  not  admit  any  plural, 
e.g.  shems  "  sun  ",  and  in  some  cases  there  are  alternative 
forms  of  broken  plural  and  (occasionally)  one  dialect  prefers 
one  of  these  whilst  other  dialects  prefer  another. 

The  broken  plurals  are  treated  as  feminine  singulars,  no 
doubt  because  they  were  originally  collectives.    Thus  : — 

el-gibal  hiye  'ahyye  =  The  mountains  are  lofty. 

Those,   however,   which  denote  males  may  be  treated  as 
masculine  plural  or  (less  commonly)  as  feminine  singular,  as : — 

er-rigal  sahhin  =  The  men  are  honest. 

This  lesson  does  not  lead  to  any  very  important  principles 
as  to  the  use  of  word  forms,  but  is  chiefly  concerned  with 
matters  of  vocabulary.  Most  of  our  attention  therefore  will 
be  given  to  the  lists  following.  First  we  shall  give  lists  of 
common  words  forming  strong  plurals,  then  certain  exceptional 
forms,  and  finally  some  lists  of  the  more  usual  broken  plurals, 
these  latter  being  continued  for  the  next  two  lessons.    After 


THE    SIXTH    LESSON 


69 


that  it  will  be  necessary  to  note  the  broken  plurals  as  they 
occur  and  finally  to  prepare  one's  own  lists  and  leam  them  as 
vocabularies. 

WORD    LIST 

(a)  Masculine  Nouns  forming  Strong  Plurals  in  -in. 
(i)  Participial  and  kindred  forms. 


mahir 

=  skilful 

nafi' 

=  useful. 

mablul 

=  wet 

ahatir 

=  crafty 

mabsut 

=  happy 

wasi' 

=  spacious 

muslim 

=  Muslim 

And  the 

adjectives  in  -an  such  as  keslan,  etc. 
(ii)  Trades,  etc.,  of  measure  qattal. 

(cl.  p.  37). 

bayya' 

=  dealer 

khayyat 

=  tailor 

haddad 

=  smith 

naggar 

=  carpenter 

hallaq 

=  barber 

sammak 

=  fisherman 

Mammal 

=  porter,  carrier 

§arraf 

=  money  changer 

khabbaz 

=  baker 

§ayyad 

=  hunter  (fisher) 

khaddam 

=  servatU 

(6)  Strong  Feminine  Plurals  in  -at. 

=  post  office  I    hara*  ^ 

gara*  =  neighbour  \    lokanda* 

gawab,j**kkHv«iirtr=  letter  |    mahatta* 


busta* 


=  street 
=  hotel . 
=  railway  station 

(c)  Anomalous  Feminine  Forms. 

bint,  pi.  banat        =  girl,  daughter     I    umm,j)Z.  nmmahat=  mother 
ukht,  pi.  akhawat  =  sister  \ 


(d)  Broken  Plurals  of  form  qital. 


beled,  pi.  bilad 
dar,*  pi.  diyar 
farkhe,*  pi.  firakh 
gebel,  pi.  gibal 
gemel,  pi.  ginal 


=  town,  country 

=  house 

=  fowl 

=  mountain 

=  camel 


babl,  pi.  hibal 
kelb,  pi.  kilab 
ragil,  pi.  rigal 
rih,*  j)i.  riyah 


(c)  Broken  Plurals  of  the  form  qutul. 
=  book  I    tariq,  pi.  turuq 


rope 
dog 
man* 
wind 


road 


kitab,  pi.  kutub 
medine*,j)Z.mudun  =  city 

^  Hara  really  denotes  a  quarter  of  the  town,  the  more  correct  name  for 
a  street  in  the  modem  sense  is  shari'  (pi.  shawari'). 

*  It  will  be  noted  that  the  plural  restores  the  original  consonants  which, 
if  weak,  often  are  absorbed  in  the  neighbouring  vowel  in  the  singular,  thus 
rih  =  riyh,  and  dar  =  dayr,  etc. 

'  Ir.  also  rigagil,  riyayil  which  Van  Ess  notes  as  "  vulgar  ", 


70  THE    SIXTH   LESSON 

EXERCISE 

1 )  er-rigal  dol  hum  haddadin    =  Those  men  are  smiths. 

2)  el-harat  tawile  =  The  streets  are  long. 

3)  el-haddadin  dol  (hadol  el-  =^  Those  smiths  are  very  idle. 

haddadin,        hal-haddadin) 
hum  keslanin  qawi 

4)  fi  1-medine  el-qaribe  =  There  are  many  barbers  in 
hallaqin  ketir  the  neighbouring  city. 

5)  el-beyut  illi  fi  1-medine  =  The  houses  in  this  city  are 
di  (hadi  (hadhi)  1-medine)  very  lofty. 

hiya  'aliyye  ketir 

6)  fi  1-medine  di  lokandat  =  There  are  many  inns  in  this 
ketire  city. 

7)  en-neharat  fi  s-sef  tawile  =  In  the  summer  the  days  are 
xva^qi  very  long. 

8)  fi  1-mudun  el-kebire  =  In  large  towns  there  are 
hammalin  ketir  many  porters. 

9)  min  er-ragil  da  ?— huwa  =  Who  is  that  man? —  He  is 
khaddami  my  servant. 

10)  fish  khayyat  fi  1-beled  di  ^  Is  there  a  tailor  in  this 
(hal-beled,  hadhi  1-beled)  ?  village  ?— Yes,  sir,  there 
— na'am,  ya  khawage,  fih            is. 

11)  fen  el-mahatta  ?  — el-  =  Where  is  the  railway  station  ? 
mahatta  hiya  fi  sh-shari'  — The  railway  station  is  in 
dak  'ala  yeminek                          that  street  to  your  right. 

12)  el-'arab  dol  (hal-'arab,  =  Those  Arabs  in  my  opinion 
hadhol   el-'arab)    'ala   fikri  are  hunters. 

hum  sayyadin 

13)  et-turuq  illi  fi  beledek  =  The  roads  in  your  country 
mush  wasi'e  are  not  wide. 


THE    SIXTH   LESSON  71 

(14)  min  en  er-rigal  dol  ?—  =  Where  are  those  men  from? 
hum 'arab we-hum hammalin  — They  are  Arabs-  and 
min  el-Higaz  they  are  carriers  from  the 

Hijaz. 

(15)  fi  Masr  malik  dilwaqt        =  There   is    a   king   now   in 

Egypt. 

(16)  min  el-wilad  dol  ?— ya  =  Who  are  those  children?— 
Bidi,  hum  wiladna  Sir,  they  are  my  children. 

(17)  ahe  gawabat  li-hadretek  =  Here   are   letters   for   your 

honour. 

(18)  fi  1-mahatta  hammal  ?—  =  Is  there  a  porter  at  the 
aiwa,  ya  Jkhawage,  fi  1-  station? — Yes,  sir,  there 
mahatta  hammalin  ketir  are  many  porters  at  the 
qawi                                             station. 

(19)  'andukumkutubinkelizi?  =  Have  you  any  EngUsh 
— na'am,  ya  khawage,  books?— Yes,  sir,  we  have, 
'andena 

(20)  ayye  el-kutub  illi  =  What  kind  of  books  have 
'andekum  ?  you  ? 

(21)  'andek  gaz  li-otomobili  ?  =  Have  you  petrol  for  my 
— la,  ya  sidi,  ma  fish  gaz  fi  automobile  ?  —  No,  sir, 
1-beled  di                                     there  is  no  petrol  in  this 

town. 

(22)  fish  sarraf  fi  hal-medine  ?  =  Is  there  a  money  changer  in 
— na'am,  fih  sarraf  in  fi  sh-  this  town  ?  —  Yes,  there 
shari'  'ala  shemalek  are  money  changers  in  the 

street  to  your  left. 

(23)  fen  lokanda  tayyibe  fi  =  Where  is  there  a  good  inn 
1-beled  di  ?  in  this  town  ? 

(24)  fib  lokandat  we-lakin  hiye  =  There  are  inns  but  they  are 
mush  tayyibe.  not  good. 


Chapter   IX 
THE    SEVENTH    LESSON— THE    NUMERALS 

The  Cardinal  Numbers 

1  "  One,"  masc.  wahid,  fern,  wahde  ('Iraq  also  waMda). 

This  word  is  also  used  for  "  only  ",  the  indefinite 
"  a  (certain)  ". 

2  etnen,  also  t'nen  (Syr.),  ithnen  ('Iraq) ;  here  as  usual 

the  original  "  th  "  is  preserved  in  'Iraq  but  becomes 
"  t "  in  Egypt  and  Syria.  The  termination  -en  is 
dual  and  that  termination  alone  often  sufl&ces  to 
denote  "two",  thus  sa'a  (=  sa'at)  "hour", 
sa'aten  =  "  two  o'clock  ",  etc. 

3-10.  The  numerals  "  three  "  to  "  ten  "  have  each  two 
forms,  one  masculine  the  other  in  -a,  -e  (-at,  -et)  feminine,  but 
in  the  colloquial  speech  the  genders  are  no  longer  observed, 
usually  the  -a,  -e  form  (properly  feminine)  is  used  before  a 
word  beginning  with  a  consonant,  the  masculine  before  one 
beginning  with  a  vowel,  thus  khamse  buyut  =  "  five  houses  ", 
khams  aiyam  =  "  five  days  ". 

3  talat,  talate. 

4  arba',  arba'a. 

5  khams  (khamas)  khamse. 

6  sitt,  sitte. 

7  seba',  seb'a. 

8  teman,  temaniye. 

9  tisa'  (tis'),  tis'e. 
10    'asher,  'ashere. 


THE    SE\^NTH   LESSON  73 

In  3  and  8  the  t-  represents  original  th-  and  so  in  'Iraq 

we  find  the  more  correct  forms — 3  thalath,  thalathe,  8  thaman, 
thamaniya.  The  t-  in  8  is  itself  the  original  form,  and  so 
does  not  produce  th-  in  'Iraq, 

11-19.     The  decimal  numbers  are  formed  by  combining 
the  units  -with  'asher  "  ten  ",  thus  : — 

11  had'asher. 

12  etn'asher  ('Iraq,  ethn'asher). 

13  talat'asher  ('Iraq,  thalath'asher). 

14  arba't'asher. 

15  khamsast'asher. 

16  sitt'asher. 

17  seba't'asher. 

18  tamant'asher  (Iraq,  thamant  asher). 

19  tis'at 'asher. 

20  For  "twenty"  the  plural  of  "ten"  is  used,  thus 

'ashrin. 
30-90.    The  plurals  of  the  units,  thus  :— 
30    talatljin  (thalathin). 
40    arba'in,  etc. 

With  these  the  units  are  used  first  and  connected  with  the 
tens   by  we-   "  and  ",   thus   21  =  wahid   we- 'ashrin,   25  = 
khamas  we-*ashrin,  etc. 
100    miye,  miyat,  mit. 
200    dual  of  100,  miten. 
300    tultemiye  (thulthemiye). 
400    rub'emiye. 
500    khumsemiye. 
600    suttemiye. 
700    sub'emiye. 
800    tumnemiye. 
900    tus'emiye. 
1000    alf. 


74  THE   SEVENTH   LESSON 

2000    alfen. 
3000    telat  alaf. 
4000    arba't  alaf,  etc. 
377  =  tultemiye  we-sab'a  we-sab*in,  etc. 

The  numerals  3  to  10  take  the  accompanying  nomis  in  the 
plural,  but  after  this  the  nouns  are  in  the  singular,  thus : — 

one  book  =  kitab. 

two  books        =  kitab  en  (dual). 

three  books     =  telate  kutub. 

twenty  books  =  'ashrin  kitab  (noun  in  sing.). 

For  addition  we  use  we-  "  and  ",  thus  etnen  we-telate  = 
"  two  plus  three  "  ;  for  subtraction,  min  "  from  ",  thus 
etnen  min  telate  =  "  two  from  three  (three  minus  two) '" ; 
for  multiplication,  fi  "  in ",  as  etnen  fi  telate  =  "  twice 
three  "  ;  division,  'ala  as  temanye  'ala  etnen  =  "  eight 
divided  by  two  ". 

"  half  "  =  nuss. 

The  Ordinal  Numbers 

1st  awal  (awwal,  owal),  fem.  awale,  owale. 
The  succeeding  numbers  are  formed  on  the  measure  qatil, 
fem.  qalte. 

2nd  tani,  taniye. 

3rd  taht  (thalith),  talte  (thalthe). 

4th  rabi',  rab'e. 

5th  khamis,  khamse. 

6th  sadis,  sadse. 

7th  sabi',  sab'e. 

8th  tamin,  tamne. 

9th  tasi',  tas'e. 

10th  'ashir,  'ashre. 


THE   SEVENTH   LESSON  75 

(The  original  "  six  "  was  aid-,  wliich  has  become  sit-  by 
assimilation  to  the  (feminine)  -t  ending  so  that  in  the  ordinal 
"  6th  "  the  true  stem  appears.) 

The  word  tani  is  also  used  in  the  sense  of  "  another  ",  and 
as  an  adverb  meaning  "  again  ". 

NOTES 

(a)  Price. 

kam,  bi-kam  =  "  how  much  ?  " 

qadd    "j 

si'r        '-  =  "  price ". 

taman  J 

(tamm  =  "  complete  ") 

/  bi-kam  da  ?  (how  much  this  ?) 

"  !.««  ™«„».  ;»  f  KJa  •»  "        '  bi-qaddesh  ey  ?  (at  what  price  ?) 
now  mach  is  this  7     =  ^ .  ,  ,        ,  ,,  ,   .,        •      ,» 

tamannn  kam  :  (how  much  its  pnce  7) 


i  qaddeah  ee-si'r  ?  (how  muchis  the  price  7) 
(6)  Time,  etc. 

es-sa'a  kam  ?  =  "  what  time  is  it  7  " 

kam  sene  'umrek  7  =  "  what  is  your  age  7  "  (how  many  years  yonr  age  ?) 
kam  sene  luh  7         =  "  how  old  is  he  7  "  (how  many  years  has  he  7) 

(c)  Ariihmetical  processes. 

Addition,  we-  or  ila  :    telata  we-  (ila)  arba's  =  "  three  plus  four  ". 
Subtraction,  min  :         khamse  min  sab'a        =  "  seven  minus  five  ". 
Multiplication,  fi  :         khamse  fi  sab'a  =  "  five  times  seven  ". 

Division,  'ala  :  'awhrin  'ala  khamse      =  "  twenty  divided  by  five  ". 

Proportion,  nasba  .  .  .  ila  .  .  .  ka-nasba  .  .  .  ila  .  .  .,  nasba  arba'a  ila 
teman  ka-nasba  talata  ila  dtt  =  4  :  8  ::  3  :  6. 


EXA.AIPLES 

bi-kam  da  ?  =  Hoio  much  is  this  ? 

bi-talat  qiirush  =  Three  'piastres 

da  ghaK  bi-s-si'r  da  =  It  is  dear  at  that  price 

la,    da    rakhis    giddan  bi-s-  =  No,  it  is  very  cheap  at  that 
si'r  da  price 


76  THE    SEVENTH    LESSON 

'andek  sa'a  inkelizi  ?  =  Have  you  an  English  watch  ? 

aiwa,  ya  khawage,  ahe  wahida  —  Yes,  sir,  here  is  a  good  one 

tayibe 
tamanha  kam  ?  =  How  much  is  it  ? 

tamanlia  arba'  giniye  =  Its  price  is  four  pounds 

ya  salam,  biya  ghaliya  giddan  =  Indeed  it  is  very  dear 
bi-kam    el-'esb     (khubz)     di  =  How  much  is  bread  at  present? 

1-waqt  ? 
bi-kam  el-lahmi  da  ?  =  How  much  is  that  meat  ? 

bi-khamse  qurusb  er-ratl  —  Five  piastres  the  pound 

bi-kam  'alek  sa'atek  ?  —  How  much  did  your  watch 

cost  you  ? 
el-ugre  kam  ?  =  How  much  is  the  fare  ? 

ed-darage  el-awali  wahid  gineb  =  First  class  one  pound 
hena  kitaben,  wahid,  itnen      =  Here  are  two  books,  one,  two 
bi-qaddesh  da  ?  =  How  much  is  that  ? 

bi-riyalen  we-nuss  =  Two  and  a  half  dollars 

kam  el-beled  ba'ide  min  hena  ?  =  How  far  is  the  village  from 

here  ? 
hiya  mil  tamm  min  hena  =  It  is  a  whole  mile  from  here 

kam  sene  'umrek  ?  =  Hoiv  old  are  you  ? 

'umri   'ashrin  sena  taqriban  =  /  am  nearly  twenty  {my  age 

is  twenty  nearly) 
akhuk  kam  sene  leh  ?  =  How  old  is  your  brother  ? 

akhiiya  luh  etnen  we-'ashrin  =  My  brother  is  twenty-two 

sene 
akhuk    es-saghir    kam    sene  =  How  old  is  your  little  brother  ? 

'umruh  ?  ( Your    little    brother    how 

many  years  his  age) 
'umruh  sitt  senin  =  He  is  six  years  old 

tani  yom  el- 'id  —  The  day  after  the  feast 

ana  ma'i  telate  qm*ii8h  bass    =  /    have   only   three   piastres 

with  me 


THE    SE^^NTH    LESSON  77 

WORD    LIST 

Broken  Plvrala  of  type  qrU&l 


bet,  pi.  buyut      =  house 
baqq,  pi.  buqiiq  =  claim,  right 
melik,  pi.  iniiluk=  king 


qalb,  pi.  quiub    =  heart 

qa§r,  pi.  qu§ur     =  palace,  castle 


Broken  Plurals  of  type  qutal — qital 

64a*,  pi.  awad    =  room  |  ^ura*,  pi.  ^uwar  =  picture 

Broken  Pluralt  of  type  qiUtdl 

bakim,  =  governor  \    tagir,  pi.  tuggar  =  merchant 

pi.  bukkam  j   ^alib,  pi.  tullab   =  student 

(For  terms  expressing  "how  much  ?  "  etc.,  see  above.    For  coins,  \<  eight.s, 
et^".,  see  supplementary  list,  p.  79.) 

rakhis  =  cheap 

{or  rikhis) 

sena,  pi.  sinin  =  year 

ngre  =  fare 

'umr  =  age 


=  only 
darage  =  class 

gukh  =  cloth 

nasba  =  proportion 

nu9?  =  half 


EXERCISE 

(1)  'andek  kutub  'arabi  ? —  =  Have  you  any  Arabic  books  ? 
aiwa,  ya  khawage,  'andena,  — Yes,  sir,  we  have,  here 
ahe  kutub  gedide  are  some  new  books 

(2)  el-kitab  da  (hal-kitab)  =  What  is  the  price  of  this 
kam  tamanub  ? — tamanub  book  ? — Its  price  is  twenty 
'ashrin  qirsh                                   piastres 

(3)  da  gbali  ketir  bi-s-si'r  da  =  It  is  very  dear  at  that  price 

(4)  la,  buwa  rakbis  qawi  bi-s-  =  No,  it  is  very  cheap  at  that 
si'r  da  price 

(5)  bi-qaddesb  da  ?— bi-  =  How  much  is  this?— Two 
qirsben  piastres 

(6)  bi-kam  ed-dira'   min  el-  =  How  much  an  ell  is  that 
gukb  da  ?— bi-riyal}n  cloth  ? — Two  dollars 


78  THE    SEVENTH   LESSON 

(7)  ma'kum  felus  ? — ^aiwa,  =  Have  you  any  money  with 
ma'na  'ashrin  qirsh  you  ? — Yes,  I  have  twenty 

piastres 

(8)  ya  salam  ana  ma'i  tamane  =  Good  heavens,  I  have  only 
qurusli  bass  eight  piastres  with  me 

(9)  kam  sene  'umrek  ? — 'umri  =  How  old  are  you  ? — ^I  am 
temant  'asher  sene  eighteen 

(10)  el-bet  da  kebir  qawi,  fih  =  That  house  is  very  large, 
uwad  ketire  there  are  a  great  many 

rooms  in  it 

(11)  min  er-ragil  da  ? — ^huwa  =  Who  is  that  man  ? — he  is 
tagir  min  et-tuggar  fi  1-  one  of  the  merchants  of 
Iskandariya  Alexandria 

(12)  fi  1-medine  di  buyut  =  There  are  many  houses  in 
ketire  this  city 

(,13)  el-Qahira  medine  kebire  =  Cairo  is  a  great  city  and  there 
we-fiha  shawari'  letife  are  beautiful  streets  in  it 

(14)  kam  el-ugre  ila  l-Qahire  ?  =  How  much  is  the  fare  to 
— ed-darage  el-awale  kbam-  Cairo  ? — First  class  it  is 
sin  qirsh,  we-itnen  khamse  fifty  piastres,  and  second 
we-'ashrin                                    class  twenty-five 

(15)  tis'a  we-telata  kam  ?      =  How    much    is   nine    plus 

three? 

(16)  khamse  min 'ashrin  kam  ?=  How    much    is    five    from 

twenty? 

(17)  sab'a  fi  telata  tarn  ?         =  How  much  is  seven  times 

three? 

(18)  khamse  we-'ashrin  'ala  =  How  much  is  twenty-five 
khamse  kam  ?  divided  by  five  ? 

(19)  nasba  miye  ila  alf  ke- =  A  hundred  is  to  a  thousand  as 
nasba  khamse  ila  khamsin  five  is  to  fifty 

(20)  ahe  mahatta,  ismiha  ey  ?  =  Here  is  a  station,  what  is  its 
— ^ismiha  el-  Qusur  name  ? — ^Its  name  is  Luxor 


I 


THE   SE\\ENTH   LESSON 


79 


Jl)  beta'  min  el-qasr  da  ? — 
huwa  qasr  min  el-qusur 
illi  li-1-melik 

(22)  kam  lek  'aleh  ?  li  'aleh 
tamaniya  wetamanin  qirsh 

-3)  'andi  dar  fiha  talat  biyut 

we-sath 
124)  akhu  kiiamsin 
_j)  qabel  senten 
(2G)  awwal  wabde  .  .  .  tani 

wahde    .     .    . 


Who  does  this  palace  belong 

to? — It    is    one    of    the 

palaces  of  the  king 
How  much  does  he  owe  you  ? 

He  owes  me  eighty-eight 

piastres 
I  have  a  house  with  three 

rooms  and  a  verandah 
A  man  of  fifty 
Two  years  ago 
First  item  .  .  .  second  item 


APPENDIX    TO    LESSON    MI 
Some  of  the  Commoker  Coins  ajst)  Measures 


Cains.     (Values  must  be  looked  out  in  current  rate  of 
exchange.) 

=  para  {Syr.). 

—  piastre  =  40  paras. 

=  silver  coin,  i.e.  piastre. 

=fiv€  piastres. 

=  dollar,    usually    about    17-18 

piastres. 
=  20  piastres. 

=  5  dollars,  or  100  piastres. 
=  Turkish  pound,  jive  megidi. 


bara* 

qirsh  (quriish) 
fadda 

beshlik  (Sjria) 
riyal  (riyale)  (Syr.) 

megidi  ^Syr.) 
ginih  fginiya)  (Eg.) 
lira  'usmanli  (Syr.) 


Measures. 


qadam 

dera* 

mil 


=  foot. 
=  Bpan. 

=  mile. 


80  THE    SEVENTH   LESSON 

Weights.      (Only  roughly  approximate,   subject  to  local 
variations.) 

miskal 

oqqiye  =  8  miskals. 

rutl  (artal)  =  pound,  12  oqqiye. 

qantar  =  100  rutl. 

tulunata*  =  ton. 


Chapter  X 

THE    EIGHTH    LESSON— THE    GENITI\T: 

We  liave  seen  that  a  sufl&xed  pronoun  attached  to  a  noun 
denotes  the  possessive  as  in  bet-i  =  "  my  house  ".  Instead  of 
that  miffiy  we  can  add  a  noun  in  the  same  position  and 
similarly  convey  a  possessive  meaning,  e.g.  bet  er-ragil  = 
"  the  man's  house  ".  Grammarians  have  observed  that  there 
are  two  kinds  of  genitive  or  possessive  :  (i)  the  true  or  logical 
genitive  and  (ii)  the  formal  genitive. 

(i)  The  true  genitive  causes  the  preceding  word  to  be 
defined,  e.g.  kitab  el-walid,  "  the  boy's  book  "  or  "  the  book 
of  the  boy  ".  This  specifies  a  particular  book  and  so  defines 
it  as  sharply  as  if  the  article  were  prefixed  to  the  "  book  ". 
This  definition  by  the  following  genitive  debars  us  from 
applying  the  article  to  the  word  so  defined,  so  when  we  translate 
into  Arabic  "  the  book  of  the  boy  "  we  must  be  careful  not  to 
put  "  the  "  before  '"  book  "  as  the  following  possessive  conveys 
a  complete  definition  and  the  article  would  be  redundant.    So  : 

kitab  Muhammad  =  The  hook  of  Muhammad 

"  Muhammad  "  is  defined  by  its  own  nature  because  it  Ls 
a  proper  name  and  so  it  strictly  defines  the  preceding  word, 
which  consequently  cannot  have  the  article.    And  so : — 

kitab  abuk  =  Thy  father's  book 

Abuk  is  defined  by  the  possessive  suffix  and  so  defines  the 
preceding  "  book  ".  In  aU  these  instances  of  the  true  genitive 
the  rule  is  that  the  first  word  (the  thing  or  person  possessed) 
may  not  have  the  article  but  still  must  be  regarded  as  fully 
defined  by  the  second  noun  (denoting  the  possessor  or  author) 


82  THE  EIGHTH  LESSON 

which  must  have  its  definition  either  by  the  article  or  by  its 
own  nature  or  by  a  suffixed  pronoun. 

In  Arabic  consequently  we  are  unable  to  express  directly 
"  a  merchant  of  the  city  ",  for  the  following  genitive  would 
define  the  "  merchant  ",  so  we  are  reduced  to  say  "  one  of 
the  merchants  of  the  city  "  or  "a  merchant  of  the  merchants 
of  the  city  ".  In  modem  colloquial  beta',  taba',  shiyye,  or 
mal  (cf.  sect.  14  above)  can  be  inserted  and  then  it  is  this 
inserted  word  which  is  defined  by  the  possessive  and  so  the 
preceding  noun  may  or  may  not  have  the  articles.    Thus: — 

el-ldtab  beta'  er-ragil  =  The  man's  hook 

(lit.  the  hook  property  of  the  man) 

No  doubt  one  reason  why  these  words  have  become  so  usual 
in  the  colloquial  is  that  they  enable  the  uneducated  speaker 
to  evade  some  of  the  stricter  requirements  of  classical  grammar. 
These  two  nouns,  the  construct  (=  the  thing  or  person 
possessed)  and  the  genitive  (=the  possessor),  are  bound 
together  in  a  close  connection  which  the  grammarians  term 
"  idafat  "  (occupation),  and  two  points  must  be  carefully  noted 
about  this  :  (1)  the  connection  is  so  close  that  the  genitive 
is  treated  like  a  suffix  and  so  the  feminine  nouns  ending  in 
-a  (-e)  change  this  to  -at  (-et)  before  the  genitive  just  as  before 
a  pronominal  suffix,  and  so — 

The  city  of  the  Prophet  =  medinet  en-nabi 

Remember,  therefore,  to  use  -at,  -et  in  such  feminines  when 
followed  by  the  genitive.  Again,  of  course,  the  use  of  beta', 
etc.,  avoids  this.  (2)  So  close  is  the  connection  that  nothing  . 
ought  to  intervene  between  the  construct  and  its  genitive  :  I 
usually  the  qualifying  adjective  foUows  the  noun  it  qualifies, 
but  if  the  genitive  follows  it  has  to  be  postponed  so  as  not  to 
break  the  connection.  So  if  I  want  to  say  "  the  man's  large 
book  "  I  must  express  it  as  "  book  (of)  the  man  the  large  "  = 


THE  EIGHTH  LESSON  83 

Kitab  er-ragil  el-kebir.  As  the  kitab  is  defined  by  the  following 
genitive  the  adjective  has  to  be  defined  ako  and  this  is  done  by 
giving  it  the  article.  Unfortunately  the  resultant  expression 
looks  to  the  English  reader  like  "  the  book  of  the  big  man  ", 
but  if  this  had  been  meant  the  phrase  would  have  been  "  (the) 
book  (of)  the  man  and  he  (is)  big  ".  Again  the  use  of  beta', 
etc.,  enables  us  to  evade  all  these  requirements. 

The  Formal  Genitive 

(ii)  The  Formal  Genitive  is  that  which  does  not  define  but 
merely  describes  :  it  does  not  denote  author  or  possessor  but 
only  material,  etc.  Thus  sahni  nehas  =  "  a  dish  of  copper  ". 
In  this  sort  of  genitive  the  second  (or  genitive)  word  is  not 
necessarily  defined — in  classical  Arabic  the  second  word  may 
be  genitive,  or  accusative,  or  in  apposition  with  the  first ;  so 
with  a  genitive  of  this  sort  either  both  may  have  the  article, 
or  both  may  be  without,  or  the  second  may  have  it  and  the 
first  not.  It  is  not  possible,  however,  for  the  first  to  have  it 
and  the  second  to  be  without,  nor  can  we  use  beta',  etc.,  in 
this  sort  of  genitive.  Thus  mesafit  yom  =  "  a  day's  distance  ", 
yom  es-safar  =  "  day  of  departure  ",  etc. 

So  the  genitive  can  be  used  to  express  material,  e.g.  bab 
khashab  =  "  a  door  of  wood  ",  which  could  also  be  expressed 
as  bab  min  khashab  =  "  a  door  (made)  from  wood  ",  or  the 
two  words  can  be  treated  as  in  apposition  "  a  door  a  (piece  of) 
wood  "  ;  in  classical  Arabic  where  the  cases  are  shown  by 
distinctive  endings  it  is  apparent  that  the  formal  genitive  of 
the  second,  or  its  apposition  with  the  first,  are  alternative  ways 
of  expressing  the  material.  So  sa'a  dahab,  or  sa'a  min  dahab 
=  "a  gold  watch",  etc.,  lahm  ghanam=  "mutton"  (i.e.  meat 
of  sheep).  In  these  cases  both  words  may  take  the  article, 
or  both  may  be  undefined,  thus  bab  khashab  =  "  a  wooden 
door  ",  el-bab  el-khashab  =  "  the  wooden  door  ". 


84  THE  EIGHTH  LESSON 

The  Formal  Genitive  Governed  by  an  Adjective 

The  formal  genitive  may  be  governed  by  an  adjective  or 
its  equivalent  (i.e.  tbe  participle  of  tlie  verb,  etc.).    Thus  : — 

ketir  el-mal  =  Great  of  wealth 

qalil  el-'aql  =  Scanty  in  intelligence 

huwa  faqir  el-hal  =  He  was  of  poor  condition 

katib  el-kitab  —  Writer  of  the  hook  {=he  who  wrote  the 
book,  the  katib  being  a  participle 
equivalent  to  a  verb  in  sense,  to  an 
adjective  in  form) 

Peculiar  Use  of  "  Master  ",  "  Father  ",  etc.,  with  the 

Genitive 

It  is  characteristic  of  all  the  Semitic  languages  to  use  such 
words  as  "  master  ",  "  owner  ",  "  father  ",  etc.,  with  abstract 
(sometimes  with  other)  nouns  as  descriptives.  The  words  thus 
used  in  Arabic  are  dhu  or  du  (fem.  dhat,  dat)  "  owner  ", 
sahib  (fem.  sahibe)  "master",  ab^  "father",  umm 
"  mother  ",  ibn  "  son  ",  etc.  Thus  "  father  of  lies  "  ~ 
"  liar  ". 

du  'ilm  =  Wise  man  ( =  owner  of  wisdom) 

du  'aql  =  Intelligent  mun 

el-yom  du  matar  =  To-day  is  rainy  ( =  oivner  of  rain) 

du  temam  qawa'id  =  An  eight-sided  figure 

shagare  dat  zill  =  A  shady  tree 

sahib  'adl  =  Upright  man 

sahib  mal  ketir  =  Very  wealthy  man 

abu  1-fadl  =  Excellent  man  (father  of  excellence) 

abu  shawarib  =  Man  with  long  moustaches 

abu  gu'ran  =  Father  of  dung  (name  of  carrion 

beetle) 

^  Note  that  ab,  akh,  ham  before  the  genitive  take  -u  as  before  a  suffix. 


I 


THE  EIGHTH  LESSON  85 

umm  arba'  we-arbain  =  Mother  of  forty-four  {=centiTpede) 
ibn  'ashrin  sene  =  Man  twenty  years  old 

ibn  nas  or  ibn  bet         =  Man  of  good  birth 
ibn  awa  =  Jackal,  etc. 

All,  Every 

The  words  kull,  gemi'  mean  "  all  "  or  "  every  "  ;  used  with 
the  article  they  denote  "  all,  the  whole  ",  without  the  article 
"  every  ". 

kull  n-nas,  or  gemi'  en-nas  =  All  men 

en-nas  kulluhum,  =  All  men 

or  en-nas  gemi'hum 
kull  el-medine,  el-medine  kulliha  =  All  the  city 

kull(i)  medine  =  Every  city 

kull  el-yom,  el-yom  kulluh  =  All  the  day,  the  whole  day 

kull(i)  yom  =  Every  day 

kull(i)na  =  All  of  us 

kull  wahid  =  Every  one 

Part 

The  word  ba'd  (ba'ad)  denotes  "part,  some",  and  is  followed 
by  the  genitive.     Thus  : — 

ba'd  en-nas  =  Some  men 

ba'd  et-tiggar  =  Some  merchants 

ba'dina  =  Some  of  us 

ba'di  (ba'ad)  min  en-nas  =  Same  of  the  men 

Like 
Similar  in  use  is  misl  (mithl)  "  like  ",  as  : — 

huwa  misl  el-wahsh  =  He  is  like  a  tcild  beaM 

( =  the  like  of  a  tcild  beast) 


86 


THE  EIGHTH  LESSON 


huwa  misli  —  He  is  like  me  ( =  my  like) 

In  Egyptian  dialect  zayy,  ziyy  =  "  like  ". 
huwa  zayyi  =  He  is  like  me 

'ala  zayy  el-hunud    =  In  the  Indian  fashion 

Hence  ezayy  =  what  like  ?  how  ?     ezayyek  =  how  are  you  ? 

Unlike 

Gher  is  used  for  "  other  than  ",  "  unlike  ",  thus  : — 
ragil  mutemaddin  —  A  civilized  man 

ragil  gher  mutemaddin  =  An  uncivilized  man 

er-ragil  gher  el-mutemaddin  =  The  uncivilized  mun 

Thus  gher   becomes   a   simple  negative  used  before  an 
adjective  or  its  equivalent  whose  descriptive  is  denied. 


WORD    LIST 

Plurals  of 

the  type  aqtdl 

nahr            anhar 

=  river 

walad          awlad 
shagare*     ashgar 

=  child  (this  is  the  literary  plural,  the 
vernacular  generally  prefers  wilad) 
=  tree 

mal              amwal 
hal               ahwal 

=  property 

=  state,  condition 

Plurals  of  type  qitldn  or  qutldn 

beled           buldan 
faris             fursan 

=  town,  country 
=  horseman 

ghulam        ghilman 
shabb          shubban 

=  hoy,  youth,  slavt 
=  young  man 

'adad 

=  number 

lahm  ghanam 

=  mutton,  etc. 

ahl                           =  family,  people 
akh  (ikhwan)         =  brother 
bunn                       =  coffee  (in  berry) 
dukkan                   =  shop 
dukhkban              =  tobacco 

musafir  (-in) 

qahwa 

qon^ul 

sarg 

shekh 

=  traveller 

=  coffee  (beverage) 

=  consul 

=  saddle 

=  old  man,  chief 

galale* 
lahm 
lahm  baqar 

=  majesty 
=  meat 
—  beef 

suq  (iswaq) 

wadi 

y6m  (aiyam) 

=  market 
=  valley 
=  day 

THE  EIGHTH  LESSON  87 

EXERCISE 

(1)  kef  hal  el-hawa  ?— en-  =  What  is  the  state  o!  the 
nehar  da  el-hawa  radi  weather  ? — To-day       the 

weather  is  bad 

(2)  huwa  min  wadi  n-Nil         =  He  is  from  the  Nile  valley 

(3)  er-rigal  dak  hum  min  esh-  =  Those  men  are  from 
Sham  Damascus 

(4)  wen  el-kitab  mali  ? —  =  Where  is  my  book  ? — Here 
hena  el-kitab  malek  is  your  book 

(5)  huwa  fi  ba'd  al-aiyam  fi  =  Some  days  he  is  in  the 
s-suq  market 

(6)  zoget      el-qonsul      hiya  =  The  consul's  wife  is  very  ill 
maride  giddan 

(7)  baghl  el-musafir  da  ma  fish  =  This  traveller's  mule  has  no 
luh  sarg  saddle 

(8)  kam  'adad  ahl  el-Iskan-  =  What  is  the  population  of 
deriya  ?  Alexandria  ? 

(9)  beta'  min  el-qasr  da? —  =  Whose  palace  is  that  ? — That 
da  qasr  Muntaza  we-huwa  is  the  palace  of  Muntaza 
wahid  qusur  galalet  el-melik         and  it  is  one  of  the  palaces 

of  his  majesty  the  king 

(10)  el-gebel  da  ismuh  ey  ? —  =  That  mountain,  what  is  its 
da  huwa  Gebel  Musa  name? — That     is     Gebel 

Musa 

(11)  min  en  el-musafir  ? —  =  Where  is  that  traveller 
huwa  el-qonsul  el-faran-  from  ? — He  is  the  French 
sawi                                              consul 

(12)  sahibi  fen  1 — ^huwa  fi  =  Where  is  my  friend  ? — He  is 
d-dukkan  beta'  et-tagir  in  the  merchant's  shop 

(13)  beta'e  min  el-gimal  di  ?  =  Whose  are  those  camels? — 
hiya  el-gimal  beta'et  esh-shekh     They  are  the  sheikh's 


88  THE  EIGHTH  LESSON 

(14)  min  esh-shekh  ? — esh- =  Who  is  the  sheikh? — His 
shekh  da  ismuh  Mahmud  name  is  Mahmud  and  he  is 
we-huwa  kebir  el-beled  the  chieftain  of  all  the 
kuUha                                            country 

(15)  et-tagir  da  huwa  sahib  =  That  merchant  is  very 
mal  ketir  wealthy 

(16)  huwa  faqir  el-mal  =  He  is  very  poor 

(17)  abuya  huwa  tagir  we-  =My  father  was  a  merchant 
lakin  huwa  mush  ghani  but  he  was  not  wealthy 

(18)  ba'd  el-musafirin  hum  fi  =Some  of  the  travellers  are  in 
l-Iskanderija,  we-be'duhum  Alexandria  and  some  of 
fi  1-Qahire  them  are  in  Cairo 

(19)  en-nas  ba'duhum  inke-  =  Some  of  the  men  are  EngUsh 
liziyye  we-ba'duhum  faran-  and  some  of  them  French 
sawiyye 

(20)  ba'dina  muslimin  we  =  Some  of  us  are  Muslims  and 
ba'dina  nasara  some  of  us  are  Christians 

(21)  wahid  et-tuggar  huwa  =  One  of  the  merchants  is  a 
habashi  negro 

(22)  ibnek  fen  ?— ibni  huwa  =  Where  is  your  son? — My 
fi  1-bet  beta'  et-tagir  el-  son  is  in  the  Persian 
'Agemi                                          merchant's  house 

(23)  kull  en-nas  hum  ikhwan  =  All  men  are  brothers 

(24)  kull  wahid  fi  1-mudun  di  =  Every  one  in  these  towns  is 
muslim  a    Muslim 

(25)  fi  kulli  medine  muslimin  =  There  are  Muslims  in  every 

town 

(26)  'andek  lahm  el-baqar? —  =  Have  you  any  beef? — Yes, 
aiwa  'andi  I  have 

(27)  bi-kam  tamanuh  ?  How  much  is  it  ? 

(28)  bi-kam  er-ratl  bunn  ?      =  How     much     is     coffee     a 

pound  ? 

(29)  et-tagir  el-kebir  el-mal     =  The  very  wealthy  merchant 


THE  EIGHTH  LESSON  89 

(30)  barudna  share  'e4-<Jarib   =  Our  muskets  are  the  law  of 

the  warrior 

(31)  ya   bint,    va   umm   el- =  0  girl,  mother  of  big  earrings 
medalat 

(32)  mal  ma  'endna,  mal  ma  =  We  have  no  property,  we 
'endna  have  no  property 

gher  el-dagage  el-etqaqi  except  a  cackling  hen  and  a 

we-dek   ma 'ha   yeqaqi  cock  to  go  with  it 

ensunat  ma  'endna  hezunat  We  have  no  fine  women 

(These  last  three  sentences  (30-2)  are  from  Bedwin  songs  given  in  the 
Palestine  Exploration  FuTuTs  Quarterly  Statement  fat  A^tH,  1925  (pp.  87-8).) 

ADDITIONAL    EXA^klPLES    OF    THE    USE    OF    THE 
GENITIVE 

bi-smi-llahi  r-rahmani  r-rahim  =  In    the    name    of   God    the 

merciful,      the      com- 

passiorMte 

(Invocation  said  at  the  beginning  of  any  undertaking,  before  partaking 
of  food,  etc.,  and  exclamation  on  seeing  the  unexpected.  As  a  quotation 
the  classical  forms  are  (usually)  preserved,  so  ism  loses  its  initial  i-  after 
bi-,  as  this  t-  is  not  part  of  the  stem,  but  -»  is  added  after  {i)sm,  (A)llah 
and  rahman  as  termination  of  the  genitive  which  follows  the  preposition,  but 
it  is  omitted  after  rahim  because  final  short  vowels  are  not  sounded  at  the 
"  pause  ",  i.e.,  before  full  stop.) 

ya  gemel  el-bet  =  0  camel  of  the  hxruse 

(Women's  cry  in  wailing  for  the  dead  master  of  a  house.) 

ya  shekh  el-'arab  =  0  sheikh  of  the  Arabs 

(Salutation  to  the  saint  Abmed  el-Bedawi  who  is  buried  at  Tanta  and 
whose  disciples,  one  of  the  most  popular  fraternities  of  darwishes  in  Egypt, 
are  known  by  their  wearing  red  turbans.) 

rahmet  allah  'aleh  =  The  mercy  of  God  he  on  him, 

(To  be  said  after  mentioning  by  name  any  person  who  is  dead.) 
salat  allah  'aleh  we-salam         =  The    'prayer    ( =  blessing)  of 

God  he  on  him  {and  'peace) 
(Used  after  every  mention  of  the  Prophet.    If  the  speaker  does  not  use 
thia  formula  a  bystander  usually  says  it  in  a  low  voice.) 


90  THE  EIGHTH  LESSON 

'ala  l-'en  we-r-ras,  Ya  sayyid  =  On  the  eyes  and  head,  0  lord 

en-nas  of  men 

(Meaning,  I  am  entirely  at  your  disposal.    Note  the  dual  in  en  =  "  eyes  ", 
see  p.  67  above.) 

kulli  belad  bi-'adetha  =  Every  country  has  its  customs 

kuUi  sliayy  fi  yid  allah.  =  Everything  is  in  God's  hands 

fi  man  allah  (=  fi  aman  .  .  .)  =  In  the  keeping  of  God  {= good- 
bye) 
salam  hiya  hatta  matla'  el-  =  It  is  j)eace  until  break  of  day 

fagr 
da  1-waqt  da  nuss  en-nehar      =  Already  it  is  midday 
kulli  yom  arba'  marrat  =  Four  times  every  day 

fi  yom  min  ba'd  el-aiyam  fi  =  On  a  certain  day  at  noon 

waqt  ed-dohr 
ibn  haram  !  =  Rascal !  ( =  son  of  thieves  !) 

sitt  denanir  dahab  =  Six  dinars  of  gold 

(dinar  =  ancient  coin,  silver  in  the  lands  conquered  from  the  Persians, 
gold  in  those  taken  from  the  Greeks.) 

lahm  ghanam  barid  =  Cold  mutton 

luqmet  'esh  (khubz)  =  A  morsel  of  bread 

kubbayet  moya  =  A  glass  of  water 

(These  five  last  are  formal  or  improper  genitives.) 

kef  hal  el-hawa  ?  =  What   is   the   weather   like  ? 

( =  what  is  the  state  of  the 

weather  ?) 
esh  16^  kef  iyetek  ?  =  How  are  you  (dial,  of  Aleppo)  ? 

(lit.  what  is  the  colour  of  your  condition  ?) 

ma  fish  hadde  gherna  fi  1-bet  =  TJiere  is  no  one  but  us  in  the 

house 
ya  bu  naddare  =  0      you      with      spectacl&t 

(bu  =  abu) 


Chafter  XI 

THE    NINTH    LESSON— ADJECTI^T.S    OF    THE 
MEASURE    AQTAL 

The  Comparative  Degree 

The  comparative  degree  of  adjectives  is  formed  on  the 
measure  of  aqtal,  thus  kebir  "  great  ",  akbar  "  greater  "  ; 
sa'ab  "  difficult  ",  as'ab  "  more  difficult  "  ;  tawil  "  long  ", 
atwal  "longer";  'aU  "high",  (= 'ahy),  a'la  (=  a'lay) 
"  higher  "  ;  harr  "  hot  ",  aharr  "  hotter  ",  etc.  The  com- 
parative may  be  followed  by  min  or  an  "  from  "  which  thus 
used  serves  to  express  "  than  ",  and  in  "  western  "  Arabic 
'ala  may  be  used  similarly.    Thus  : — 

atwal  minnek  =  Taller  than  you 

ash-shams    honak    aharr  =  The  sun  there  is  hotter  than  here 
minnha  hena 

For  "  better  "  use  ahsan,  but  the  positive  hasan  =  "  good  " 
is  now  used  only  as  a  proper  name.  For  "  good  "  use  kher, 
or  tayyib. 

ahsan  min  da  ma  fish  =  There  is  no  better  than  this 

"We  can  also  make  a  comparative  by  using  the  word  aktar  = 
"  more  "  (from  ketir  =  "  much  ")  and  this  is  the  usual 
method  when  the  adjective  contains  more  than  three  con- 
sonants, thus : — 

ana  'atshan  aktar  minnek  =  /  am  thirstier  than  you 

(Classical  Arabic  has  a  feminine  form  for  the  comparative 
in  the  measure  qutla,  e.g.  "  greater  "  =  masc.  akbar,  fern. 
kubra,  but  this  is  no  longer  used  in  the  colloquial  speech.) 


92  THE  NINTH  LESSON 

The  Superlative 

The  same  form  is  used  for  the  superlative  and  may  then 
take  the  article  or  be  otherwise  defined,  thus  el-akbar  =  "  the 
greatest  ",  el-as'ab  =  "  the  most  difiicult  ",  etc. 

akbar  el-kuU      ^       n     ^   ^    r   n 
, ,       1    n  1        h  =  Greatest  of  all 
akbar  kulluhumj  "^ 

akbarhum  =  The  greatest  of  them 

aqsar  et-turuq       =  The  shortest  way 

{=  shortest  of  the  ways) 

aqsar  tariq  =  {The)  shortest  way  is   .  .  . 

bi-1-ketir  =  At  most 

bi-l-aktar  =  Generally 

The  word  kebir  "  great  "  is  often  used  in  a  superlative  sense, 
as  kebir  en-nas  =  "  greatest  of  men  ".  Applied  to  God,  akbar 
serves  as  superlative,  e.g.  Allah  akbar  =  "  God  is  greatest  ". 
Attention  should  be  given  to  the  use  of  the  preposition 
'ala  ('ale-)  with  an  adjective  :  very  often  this  expresses  a 
quasi-superlative  which  very  nearly  corresponds  to  the 
English  "  too  ",  thus  :— 

el-burnus  beta'i  huwa  qasir  =  My  cloak  is  too  short  for  you 

'alek 
el-kitab  da  el-inkelizi  huwa  =  That  English  book  is  too  hard 

sa'ab    'ala    1-walad    es-         for  the  little  boy 

saghir 

Adjectives  Denoting  Colour 

Adjectives  denoting  colour  have,  in  the  masculine,  the 
same  form  as  comparatives  but  make  their  feminine  in  the 
measure  qatla,  thus  : — 

abyad     fern,   bayda  =  white 

aswad  sawda  (soda)  =  black 

ahmar  hamra  =  red 


THE  NINTH  LESSON  93 


azraq 

zarqa 

=  blue 

asfar 

safra 

=  yellow 

akhdar 

khadra 

=  green 

Adjectives  Denoting  Bodily  Defects 

The  same  measure  is  used  to  denote  bodily  defects  but  with 
the  feminine  qatla.    Thus  : — 

ahbad  fern,   hadba  =  hunch-backed 
akhras  kharsa  =  dumb 

a'rag  'arga     =  lame 

a'ma  ( =  a'mav)  'amya  =  blind,  etc. 

ADDITIONAL    EXAMPLES    OF    THE    "  AQTAL " 
FORMS 

el-*udr  aqbah  min  ed-denb       =  The  excuse  is  more  shameful 

than  the  offence 
ed-darsi  da  asab  min  et-tani  =  This  exercise  is  harder  than 

the  last 
el-yom     ente     keslan    aktar  —  To-day  you  are  idler  than  you 

minnek  ems  u>ere  yesterday 

huwa  angas  min  faret  el-liabs  =  He  is  more  cunning  than  the 

prison  rat 
haqq  el-qawi  aqwa  =  The  right  of  the  stronger  is 

strongest  ( =  might  is  right) 
el-hara  di  atwal  el-an  mimma  =  This  street  is  longer  now  than 
saqiban  it  was  formerly 

(mimma  =  min  ma,  than  what) 
huwa  mush  aktar  min  nuss  =  Itis  not  more  than  a  half  mile 

mil 
el-bet  d-akbar  min  dak  =  This  house  is  larger  than  that 

(d-akbar  =  da  akbar) 


94 


THE  NINTH  LESSON 


huwa  akbar  miimi  bi-shahren  =  He  is  older  than  I 

months 
huwa  akbar  bi-ketir  =  He  is  much  older 

asfar  'ala  akhdar  =  Yellowish  green 


hy  two 


WORD 

LIST 

'alim 

=mse 

harr 

=  hot 

'aqil 

=  reasonable. 

kher 

=  good,  better 

sensible 

mesgid  (mesagid) 

=  mosque,  oratory 

bahr  (abtior) 

=  sea  (in     Egypt 

(ru)t  congrega- 

al80 the  Nile) 

tional) 

dulb 

=  plane  tree 

nahr  (anhar) 

=  river    {canal  in 

dunya 

=  world 

'Iraq) 

embarili 

=  yesterday  (Eg.) 

nakhl,  -e* 

=  palm-tree    {date 

ems 

=  yesterday    (Syr. 

palm) 

'Iraq) 

nur 

=  light 

'en  ('eyun) 

=  eye 

qamar  (masc.) 

=  moon 

farhan 

=  cheerful 

rib  (aryah) 

=  wind 

gahil 

=  foolish 

shahr  (ashhur) 

=  month 

garni'  (gawame') 

=  congregational 

shedid 

=  severe,  violent 

mosque  (i.e. 

tarfa 

=  tamarisk 

where  there  is 

waraq 

=  paper 

a    Friday 

zahra*  (ezhar) 

=  flower 

sermon) 

EXERCISE 


(1)  ente  akbar  minni 

(2)  et-tariq  da  huwa  atwal  min 
et-tariq  et-tani 

(3)  ed-darsi  da  (had-dars)  as' 
ab  'aleya 

(4)  en-nakhle  di  hiya  a'la  min 
darna 

(5)  ma  fish  nahr  atwal  fi  d- 
dunya  kullha  min  bahr  en- 
Nil  el-mubarek 


You  are  older  than  I  am 
This  road  is  longer  than  the 

other  one 
This  lesson  is  too  hard  for  me 

This  palm-tree  is  higher  than 

our  house 
In  all  the  world  there  is  no 

river    longer    than    the 

blessed  Nile 


THE  NINTH  LESSON  95 

6)  et-tarfa  di  ahsan  min  ed-  =  This     tamarisk     is     more 
dulb  beautiful  than  the  plane- 
tree 

7)  al-'alim  ahsan  min  el-gahil  =  The  wise  man  is  better  than 

the  fool 

8)  huwa  akbar  minnek,  ente  =  He  is  older  than  you,  you  are 
a'lan  minnuh  taller  than  be 

9)  er-rigal  dol  'atshanin  akbar  =  Those    men     are    thirstier 
Tninni  than    I 

10)  fi  Tbabr   el-akhmar   el-  =  In  the  Red  Sea  the  weather 
hawa  abarr  minnuh  hena  is  hotter  than  here 

11  )el-gimalbiyeaqwa  min  el- =  Camels    are    stronger    than 
hamir  asses 

12)  esh-sbagare  hiye  kbadre  =  The  tree  is  green  and  its 
we-ezbarba  safra  flowers  are  yellow 

13)  el-mara  di  biye  'amye       =  This  woman  is  blind 

14)  el-yom  ente  keslan  ketir,  =  To-day  you  are  very  lazy, 
aktar  minnek  embarih  more     than     you     were 

yesterday 

15)  el-yom  abrad  min  ems      =  To-day     is      colder      than 

yesterday 

16)  akbuk     en-nebar     da  =  Is  your  brother  better  to- 
ahsan  day  ? 

17)  gbulam   aqil  kber   min  =  A  sensible  youth  is  better 
sbekh  gahil  than  a  foolish  old  man 

18)  el-kbawage  Mahmud  fen  ?  =  Where  is  Mr.  Mahmud  ? 

19)  huwa  fi  1-gami'  el-akbar  =  He     is     in     the     principal 

mosque 

20)  nur  esb-sbems  aktar  min  =  The    hght    of    the    sun    is 
nur  el-qamar  stronger  than  the  light  of 

the  moon 

21)  buwa  akbar  minnek  bi-  =  He  is  older  than  you  by  two 
shabren  months 


96  THE  NINTH  LESSON 

(22)  el-yom  er-rih  ashadd  bi-  =  To-day  the  wind  is   much 
ketir  minnuh  ems  stronger  than  yesterday 

(23)  el-'abd    el-aswad    huwa  =  The  black  slave  is  his 
'abduh 

(24)  el-bahr  huwa  azraq  =  The  sea  is  blue 

(25)  huwa    min    el-bahr    el-  =  He  is  from  the  Red  Sea 
akhmar 

(26)  'enha  hiye  soda  =  Her  eye  is  black 

(27)  el-waraq  huwa  abyad        =  The  paper  is  white 

(28)  el-waraq  da  huwa  abyad,  =  This  paper  is  white,   is  it 
mush  kida  ?  not  so  ? 

(29)  el-bet  d-akbar  min  da       =  This   house  is  larger   than 

that 

(30)  el-'aguze  di   hiye  faqire  =  This  woman  is  very  poor  and 
ketir  we-'amya  blind 

(31)  el-bint    es-s6da  farhane  =  The     black    girl     is    very 
qawi  cheerful 

(32)  di    ahsan    lokanda    fi  =  Is  this  the  best  hotel  in  your 
beledek  ?  town  ? 

(33)  ente  akbar  qader  =  Your  position  be  greater 

(Apology  for  some  impropriety  in  speech.) 


Chapter  XII 

THE    TENTH   LESSON— THE    VERB,    PERFECT 
TENSE,    REGULAR    FORM 

General  Idea  of  the  Verb 

The  Semitic  verb  is  built  up  from  a  root  which  normally 
consists  of  three  consonants  which  make  a  kind  of  skeleton 
around  and  in  which  the  verb  stem  is  formed.  The 
"  irregular  ",  or  more  properly  the  "  defective  "  verbs,  are 
simply  those  in  which  one  or  other  of  the  root  consonants  is 
a  weak  letter  such  as  w  or  y  which  is  absorbed  by  a  neigh- 
bouring vowel,  the  resultant  modifications  following  clear 
phonetic  principles. 

Tenses 

The  verb  has  three  "  tenses  "  so-called,  but  these  are  not 
quite  "  tenses  "  in  the  European  sense.  These  are  generally 
known  as  (i)  the  Perfect,  (ii)  the  Imperfect,  and  (iii)  the 
Imperative.  The  Imperative  is,  of  course,  the  form  used  for 
command,  the  Perfect  most  often  refers  to  the  past,  but 
not  necessarily  so,  and  the  Imperfect  to  the  present  or  future. 
In  reality  the  time  of  the  sentence  is  expressed  by  means  of 
an  adverb,  or  particle,  just  as  in  English  we  may  say  "  I  go  " 
in  the  present,  and  also  "  I  go  there  to-morrow  ",  using  the 
same  tense  for  future  time. 

The  Perfect  Tense 

In  the  Perfect  of  the  Primary  form  of  the  verb  the  three 
consonants  of  the  root  are  vocalized  bv  two  vowels  inserted 


98  THE  TENTH  LESSON 

between  the  two  pairs  of  consonants  :  the  second  of  these 
may  be  -a-,  -i-,  or  -u- ;  the  first  is  properly  an  obscure  -a-. 
Generally  the  -i-  or  -u-  occurs  in  the  second  place  when  the 
verb  expresses  a  state  not  an  action,  and  most  often  -u-  if  the 
state  is  a  lasting  one,  -i-  if  it  is  merely  temporary.  Thus, 
action  qatal  =  "  kill  "  with  -a-  in  the  second  place,  temporary 
state  ghadib  =  "  be  angry  ",  permanent  state  hasun  =  "  be 
beautiful  ".  There  is,  however,  a  tendency,  especially  in 
Egypt  and  Syria,  to  make  the  first  vowel  assimilate  to  the 
second  and  so  we  get  birid  =  "  be  cold  "  (for  barid),  tilim  = 
"  be  blunt  "  (for  talim),  suqut  =  "  fall  "  (for  saqut),  sughur  = 
"  be  small  "  (for  saghur),  kusul  =  "  be  lazy  "  (for  kasul),  etc. 
In  all  cases  it  will  be  remembered  that  the  first  vowel  was 
originally  -a-  and,  when  one  of  the  "  throat  "  sounds  (h,  ', 
gh,  etc.)  is  next  this,  -a-  is  preserved,  otherwise  it  genera  ly 
weakens  to  -e-  or  -i-  in  the  usual  way.  In  every  case  the  -a- 
sound  is  held  to  be  correct  but  it  sounds  a  little  pedantic  and 
is  not  colloquial  unless  a  **  throat  "  consonant  comes  next. 
The  persons  of  the  tense  are  formed  by  adding  pronominal 
forms  to  the  stem  produced  by  vocalizing  the  root.    Thus : — 

Sing.   1.  darabt  (*darabet)  =  /  heat 

2.  masc.   (Jarabt  (*(jlarabet)  =  thou  didst  heal 

fem.     darabti  =  thou  (fem.)  didst  heat 

3.  masc.   darab  =  he  heat 
fem.     (Jarabet,  darabit     =  she  heat 

Plur.   1.  darabna  =  we  heat 

2.  4arabtu  =  you  heat 

3.  (Jarabu  =  they  heat 


The  forms  marked  (*)  are  characteristic  of  'Iraq,  especially 
when  the  next  word  begins  with  a  consonant.  In  Egypt  and 
Syria  it  is  more  usual  in  such  case  to  add  -i  to  prevent  three 
consonants  coming  together,  as  : — 


I 


THE  TENTH  LESSON  99 

hafazt-i  taqriban  talat  awgoh  =  I  have  learned  nearly  three 

jxi^es 
where  the  verb  hafazt  (sing.  1st)  has  -i  thus  added. 

Exactly  the  same  terminations  are  used  with  verbs  con- 
taining -i-,  or  -U-,  and  those  in  which  both  vowels  are  -i-i- 
and  -u-u-  by  assimilation,  but  in  Sjria  (chiefly)  the 
vernacular  often  loses  an  unaccented  -i-  or  -u-,  thus  in  the 
3rd  fem.  sing,  the  verb  sharibit  =  "  she  has  drunk ", 
commonly  becomes  shiribit  in  Egypt  and  Syria,  and  Syrian 
then  permits  shirbit,  and  in  the  3rd  plur.  shirbu.  Some  other 
dialects  tend  to  leave  out  the  unaccented  short  vowel  when 
it  comes  before  an  accented  syllable,  e.g.  in  Oman  ktebt  = 
ketebet  =  "  I  wrote  ",  etc.,  where  the  vowel  between  the 
k  and  t  is  really  a  very  short  half  vowel.  These  contractions 
form  the  most  characteristic  features  of  the  different  dialects, 
and,  as  they  are  all  symptoms  of  general  tendencies,  the 
learning  of  a  new  dialect  when  one  is  known  is  no  great 
difficulty,  least  so  when  the  parent  form  and  basal  system  is 
understood. 

The  following  summary  of  the  Perfect  terminations  will  be 
found  convenient : — 

Singular  Plural 

masc.  fem. 

1.  -t  (-et)  -na 

2.  -t(-et)  -ti  -tu 

3.  —  -et,  -it  -u 

The  Verb  with  Suffixes 

The  pronominal  suffixes  already  given  (p.  40)  can  be  added 
to  the  verb  and  then  denote  the  object.  The  -i  of  the  1st  sing, 
when  added  to  the  verb  has  a  "  supporting  '  N  inserted  and 
80  becomes  -n-i. 


100  THE  TENTH  LESSON 

Thus  darab  =  he  heat 

darabni  =  he  beat  me 

darabek         =  he  beat  thee,  etc. 
80  darabna         =  we  beat 
darabnak       =  we  beat  thee 
darabnah       =  we  beat  him 
darabnaha     —  we  beat  her,  etc. 
and  darabt  =  /  beat 

darabtek        =  /  beat  thee 
darabtiha      =  I  beat  her 
darabtuhum  =  /  beat  them  (-u-  inserted  by 
assimilation   to   following 

It  will  be  noticed  that  in  such  a  form  as  darabnak  there 
are  three  elements  (1)  verb  darab,  (2)  subject  -na,  and 
(3)  object  -k,  and  this  order  is  the  classical  model  for  the 
verbal  sentence,  although  colloquial  speech  commonly  permits 
the  subject  to  come  before  the  verb  as  in  English,  provided 
of  course  the  subject  is  a  noun  substantive  ;  but  the  subject 
after  the  verb  is  more  strictly  correct.  In  general  summary 
the  arrangement  of  the  sentence  is  : — 

(a)  Verb — Subject — Object :  normal  order, 

(b)  Subject — Verb — Object :  permitted  in  colloquial. 

(c)  Verb — Object — Subject :  necessary  when  the  subject  is 

"  restricted  "  by  the  use  of  ilia  =  "  only,  except  ", 
as  ma  (Jarabshi  Muhammad  ilia  ana  =  "  no  one  beat 
Muhammad  but  only  I  ". 

(d)  Object — Subject — ^\^erb  :     interrogative,    as    ey    ragil 

(Jarabt  ?  =  "  which  man  did  you  beat  ?  " 

The  Negative  Veeb 

The  verb  is  made  negative  by  ma  ('Iraq  mu)  before  it,  and 
colloquial  speech  commonly  adds  -sh  (-shi),  thus  : — 


I 


THE  TENTH  LESSON  101 

ma  ^arabtish.    —  I  did  not  heat 
ma  darabtish    =  thou  didst  not  beat 
ma  darabsh      =  he  did  not  beat 
Dia  darabetsb   =  she  did  not  beat 
ma  darabnash  =  we  did  not  beat 
ma  darabtush  =  you  did  not  beat 
ma  darabusb    =  they  did  not  beat 

The  -i-  is  inserted  when  three  consonants  come  together 
and  it  is  permissible  to  add  -i  after  -sh  when  it  is  preceded  by 
a  consonant  and  the  next  word  begins  with  a  consonant, 
thus  bringing  three  consonants  into  contact. 

The  negative  can  be  added  after  the  suffix  has  been  attached, 
as  ma  ^arabtuhsh  =  "  I  have  not  beaten  him  ". 

The  Interrogative  Verb 

A  verb  sentence  in  the  interrogative  may  be  so  simply  by 
the  tone  in  which  it  is  spoken,  or  -sh  (-shi)  may  be  added  to 
the  verb,  as  darabnash  =  "  did  we  beat  ?  ",  (jlarabtish  = 
"  didst  thou  beat  ?  ",  etc. 

Another  form  of  interrogative  is  produced  by  using  ya'ni, 
thus  ya'ni  kharagu  'aleh  ?  =  "  did  they  rebel  against  him  ?  " 

Note  ox  the  Uses  of  the  Persons 

The  first,  second,  or  third  person  of  the  verb  must  be 
used  according  to  the  person  of  the  subject :  if  the  subject  is 
feminine  singular  or  a  broken  plural  the  3rd  fem.  singular 
should  be  used.  When  the  nominative  does  not  follow  after 
the  verb  the  verb  must  be  put  in  the  plural  with  a  plural 
subject  but  if  the  subject  is  definitely  expressed  and  follows 
the  verb  it  is  optional  whether  the  verb  is  in  the  plural  or 
singular. 


102 


THE  TENTH  LESSON 


WORD    LIST 


(i)  Verbs 
(The  vowels  in  brackets  denote  thofte 

required  in  the  imperfect.) 

'amal    (a)  =  do 

dakhel  (u)  =  enter 

darab    (a)  =  strike 

fahim    (a)  =  understand 

hafaz     (a)  =  learn  by  heart 

ha^al     (u)  =  happen 

keteb    (u)  =  write 

khalig    (u)  =  finish 

kharag  (u)  =  </o  out 

misik    (u,  i)  =  seize 

nizil      (i)  =  go  down 

qa'ad    (u)  =  sit 

raga'     (i)  =  return 

sami'    (a)  =  hear 

shirib    (a)  =  drink 
shirib  dukhkhan   =  smoke 

?araf     (i)  =  dismiss,  waste 

talab     (u)  =  seek 

tala'      (u)  =  rise  {sun)  go  up 


'askari 
'inab 
karm 
mahatta 


(ii)  Nouns 

=  soldier 

=  grapes 

=  vine,  vineyard 

=  railway  station 


niektub  (mekatib)  =  letter 

qalam  =  pen 

9abah  =  morning 

saroq  =  thief 

9ed  =  hunting,  fishing 

teskeri  =  ticket 

wagh  (awgoh)  =  page 

(iii)  Particles  and  Nouns   used   as 

particles 
amam  =  before,         in 

presence  of 
dilwaqt  =  now,  at  once 

emta  =  when 

fe-  =  and,  and  so 

lamma  =  when 

qabl  =  before 

qabl  ma  =  before  that  .  .  . 

taqriban  =  nearly 


EXERCISE 


(1)  kharag  dilwaqt 

(2)  ya  walad,  esh  'amalt  ? — 
hafazti  talat  awgoh  taqri- 
ban 

(3)  tala'et  esh-shems 

(4)  hasal  hasal 

(5)  ketebt  bi-qalam 

(6)  nizil  min  'ala  gemel 

(7)  nizilt  li-karm  el-'inab 

(8)  ma  da  'amalti  es-sabah  da, 
ya    bint  ? — ^ana    katebt 


He  has  just  gone  out 

Boy,  what  have  you  done  ? — 

I  have  learned  nearly  three 

pages  by  heart 
The  sun  has  risen  (sun  fern.) 
It  certainly  happened 
I  wrote  with  a  pen 
He  dismounted  from  a  camel 
I  went  down  the  vineyard 
What  have  you  done  this 

morning,  girl  ? — I  wrote  a 

letter 


THE  TENTH  LESSON  103 

9)  ente  qa'edte  kam  yom  fi  =  How  long  did  you  stay  in 
Misr  ?— qa'edt  arb'a  yom  Cairo  ?— I  stayed  four  days 

10)  nizilt  ila  1-mahatta  we-  =  I  went  down  to  the  station 
telebte  teskari  and  asked  for  a  ticket 

11)  sami'u  we-lakin  ma         =  They    heard    but    did    not 
fahimiisli  understand 

12)  ma  semi'nash  'annuh       =  We  have  heard  nothing  about 

him 

13)  telebtuna  n-nehar  da  ?—  =  Have  you  been  looking  for  us 
la,  ma  telebnakumsh  to-day  ?— No,  we  have  not 

been  looking  for  you 

14)  er-ragil  misikni  min  idu  =  The  man  seized  me  with  his 

hand 

15)  entu  qa'edtu  fen  ?  =  Where  are  you  staying  ? 

16)  fahimtush  entu  kelami  ?    =  Do  you  understand  what  I 

said? 

17)  aiwa,  ehna  (-bna)  fahim-  =Yes,  we  understand 
nah 

18)  darabtesh  kbaddami  ?—  =  Did  you  strike  my  servant? 
la,  ma  (Jarabtesb  khaddamek         —No,  I  did  not  strike  your 

servant 

19)  darabkum  el-'askari  ?—  =  Did  the  soldier  strike  you  ? 
ya'ni  (Jarabek  el-'askari  ?  — Did   the   soldier   strike 

thee? 

20)  emta  raga'te  min  es-sed  ?  =When  did  you  come  back 
— raga'te  sa'atcn  from   hunting  ? — I    came 

back  at  two  o'clock 

21)  esh  talab  ?— ma  fahimtisb  =  What  was  he  looking  for  ? — 
esli  talab  I  do  not  know  what  he  was 

looking  for 

22)  fen  el-gawab  elli  ibnek  =  Where  is  the  letter  your  son 
ketebtub  ?  wrote  ? 


104  THE  TENTH  LESSON 

(23)  telebt   min   ente  ? — ana  =  Who  were  you  looking  for  ? 
telebt  el-kliawage  Mahmud      — I    was    looking    for    BIr. 

Mahmud 

(24)  min  darab  el-walad  es-  =  Who  beat  the  Utile  boy  ? 
saghir  ? 

(25)  min  en  kharagt  ?  =  Where   did   you   come   out 

from? 

(26)  wabid  Rumi  nizil  min  el-  =  A  Greek  went  down  from 
Quds  ila  Jafa  Jerusalem  to  Jaffa 

(27)  fi  tani  yom  kharag.  =  The  next  day  he  went  off 

(28)  lamma  khalis  re-kbarag     =  When  he   had  finished  he 

went  out 

(29)  fulan  hadir  amam  el-qadi  =  So  and  so  appeared  before 

the  judge 

(30)  min  qable  sikin  fi  dari        =  Formerly    he   lived   in    my 

house 

(31)  es-saraq  dakhel  fi  1-lel  fi  =  The  thief  entered  by  night 
dar  el-khubbaz  into  the  baker's  house 

(32)  nefed  es-sabm  we-1-hamdu  =  The  arrow  has  passed  and 
li-llah  basal  kber  'ala  kede  the    praise    of    God    has 

prevailed  beyond  that  of 
this  person 

(Some  worda  in  praise  of  a  person  or  created  thing  have  been  uttered 
and  all  present  fear  their  blighting  effect  until  some  passing  accident  has 
befallen  the  person  or  thing  praised  or  some  words  have  been  uttered  which 
have  transferred  the  praise  from  the  creature  to  the  Creator,  then  the 
dreaded  omen  is  averted,  "  the  arrow  has  passed  .  .  .") 


Chapter  XHI 

THE  ELE\'ENTH  LESSON— THE  BH^EEFECT  TENSE 
OF    THE    REGULAR    VE^B 

The  Form  of  the  Imperfect 

The  Imperfect  has  the  same  three  consonants  as  the  Perfect, 
but  only  one  vowel  is  inserted  and  this  is  placed  between  the 
last  two  consonants,  the  first  consonant  being  vocalised  by 
the  help  of  the  prefix  which  denotes  the  person.  In  the 
2nd  fem.  sing,  and  in  the  2nd-3rd  plural  a  suffix  is  added 
also.  The  inserted  vowel  may  be  -a-  (-0-),  -i-,  or  -u-,  and  that 
vowel  is  not  always  the  same  in  the  difierent  dialects :  this 
can  only  be  learned  from  the  dictionary.  In  the  case  of  the 
verb  4-r-b  =  "  beat "  the  inserted  vowel  is  -a-,  thus  -^rab, 
and  the  tense  is  then  formed  as  follows  : — 


Singular. 

1. 

a^rab 

=  Ib€a 

2. 

masc. 

ti(Jrab 

=  thou  beatest 

fem. 

tidrabi 

=  thmi  (fem.)  beatest 

3. 

masc. 

yidrab 

=  he  heats 

fem. 

tidrab 

=  she  heats 

Plural. 

1. 

nidrab 

=  ic€  beat 

2.  tidrabu  =  you  heat 

3.  pdrabu  =  they  heat 

The  same  prefixes  and  sufl&xes  are  used  when  the  vowel 
8t€m  has  -u-  or  -i-,  as  askim  =  "  I  dwell ",  tiskun  =  "  thou 
dweUest  ",  etc.,  aktib  =  "  I  write  ",  tiktib  =  "  thou  writest  ", 
etc.  We  have  given  the  prefixes  above  with  vowel  -i-,  except 
in  the  Ist  sing.,  thus  ti-,  yi-,  ni- :  but  this  is  the  "  obscure  " 


106  THE    ELEVENTH    LESSON 

vowel  (originally  -a-)  and  may  sometimes  sound  as  -e-^  some- 
times as  -a-,  this  last  usually  before  a  "  throat "  sound 
such  as  h,  ',  gh,  etc.  ;  in  Egypt  it  often  happens  that  the 
vowel  of  the  prefix  is  modified  to  agree  with  the  vowel  of  the 
stem  so  that  yiskut  "  he  is  silent "  becomes  yuskut,  etc. 
In  'Iraq,  on  the  other  hand,  the  prefix  more  often  has  -a-, 
especially  when  the  following  consonant  is  emphatic,  thus 
tadrab,  yadrab,  etc.,  for  tidrab,  yidrab.  In  Egypt  one  may 
hear  both  ya'rif  and  yi'rif  "  he  knows  ".  The  accent  given 
above  is  true  for  Syria,  but  in  Egypt  it  is  carried  forward  when 
there  is  a  suffix,  so  that  we  get  tidrabi,  tidrabu,  yidrabu; 
in  'Iraq  it  is  still  further  carried  forward  when  there  is  a  suffix, 
and  so  we  get  tadrabi,  tadrabu,  yadrabu. 

Summary 

The  following  summary  shows  the  Imperfect  formatives 
in  general : — 

Singular.  Plural. 

masc.  fern. 

1.  a—  a—  ni— 

2.  ti~  ti~i  ti~u 

3.  yi—  ti~  yi--u 

Prefixed  bi-,  be- 

The  modern  colloquial  of  Egypt  and  Syria  often  prefixes 
the  syllable  be-,  bi-  (from  badd  =  "  remove ",  whence 
colloquial  baddi  =  "  I  want  to  .  .  .  ").  With  a-  this  makes 
ba-,  with  yi-  it  makes  bi-,  otherwise  it  is  prefixed  to  the 
personal  formative.     Thus  : — 

badrab       =  /  beat 
betidrab    =  thou  beatest 
beti^rabi  =  thou  (fem.)  beatest 


THE    ELEVENTH    LESSON  107 

bidrab       =  he  heats 
betidrab    =  she  heats 
benidiab   =  we  heat 
betidrabu  =  you  heat 
bidrabu     =  they  heat 

But  sometimes  beyidrab(u)  may  be  heard  for  bidrab(u) : 
when  the  first  vowel  is  -u-  we  do  not  of  course  get  contraction 
in  the  3rd  masc,  thus  in  Egjrptian  with  yuskum  "dwell" 
for  yiskun  we  get  beyuskum  (not  biskun),  etc.  It  will  be 
understood  that  the  whole  formation  is  a  vulgarism  and 
avoided  in  formal  speech  and  in  converse  with  the  educated. 
Finally  the  b-  sometimes  becomes  m-  before  n-  and  so  we  have 
menidrab  "  we  beat  "  for  benidrab,  menuskun  "  we  dwell " 
for  benuskum  (=  beniskun),  etc. 

Thus  :  talet  wahde  bisbogh  daqno  u-shawarbo  =  "  third 
item,  he  dyes  his  beard  and  moustaches  "  (Malinjoud  :  Textes 
en  dialecte  de  Damas  in  J.  Asiat.  (1924),  p.  271).  This  is  a 
specimen  of  the  speech  of  an  illiterative  native  of  Damascus, 
note  the  use  of  u-  "  and  "  for  we-. 

The  Imperfect  with  Suffixes 

The  Imperfect  takes  the  suffixes  in  the  same  way  as  the 
Perfect,  thus  yetlub  or  yitlub  (Eg.  yutlub)  "  he  seeks ", 
yitlubni  =  "  he  seeks  me  ",  ptlubna  =  "  he  seeks  us  ", 
tetlub  =  "  she  seeks  ",  tetlubni  =  "  she  seeks  me  ",  tetlubek 
=  "  she  seeks  thee  ",  tetlubha  =  "  she  seeks  her  ",  tetlubhum 
=  "  she  seeks  them  ",  yitlubu  =  "  they  seek  ",  yitlubuni  = 
"  they  seek  me  ",  yitlubukun  =  "  they  seek  you  ",  etc. 

The  Interrogative  axd  Negative 

The  Interrogative  and  Negative  are  formed  with  the  same 
additions  as  in  the  perfect :  adrabsh  =  "  do  I  beat  ?  " 
tidrabsh  =  "  dost  thou  beat  ?  "  etc. ;  negative  ma  adrabsh  = 


108  THE    ELEVENTH    LESSON 

"  I  do  not  beat  ",  ma  tidrabsh  =  "  thou  dost  not  beat ", 
ma  yidrabsb  =  "  he  does  not  beat ",  always  allowing  the 
addition  of  -i  before  a  consonant  to  prevent  three  consonants 
in  succession  :  so  colloquial  ma  bidrabsh,  ma  betidrabsh,  etc., 
and  with  the  suffixes  ma  tidrabnish,  ma  yic^rabush,  ma 
tidrabuhash,  etc. 

Principal  and  Subordinate  Verbs 

The  subordinate  verb  can  follow  the  principal  verb  in 
Arabic  and  have  its  proper  person  and  tense.  Thus  the 
English  "  I  am  able  to  beat  "  =  "I  am  able  (that)  I  beat  "  = 
aqdar  adrab  ;  there  is  no  need  to  express  the  "  to  "  or  "  that  " 
of  English,  but  simply  to  render  the  two  verbs  in  the  same 
person,  in  this  case  in  the  1st  sing.  So  "  he  is  not  able  to  write  " 
=  ma  yeqdarsh  yektub  ("he  is  not  able  he  writes "),  etc. 

Imperfect  Modified  to  Express  the  Present 

Modern  colloquial  speech  introduces  'ammal  before  the 
imperfect  to  give  the  sense  of  the  present,  the  'ammal 
becoming  feminine  'ammale*,  or  plural  'ammalin  where 
necessary  to  agree  with  the  agent.  Thus,  ana  'ammal 
aktub  —  "1  am  writing  ",  ente  'ammal  tektub  =  "  thou  art 
writing  ",  hiya  'ammale  tektub  =  "  she  is  writing  ",  hum 
'ammal  in  yektub  =  "  they  are  writing  ".  It  is  permissible 
to  add  the  be-  as  well,  thus  ente  'ammal  betektub,  etc.  This 
is  a  somewhat  clumsy  way  of  expressing  the  present,  though 
in  common  use  ;  a  much  simpler  method  is  to  use  the  active 
participle  as  in  ana  katib  =  "  I  am  writing  ". 

Imperfect  Modified  to  Express  the  Future 

There  are  several  ways  employed  in  modern  colloquial  to 
express  the  future  : — 


THE    ELEVTENTH    I^SSON 


109 


(i)  The  particle  bidd  with  the  suffixed  pronoun  may  be 
placed  before  the  imperfect,  thus  ente  biddek  tergi'  =  "  thou 
wilt  return ",  huwa  bidduh  yergi'  =  "  he  will  return ", 
ehna  biddina  nergi'  =  "  we  will  return  ",  etc. 

(ii)  The  participle  mashi  ( =  "  walking  "),  fem.  mashiye*, 
plural  mashiyin,  may  be  added  before  the  imperfect,  thus 
esh  mashi  te'mal  ?  =  "  what  are  you  going  to  do  ?  "  hiye 
mashiye  tektub  =  "  she  is  going  to  write  ",  entu  mashiyin 
tektubu  =  "  you  are  going  to  write  ",  etc. 

(iii)  The  participle  rayih,  fem.  rayihe*,  plur.  rayihin 
meaning  "  going  "  can  be  used  in  a  similar  way,  thus  ana 
rayih  adrab  =  "  I  am  going  to  beat ",  ente  rayih  tektub  = 
"  thou  art  going  to  write  ",  etc. 

Mashi  is  the  participle  of  a  verb  with  weak  final  (cf.  p.  149 
below)  and  rayih  of  one  with  a  weak  medial  (cf.  p.  138 
below). 

Note  on  the  Imperfect 

It  must  be  carefully  noted  that  the  a-  of  the  1st  person 
singular  is  a  fixed  personal  prefix  which  does  not  modify  ; 
in  the  other  persons  the  vowel  may  sound  -i-,  -e-,  or  -a-,  as 
ti-,  te-,  ta-,  etc.,  according  to  dialect,  but  -a-  is  generally  (and 
should  be  always)  before  a  "  throat  "  letter,  whilst  it  is  common 
(especially  in  Egypt)  to  assimilate  before  stem  vowel  -u-, 
thus  yuskut  (also  yiskut),  ya'raf  (rarer  yi'raf),  etc. 


WORD 

LIST 

Verba 

•arif 
feeder 
feaaab 
kasar 

(i) 
(a) 
(u) 
(a) 

—  know 
=  be  present 
=  reckon 
=  break 

lazim 
naqa?    (a) 
qadar   (i) 
sa'al      (a) 

=  be  obliged 
=  reduce 
=  be  able,  can 
=  oak  (qtiestion 

no 


THE   ELEVENTH   LESSON 


Other  words 

'ala  ahan, 

'ashan 

=  because ;      'ala 

in 

=  that 

shan   ey  ?  = 

lezum 

=  necessity 

why  ? 

sabn  (sutun) 

=  plate 

(Egypt) 

sikka 

=  road ;  sikket  el- 

ba'id 

=  far  away,  remote 

hadid= mi^ 

foq 

=  above 

way    {lit. 

fulan 

=  so  and  so  ;   el- 

chemin  de  fer) 

khawage  fulan 

tebeqa 

—  apartment,   flat 

=Mr.  N. 

{in  a  house) 

ghuriib 

—  setting    {of   the 

talg 

=  snow 

sun) 

zabit 

=  officer 

tiisab 

—  reckoning,    bill, 
account 

EXERCISE 

(1)    titlub    min    ente  ?— ana  =  Who 

are  you  looking  for  ? — 

atlub 

el-khawage    Ahmed,          I 

am 

looking    for    Mr. 

yeskun  fen 

2 

Ahmed. 

Where  does  he 

(2)  huwa  ynskum  fi  shari'a 
1-Madebegh 

(3)  ma  a'rifshi  fen  yeskun 

(4)  yinzil  talg 

(5)  nirgi'  fi  s-sikka  di  ? 

(6)  emta  tirgi'u  min  es-sed  ? 
— ^nergi'  ba'd  ghurub  esh- 
Bhems 

(7)  ez-zabit  da  yuskun  fen  ? — 
huwa  yuskun  fi  t-tebeqa  illi 
foq  et-tebeqa  illi  askun 
fih 

(8)  ta'rif  el-khawage  (fulan)  ? 
— ^a'rifuh  haqq  el-ma'rifa. — 
yuskun  fen  ? — ^yuskun  fi 
l-Khunmfish. — ^huwa  ba'id 


live? 
He  hves  in  Madebegh  Street 

I  do  not  know  where  he  lives 

Snow  is  falling 

Shall  we   come   back   this 

way? 
When  will  you  return  from 

hunting?  —  We       shall 

return  after  sunset 
Where  does  the  officer  Uve  ? 

— ^He  hves  in  the  flat  above 

mine 

Do  you  know  Mr.  N.  ? — I 
know  him  very  well  indeed. 
— Where  does  he  live? — 
He  lives  in  the  Khurunfish. 


THE    ELEVENTH    LESSON  111 

min    hena  ? — huwa    mush  — Is  that  far  from  here  ? — 

aktar  min  wahid  mil  Not  more  than  a  mile 

(9)  bituskun  fen  ? — baskun  fi  =  Where  do  you  hve  ? — I  live 
wast  el-medine  in  the  middle  of  the  city 

(10)  ma  aqdirsh  asma'  =  I  cannot  hear 

(11)  bete'rifuhsh  ?  =  Do  you  know  him  ? 

(12)  esh  el-kalam  da,  tehsubni  =  What  is  that  statement  ? — 
gahil  bi-kull  shayy  (bage)  ?         Do  you  suppose  that  I  am 

altogether  an  idiot? 

(13)  ma  a'rifshe  wahid  bi-l-ism  =  I  do  not  know  anyone  of  that 
da  name 

(14)  esh      te'mal  ?— aktub  =  What  are  you  doing  ? — I  am 
gawab  writing  a  letter 

(15)  beteskrabsbi  qabwe  ?         =  WiU  you  drink  some  coffee  ? 

(16)  eshente'ammalbete'mal  ?  =What  are  you  doing? — 
— ^ana  *ammal  baktub  ba'd  I  am  writing  some  letters 
mekatib 

(17)teqdirtefliamel-kitabda  ?  =  Can    you    understand    that 
la    ma    aqdirsh    afhamuh  book? — No,      I      cannot 

'alishan  huwa  sa'ab  ketir  understand  it  because  it 

is  too  difficult 

(18)  yeqdir  yehsub  el-hisab  da  ?  =Can  he  reckon  that  account  ? 
— fi     fikri     ma     yeqdirsh  — ^I  tb'Tilr  he  cannot 
yehsubuh 

(19)  esh  bitlub  ?— ma  a'rifsh  =  What  is  she  looking  for  ?— 
esh  bitlub  I  do  not  know  what  she  is 

looking  for 

(20)  betes 'al  'an  ey  ?  =  What    are    you    inquiring 

about  ? 

(21)  teqdirsh  tehdar  ente  ?       =  Can  you  be  ready  ? 

(22)  'alishan  ey  te'mel  kida  ?    =  Why  is  she  acting  like  that  ? 
— ma  a'rifsh  — I  do  not  know 

(23)  haqq  'alek  in  te'mal  kida  =  It  is  necessary  for  you  to  do  so 


112  THE   ELEVENTH   LESSON 

(24)  ma  yelzim  an  te'mal  da    =  It  is  not  necessary  for  you 

to  do  that 

(25)  ma  leksh  lezum  tes'aluli  =  You  have  no  need  to  ask  him 

(26)  we-ba'd  yomen  kharag     ==  And  after  two  days  he  went 

away 

(27)  el-moya  kuUe  yom  betin-  =  The  water  gets  less  every  day 
qas 

(28)  ana    lazamtek    leinnek  =  I  charge  you  to  remain  here 
tefdal  hena 

(29)  ti'rif  tiktub  bi-l-'arabi  ?    =  Can  you  write  Arabic  ? 

(30)  ma  a'rifsh  el-qiraye  fadlan  =  I   cannot   read,    much   less 
*an  el-kitabe  write 


I 


I 


Chapter  XIV 

THE   T\^^LFTH   LESSON— THE   IMPERATIVE,   THE 
PARTICIPLES,   THE   PASSIVE 

(a)  The  Imperative  :    Form 

The  Imperative  uses  the  same  stem  as  the  Imperfect,  has 
the  same  suffixes,  but  does  not  employ  the  personal  prefixes. 
When  the  stem  begins  vrith  a  consonant  which  is  followed 
immediately  by  a  vowel  this  can  be  pronounced  without 
trouble,  and  this,  as  we  shall  see  later  (cf.  p.  124  below), 
actually  is  the  case  with  verbs  whose  roots  have  a  weak 
consonant  such  as  w  or  y  as  their  second  radical.  In 
the  ordinary  three  consonant  verbs,  however,  this  gives  a 
group  of  two  consonants  at  the  beginning,  e.g.  drab  "  strike  ", 
which  as  it  stands  cannot  be  pronounced.  Ordinarily, 
therefore,  a  vowel  is  prefixed  and  this  vowel  is  i-,  thus  idrab 
"  strike  ",  etc.,  but  when  the  vowel  in  the  stem  is  -u-  this 
prefixed  vowel  assimilates  to  it  and  so  we  get  urqud  "  lie 
down  "  (also  irqud).  In  Syrian  dialect  we  often  find  a  very 
short  inserted  vowel  (half-vowel)  instead  of  the  prefixed, 
thus  sherab  (sh'rab)  "  drink "  for  ishrab,  mesik  (m'sik) 
"  seize  "  for  imsik,  etc.  This  vowel,  whether  prefixed  or 
inserted,  has  no  bearing  upon  the  meaning  and  is  merely 
a  phonetic  addition  to  enable  the  initial  group  of  consonants 
to  be  pronounced.  The  imperfect-imperative  stem  thus 
vocalised  expresses  the  command  given  in  the  masculine 
singular,  i.e.  to  one  man,  addressed  to  a  woman  the  termina- 
tion -i  is  added,  and  to  more  than  one  person  the  plural 
ending  -u. 


114  THE   TWELFTH   LESSON 

Thus  we  get  the  Imperative  system  : — 

Singular  masc.    idrab  =  heat 

fern.      idrabi 
Plural  idrabu 

Imperative  with  suffixes. 

The  imperative  may  take  the  same  suffixes  as  the  perfect 
and  imperfect,  provided  the  sense  of  the  verb  allows  a  direct 
object,  thus  idrabuh  =  "  beat  him  ",  irsaluni  =  "  do  you  (pi.) 
send  me  ",  etc. 

(6)   The  Imperative  :    Use 

The  imperative  expresses  the  direct  command,  thus  : — 

uskut  =  Be  silent 

ighsil  yedek  we-wishshek         =  Wash  your  hands  and  face 

infah  el-hammal  =  Call  for  the  porter 

ya  sayis,  ighsil  hisani  =  Groom,  wash  my  horse 

ya  walad,  inzil  ila  1-bustan       =  Boy,  go  down  to  the  garden 

ya  bint,  irgi'i  =  Girl,  go  hack 

irsalu  wiladkum  ila  l-medrese  =  Send  your  children  to  the 

school 
ya  bint,  uqfuli  1-bab  =  Girl,  shut  the  door 

ighsilu  ayadikum  =  Wash  your  hands 

idkhul,  ya  'ammi  =  Come  in,  my  uncle 

Sometimes  the  command  is  expressed  by  the  imperfect  and 
not  by  the  imperative.     Thus  : — 

(i)  In  Arabic,  as  in  all  the  Semitic  languages,  the  imperative  | 
may  not  be  used  in  the  negative,  but  the  imperfect  must  be 
employed  in  its  place,  thus  for  "  do  not  beat  him  "  we  must 
say  ma  tidrabuhsh.    Always  the  Semitic  languages  insist  on* 
"  thou  shalt  not  steal  ",  not  "  do  not  steal  ".     So  : — 


THE   TWELFTH   LESSON  115 

ya  walad,  ma  tesraqsh  =  Boy,  do  not  steal 

ma  tis'alsh  =  Do  not  ask 

ma  tedrab  el-kelb  dik  =  Do  not  beat  that  dog 

ma  teshrab  min  el-moya  da  =  Do  not  drink  of  this  uater 

(ii)  Out  of  politeness  the  imperfect  may  be  substituted  for 
the  imperative,  as — 

tek  tub  gawab  li  =  Write  me  a  letter 

tetla  foq,  min  fadJek  =  Please  go  up  above 

(iii)  After  ma  =  "  but  "  it  is  necessary  to  substitute  the 
imperfect  for  the  imperative,  thus — 

ma  teshrab  dukhkhan,  min  fadlek  —  But  please  smoke 

(iv)  Usually  the  imperfect  is  used  in  commands  with 
ya  .  .  .  ya  .  .  .  =  "  either  ...  or  ...  ",  as — 

ya  teq'ud  ya  tekhrug        —  Either  sit  down  or  go  out 

ya  teskut  ya  tesduq  =  Either  be  silent  or  speak  the  truth 

(v)  After  the  (pleonastic)  imperative  of  baqa,  i.e.  sing, 
masc.  ibqa,  fern,  ibqi,  plur.  ibqu,  meaning  "  be,  continue  ", 
the  imperfect  is  used  as  the  imperative  is  abeady  expressed 
by  ibqa,  etc.     So — 

ibqa  tergi'  halan  =  Return  shortly 

ibqu  tesduqu  =  Speak  the  truth 

But  here  it  is  also  possible  to  use  the  baqa  in  the  imperfect,  as 

tibqa  tesaUim  li  'ala  abuk  =  Pray  remember  me  to  your  father 
tibqu  tefaddal  =  Please  sit  down 

(vi)  The  imperative  has  only  the  second  person  as  this 
alone  can  be  employed  in  a  direct  command.  An  indirect 
command  or  jussive  in  the  first  or  third  person  necessarily 
uses  the  imperfect,  thus  : — 


116  THE   TWELFTH   LESSON 

argi'  =  Let  me  turn  hack 

ma  yergi'sh  =  Let  him  not  turn  hack 

nekhrug  min  el-bet  =  Let  us  go  out  of  the  hou^e 

Allah  ma  yihrimnash  wiladna  =  May  God  not  bereave  us  of 

our  children 
Thus  commands  sometimes  find  expression  as  imperatives, 
sometimes  as  imperfects.  But  it  is  also  possible  to  use  nouns 
for  command  as  in  English  where  "  silence  "  means  "  be 
silent  ".  Arabic  grammarians  regard  all  words  of  command 
which  cannot  receive  the  feminine  -i  or  plural  -u  as  nouns 
and  amongst  these  include  the  cries  made  in  driving  animals, 
etc.  Other  commands  again  assume  a  verb  which  is  implied 
but  not  expressed,  as  andek  =  "  with  thee  ",  meaning  "  halt ", 
and  ala  mahlekum  —  "  at  your  leisure ",  meaning  "  (go) 
more  slowly  ". 


ta'ala                 =  come 

hat                     =  give  (me) 

yalla                   =  go  quickly 

mashi                 =  go  quickly  (imperat.  of  mashi  = 

=  walk) 

'ala  mahlekum  =  go  slowly 

osbur                  =  stop 

'andek  (-kum)   =  halt 

waqqif                =  stop 

(c)   The  Active  Participle  :   Form 

The  active  participle  has    the    form  singular  masculine  , 
qatil,  fern,   qatile,  plural   qatilin.     Properly  it  is  a  noun  ^ 
(adjective)  and  all  we  have  said  about  the  use  of  the  noun 
in  sentences  applies  here.     Thus  : — 

huwa  sakin  fen  ?  —  Where  is  he  living  ? 
hiye  sakine  fen  ?  =  Where  is  she  living  ? 
hum  gaUsin  fen  ?  —  Where  are  tJiey  staying  ? 


THE   TTNTILFTH   LESSON  117 

(d)  Active  Participle  :   Use 

The  active  participle  is  used  as  equivalent  to  the  present 
tense,  but  as  the  participle  is  a  noun  the  sentence  in  which  it 
occurs  without  a  verb  is  void  of  time  sense  and  is  merely 
descriptive,  though  coUoquial  usage  assumes  a  present  time. 
Thus:— 

ana  katib  —  I  am  icriiing 

When  a  verb  is  used  the  participle  belongs  to  the  same  time 
as  the  verb,  thus  using  kan  —  "  he  was  ". 

kan  gahs  ma'uh  we-hadani  —  He  uxts  sitting  vyith  him  and  they 
wahid  'aivan  brought  to  him  a  certain  sick 

person 

As  the  participle  is  a  noun  adjective  it  is  descriptive  of  the 
accompanying  or  implied  substantive  and  not  (as  may  be 
the  case  in  English)  of  the  circumstances  in  which  the  action 
of  the  verb  takes  place,  thus  "  having  closed  the  door  I  went 
away  "  must  be  "  after  I  had  closed  the  door  I  went  away  "  = 
ba'd  ma  qafalt  el-bab  kharaget ;  "  knowing  that  it  was  raining 
I  did  not  go  out "  becomes  "  because  I  knew  it  was  raining 
I  did  not  go  out "  =  madam  'irift  inn  nizil  matar  ma 
kharagetsh. 

But  it  may  be  used  to  describe  the  agent  or  object  at  the 
time  of  the  verb's  action,  as — 

qa'adet  sharib  =  I  sat  drinking 

ana  dakhil  shuftuh  =  /  saw  him  as  /  was  going  out 

ana  shuftuh  dakhil  =  /  saw  him  going  out 

This  is  especially  the  case  when  the  description  is  introduced 
as  a  kind  of  parenthesis  by  means  of  we-,  thus  : — 

wahid  nadahna  we-hna  mashiyin  =  .-1  certain  man  called  to 
fi  sh-shari*  (we-hna  =  we-ehna)       us,  and  we  were  walk- 
ing in  the  street 


118  THE   TWELFTH  LESSON 

(e)  The  Passive  Participle  :    Form 

The  passive  participle  has  the  form  mektub  (maktub) 
with  fern,  -e*,  plural  -in. 

{/)  Passive  Participle  :    Use 

The  passive  participle  describes  a  condition  already  made 
effective  and  so  not  contemporary  with  the  action  of  the 
verb,  e.g.  : — 

wagadtuh  maqtul   =  I  found  him  {already)  killed 
qataluh  el-magruh  =  They  killed  him  who  had  been  wounded 
It  is  not  possible  to  use  the  passive  participle  in  such  as 
"  I  saw  the  man  being  beaten  ",  we  must  say  "  I  saw  the 
man,  they  were  beating  him  "  =  shuft  er-ragil  yedrabuh. 

(g)  The  Passive  Voice 

(i)  Some  verbs  are  quasi-passive,  i.e.  verbs  of  state  con- 
veying a  sense  equivalent  to  a  passive,  thus  tilif  —  "  perish  " 
(talaf  -=  "  destroy  "),  sikin  =  "  be  inhabited  "  (sakan  = 
"  inhabit  "),  fiqir  —  "  become  poor  "  (faqar  —  "  be  poor  "), 
niqis,  nuqus  —  "  be  diminished  ",  etc. 

(ii)  Derived  forms  in  t-  (really  reflexive)  often  convey 
a  passive  sense  (on  these  verbs  see  p.  125  below). 

(iii)  Very  often  the  third  person  plural  is  used  where  we 
should  employ  the  passive,  thus  "it  is  said  "  is  rendered 
"  they  say  ",  etc. 

(iv)  The  passive  participle  is  the  one  passive  form  which 
admits  of  free  use  as  conveying  a  passive  sense,  thus  : — 

mektub  =  It  is  written  (i.e.  it  is  God's  decree,  reply  to  a 
beggar  who  shows  deformities  with  the 
intention  of  exciting  compassion). 


I 

1 


THE    TWELFTH  LESSON  119 

When  a  verb  is  transferred  from  the  active  to  the  passive 
the  logical  object  becomes  the  new  (formal)  agent,  thus  "  he 
beat  the  boy  "  becomes  "  the  boy  was  beaten  "  :  the  original 
agent  may  then  sometimes  be  expressed  by  the  help  of  the 
preposition  min  —  "  by  ",  e.g.  "  the  man  beat  the  boy  "  = 
"  the  boy  was  beaten  by  the  man  ",  but  this  is  unpleasing 
in  Arabic  and  so  unusual  that  it  is  not  easily  understood,  so 
that  when  the  true  agent  is  expressed  it  is  strongly  preferable 
to  use  the  active ;  thus  to  translate  "  the  boy  was  beaten  by 
the  man  "  say  "  the  boy  was  beaten,  the  man  beat  him  "  = 
el-walad  medrub  darabuh  er-ragil ;  or  better  still  transfer 
the  whole  to  the  active  and  say  simply  "  the  man  beat  the 
boy  "  =  er-ragil  darab  el-walad. 

WORD    LIST 


Verbs 

Other  words 

fatab 

(a) 

=  open 

dat  el-yom 

=  one  day 

qafal 

(u) 

=  shut 

kursi 

=  chair 

rasal 

(i) 

=  seTid 

qarib 

=  near 

heya 

=  up 

sayis 

=  groom 

seket 

(u) 

=  be  silent 

EXE 

eha'ir 
ahabbak 

RCISE 

=  poet 
=  xcindow 

(1)  ya  walad,  ma  tedrabsh  el-  =  Boy,  do  not  beat  your  donkey 
himar  beta'ek 

(2)  ya  bint,  ma  teskar  es-sahn  =  Girl,  do  not  break  this  plate 
da 

(3)  ya  bint,  uskuti  =  Girl,  be  silent 

(4)  uqful  el-bab,  ya  walad         =  Boy,  shut  the  door 

(5)  iftah    esh-shubbak,     ya  =  Boy,  open  the  window 
walad 

(6)  ente  sakin  fen  ?  =  Where  do  you  live  ? 


120  THE   TWELFTH   LESSON 

(7)  ana  sakin  fi  I'wast  el- =  I  live  in  the  middle  of  the  city 
medine 

(8)  hiye  sakine  qarib  minnek    =  She  lives  near  you 

(9)  hum  sakinin  fi  I'beled  di      =  They  Uve  in  this  village 

(10)  huwa  galis  'andi  =  He  is  sitting  at  my  side 

(11)  hiya  qa'ide  'ala  I'kursi      =  She  is  sitting  on  the  chair 

(12)  lazimni  'esh  we-moya       =  I  have  need  of  bread  and 

water 

(13)  we-Iazimhum  'esh  keman  =  And  they  need  bread  also 

(14)  huwa  masik  sigara  fi  idu   =  He  is  holding  a  cigarette  in 

his  hand 
(15)anatalibmu*allimtayyib  =  I   am  looking  for   a  good 

teacher 

(16)  fih  mu'allim  tayyib  qawi  =  There  is  a  very  good  teacher 
fi  beledna,  huwa  esh-shekh  in  om*  village,  he  is  the 
'Abd  el-Magid,  we-huwa  sheikh  Abd  el-Magid,  who 
'alim  ketir  we-sha'ir  keman  is  very  learned  and  is  a 

poet  as  well 

(17)  khaddami  qafalsh  el-bab  ?  =  Has   my  servant  shut   the 

door? 

(18)  la,  khaddamek  huwa  =  No,  your  servant  is  very  lazy 
keslan  ketir 

(19)  dat  yom  we-huwa  galis  =  One  day  he  was  sitting  by  the 
'and  abuna  we-abuna  huwa  side  of  our  father  and 
sakit  we-r-rigal  ketir  hum  our  father  was  silent  and 
hadirin                                        there    were    many    men 

present 

(20)  el-bab  maqful  ? — la  el-  =  Is  the  door  shut? — No,  the 
bab  maftuh  door  is  open 

(21)  ma  teqfulsh  el-bab,  el-  =  Do  not  shut  the  door,  the 
hawa  harr  ketir  air  is  very  hot 

(22)  inzil  min  'ala  1-hisan  =  Dismount  from  the  horse 


THE   TWELFTH   LESSON  121 

(23)  ya  walad,  inzil  min  'ala  sh-  =  Boy,  get  down  from  the  tree 
shegare 

(24)  ighsil  idenek  we-wishshek  =  Wash  your  hands  and  face 
we-iq'ad  'ala  l-kursi  and  sit  down  on  the  chair 

(25)  ente,  teqdireh  te'rif  =  Do  you  understand  what  I 
kalami  ? — Aiwa,  ya  sidi,  ana  say  ? — Yes,  sir,  I  undei- 
'arif  kalamek  haqq  el-ma-  stand  what  you  say  very 
'arife                                              well 

(26)  el- walad  fen  ? — huwa  fi  =  Where  is  the  boy? — The  boy 
odatna  we-huwa  qa'id  we-  is  in  our  room  sitting  and 
masik  sigara  fi  idu                       holding  a  cigarette  in  his 

hand 

(27)  huwa  'amil  ey  ? — mush  =  What  is  he  doing  ? — I  do  not 
a'rif  know 

(28)  ma  tesalnish  =  Do  not  ask 

(29)  esh  huwa  'amal  ?  =  What  is  it  he  is  doing  ? 

(30)  hadretek  nazil  fi  ey  =  In  what  hotel  is  your  honour 
lokanda  staying 

(31)  esh  huwa  talib  ?  =  What  is  he  looking  for  ? 

(32)  nazil  matar  ?  =  Is  it  raining  ? 

(33)  el-matar  nazil  shuwaiye  =  It  is  raining  just  a  little 

(34)  el-mudir  qa'id  'ala  =  The  mudir  is  sitting  on  my 
yemini  right 

(35)  inna  li-llah  we-inna  ileh  =  To  God  we  belong  and  to 
la-ragi'in  him  verily  we  return 

(la-  before  verb  or  participle  =  "  verily  ". )   (This  sentence  is  conventionaJ 
when  it  is  perceived  that  anyone  is  near  death.) 

(36)  la  hoi  we-la  quwwa  ilia  =  There  is  no  might  or  power 
bi-Uah  al-'ali  el-'azim  save  in  God  the  exalted 

and  great 

(la  "  no  "  used  here  in  the  classical  sense  as  "  not  ".)  (Said  in  the  presence 
ol  danger  or  before  a  very  important  undertaking.) 


122  THE  TWELFTH  LESSON 

(37)  sami'  we-fahim  =  (I  am)  hearing  and  under- 

standing 

(  =  "to  hear  is  to  obey.") 

(38)  ea-sa'a      kam      lazin  =  At  what  hour  must  I  send  my 
ashayya'  'afshi  ?  luggage? 

(39)  heya  !  heya  !  tala'et  esh-  =  Up,  up,  the  sun  has  risen 
shems 


Chapter   XV 

THE  THIRTEENTH  LESSON— THE  DERI\T:D  STEMS 
OF    THE    YEBB 

So  great  is  the  regularity  of  word-building  in  Arabic  that 
we  are  able  to  classify  most  forms  containing  more  than 
three  consonants  (other  than  nouns  borrowed  from  other 
languages)  as  having  definite  relations  with  the  primary 
form  of  the  three-consonant  verb,  and  consequently  much 
which  in  other  languages  would  be  catalogued  in  the 
dictionaries  as  separate  words  in  Arabic  may  be  reduced  to 
a  system  and  so  the  range  of  our  vocabulary  can  be  very 
easily  extended.  These  derived  forms  of  the  verbs  have  the 
same  tenses  and  persons  as  the  ordinary  three-consonant  verbs, 
the  only  difierence  is  that  there  is  something  added  to  the 
stem  which  affects  the  original  meaning  of  the  verb.  After 
getting  some  idea  of  these  derived  verbal  forms  we  shall  find 
that  the  great  majority  of  noun  forms  containing  four  or 
more  consonants  are  themselves  dependent  on  those  derived 
verb  stems,  so  that  the  subject  enables  us  to  make  a  very 
considerable  extension  of  our  vocabulary  with  very  slight 
difficulty. 

(1)  The  Stem  with  Doubled  Medial  (D) 

Sometimes  the  basic  three  consonants  are  increased  to  four 
by  doubling  the  middle  one  and  this  usually  either  intensifies 
the  meaning  or  else  makes  a  causative  (i.e.  the  neuter  verb 
becomes  transitive),  thus  kasar  =  "  break  ",  kassar  = 
"  break   into    small    pieces  "  ;     birik  =  "  kneel  ",    birrik  = 


124  THE    THIRTEENTH   LESSON 

"  force  anyone  to  kneel ",  etc.  Very  often,  however,  the  four- 
consonant  verb  thus  produced  is  in  colloquial  use  but  the 
original  three-consonant  form  which  occurs  in  classical 
Arabic  is  no  longer  current  in  the  spoken  language,  and 
sometimes  the  four-consonant  form  is  produced  from  a  noun, 
as  sabbin  —  "  to  use  soap  "  from  sabiin  —  "  soap  ". 

Properly  the  vowels  in  the  Perfect  of  the  stem  with  doubled 
medial  are  -a--a-,  but  if  the  final  is  not  a  "  throat  "  letter  the 
second  vowel  is  often  modified  to  -i-,  at  least  in  Egypt  and 
Syria,  and  the  first  vowel  is  reduced  to  -e-  (or  -i-)  under  the 
usual  conditions,  thus  barrik,  sabbin,  etc.  The  imperfect 
stem  of  these  verbs  of  course  needs  two  vowels  and  these  are 
-a(e)-i-.  The  imperative  uses  this  two-vowel  stem  of  the 
imperfect  and  so  does  not  require  any  prefixed  or  inserted 
vowel.  The  participle  is  mu-a~i-  (e.g.  mu'allim  =  "  teacher  ", 
from  'allim  —  "  teach  ",  'alim  =  "  know  "),  the  prefixed  mu- 
often  modified  to  me-,  mi-  in  the  colloquial.  This  may  be 
illustrated  by  the  following  summary  : — 


1st  sing. 

2nd  sing. 

Srd  sing 

Perfect. 

birrikt 

birrikt 

birrik 

Imperfect. 

abarrik 

tebarrik 

yebarrik 

Imperative. 

barrik 

Participle. 

mubarrik 

(2)    Shortened  Form  of  the  Doubled  Medial  (D*) 

Sometimes  the  medial  consonant  is  doubled  and  then  one 
of  the  doubles  falls  away  with  compensating  lengthening 
of  the  preceding  vowel,  thus  birik  becomes  birrik  (barrak)  | 
and  then  barik,  the  distinctive  feature  being  the  first  vowel  " 
long.  In  all  other  respects  it  follows  the  scheme  already 
given  for  the  doubled  medial  and  if  this  is  borne  in  mind  there 
ie  nothing  fresh  to  learn  about  this  form.     Thus  : — 


THE    THIRTEENTH    LESSON  125 

Perfect.  barikt  (barakt)  =  /  blessed 

barik  (barak)     =  He  blessed 
Im'perfect.       abarik,  tebarik,  yebarik,  etc. 
Imperative,    barik,  bariku. 
Participle.      mubarik. 

(3)  The  Eeflexive 

The  reflexive,  which  in  modem  colloquial  often  serves  as 
the  passive  (cf.  p.  118  above),  is  formed  by  prefixed  t-,  thus : — 

(a)  From  the  primary  stem,  as  qafal  =  "  lock  ",  itqafal  = 
"  be  locked  ",  fatah  =  "  open  ",  itfatah  =  "  be  opened  ", 
etc.  In  the  classical  language  this  t-  is  transposed  with  the 
first  consonant  and  so  generally  in  'Iraq  and  Syria,  thus 
keteb  =  "  write  ",  iktateb,  etc.  (It  is  important  to  notice 
that  there  is  a  dialectal  difference  in  which  iqtafal  =  itqafal, 
the  meaning  of  both  words  being  the  same  and  the  t-  in  both 
cases  forming  a  reflexive  from  original  qafal.)  The  scheme 
is : — 

Perfect.  itqafal  (iqtafal) 

Imperfect  (3rd  sing.),     yitqifil  (yiqtifil) 

Imperative,    itqifil  (iqtifil) 

Participle,      mutqafil  (muqtafil) 

(6)  The  same  reflexive  t-  can  be  added  to  the  form  with 
doubled  medial  (D  above),  thus  tekallem  =  "  converse  ", 
from  kallem  =  "  speak  ". 

Perfect.  tekaUem 

Imperfect.  yetekellem  (yetkellem) 

Imperative.  tekeUem  (itkeUem) 

Participle.  muketeUim 

Thus  taqarrab  =  "  approach  ",  tenaddem  =  "  regret  ",  etc. 
In  Egyptian  it  is  fairly  common  to  find  etnaddemfor  tenaddem, 
etkallem  (or  itkaUem)  for  tekallem,  etc. 


126  THE    THIRTEENTH   LESSON 

(c)  The  reflexive  t-  may  be  added  similarly  to  the  reduced 
form  of  the  doubled  medial  (D*)  as  tebarik,  Egyptian 
itbarik,  etc. 

Perfect.  tebarik  (itbarik) 

Imperfect.       yetebarik  (yetbarik) 

Imperative,    tebarik  (itbarik) 

Participle.      mutebarik 
So  itshagir  =  "  quarrel  "  (Eg.). 

{d)  The  reflexive  may  appear  as  ist-,  the  reflexive  of  the 
Causative  which  had  s-  in  proto-Semitic  (as  we  can  see  by 
survivals  in  various  Semitic  languages),  but  this  s-  after 
becoming  h-  finally  weakened  to  '-  and  so  produced  forms 
such  as  'ifqar  or  'afqar  =  "  make  poor  "  from  faqir  =  "  be 
poor  ",  but  verbs  of  this  measure  are  so  rare  in  the  colloquial 
speech  that  it  is  hardly  necessary  to  linger  over  them.  In 
the  reflexive  the  ancient  s-  has  survived,  and  so  we  get  :— 

Perfect.  istahsen  —  "  admire  " 

(hasun  =  "  be  beautiful  ") 
Imperfect.       yestahsin 
Imperative,    istahsin 
Participle.      mustahsin 

This  ist-  form  is  rare  as  derivative  from  the  regular  three- 
consonant  verb,  but  occurs  more  frequently  with  the  verbs 
which  have  one  of  their  consonants  weak  (w  or  y,  see  pp.  133, 
etc.,  below). 

The  formation  of  these  derived  stems  has  become  rather 
a  matter  of  lexicography  than  of  grammar  in  the  ordinary 
sense  ;  it  is  only  because  word-building  in  the  Arabic  follows 
such  regular  lines  that  we  are  able  to  include  this  subject 
within  the  limits  of  morphology  at  all.  In  the  word  lists  we 
mark  those  forms  which  have  doubled  medials  as  (D),  those 
which  have  had  doubled  medials  but  have  reduced  them  with 

I 


THE    THIRTEENTH    LESSON  127 

lengthening  of  the  first  stem  vowel  as  (D*),  and  use  (t)  for 
the  reflexive  prefix,  so  that  (Dt)  describes  such  a  form  as 
tekeUim  or  itkeUim,  (D*t)  such  as  tebarik,  or  itbarik,  and 
(st)  such  as  istahsen. 

AU  these  derived  forms  are  vocalised,  as  shown  in  the  above 
summaries,  with  the  ordinary  modifications  of  -a-  short  to 
-e-  and  -i-  according  to  dialect,  and  there  is  no  difierence  due 
to  derivation  from  primary  qatal,  qitU,  or  qutul. 

Summary  of  this  Lesson 

Chief  derived  stems  of  verbs  whose  primary  form  is  qatal, 
qitil,  or  qutul. 

D.       Type  qattal  (qettil).     Intensive  or  transitive 
D*.     Type  qatal  (qatil).  from  intransitive 

primary, 
t-.       Reflexive  (t)  itqatel  (iqtat^l) 

(Dt)  taqattel  (itqattel) 

(D*t)  taqatel  (itqatel) 

(st)  istaqel 

All  these  make  their  tenses  and  persons  in  the  same  way  as 
the  ordinary  three-consonant  verb. 

EXERCTSE 

(Refer  to  vocabularies  at  end  of  book.) 

(1)  te'rif  el-'arabi  (el-loghet  =  Do  you  know  Arabic  (the 
el-'arabiyye)  ? — aiwa,  a'rif  Arabic  language)  ? — Yes, 
shuwaiye                                       I  know  a  little 

(2)  fen  te'aUamt  el-'arabi  ?—  =  Where  did  you  learn  Arabic  ? 
fi  Masr  (el-Qahire)  — In  Cairo 

(3)  li  tisa'  ashhur  bass  ate-  =  I  have  been  learning  Arabic 
'allim  el-'arabi  for  nine  months  only 


128  THE    THIRTEENTH    LESSON 

(4)  we-min  'allimek  ? — mu-  =  And  who  has  taught  you  ? — 
'allimi  huwa  sh-shekh  'Abd  My  teacher  is  the  sheikh 
el-Megid  Abd  el-Magid 

(5)  tetekellim  bi-l-'arabi  ? —  =  Can  you  converse  in  Arabic  ? 
ma  aqdirsh  atekellim  ketlr  — ^I  cannot  converse  very 

much 

(6)  yumkin  li  ta'allum  el-  =  Could  I  learn  EngUsh  without 
inkelizi  bi-gher  mu'allim  ?  a  teacher  ? — Perhaps,  but 
— ^yumkin,  we-lakin  'ala  I  think  it  would  be  very 
fikri  da  sa'ab  ketir  difficult 

(7)  ahsib  el-loghet  el-inkeli-  =  I  consider  that  the  English 
ziyye  mufide  giddan  language  is  a  very  useful 

one 

(8)  haddiru  l-khel  we-neham-  =  Bring  here  the  horses  and  we 
milha  ana  we-nte  will  load  them,  you  and  I 

(9)  ahe  el-khel  we-lakin  es-  =  Here  are  the  horses,  but  the 
sayis  ma  ha(J(jlirshe  bisanek  groom  has  not  brought  out 

your  horse 

(10)  lesh  ma  tehaddir  el-khel  =  Why  did  you  not  get  the 
halan  ?  horses  ready  at  once  ? 

(11)  ana  biddi  asafir  ila  d-dir  =  I  am  going  to  travel  to  the 
en-nehar  da  monastery  to-day 

(12)  tariq  es-selame. — Allah  =  (May  it  be)  a  journey  of 
yesellimek  peace.  —  God    give    you 

peace 

(13)  min  beyekhabbit  (bikhab  =  Who  is  knocking  at  the 
bit)  'ala  1-bab  ?  door  ? 

(14)  ana  mush  musafir  wahadi  =  I  am  not  travelling  alone 

(15)  safirt  min  Masr  ila  hena  =  I  have  travelled  from  Cairo 
we-ma'i  sahibi  we-sayisna  and  with  me  is  my  friend 

and  our  groom 

(16)  tefad(Jal  (itfa(^4el),  el-  =  Please  enter,  the  dinner  is 
ghada  ha^ir  ready 


THE    THIETEENTH    LESSON  129 

(17)  ehna  mabsutin  ketir  iUi  =  We  are  very  pleased  to  have 
ente  ma'na  s-sa'a  di  you  with  us  at  this  time 

(18)  ihteres  !  =  Be  careful ! 

(19)  min  tetlub  ? — ^ana  talib  =  Who  are  you  looking  for  ? — 
el-khawage  (fulan)  I  am  looking  for  Mr.  N. 

(20)  el-bet  menafEad  =  The  house  is  closed 

( The  house  is  closed  ( =  not  at  home).  ' '  maqf  ul ' '  not  used  in  this  connection 
as  implying  that  the  house  is  deserted,  a  very  iJl-omened  suggestion.) 

(21)  khatirek. — AUah  yesaUim  =  Your  mind  (=  farewell). — 
khatirek  God  preserve  your  mind 

(22)  el-'abd  ye'ammel  we-r-  =  The  slave  ( ==  man)  plans, 
rabbi  yekemmel  and  the  Lord  carries  out 

(23)  betefattish  *ala  ey  ?  =  What    are    you     disputing 

about  ? 

(24)  kaUimna  bi-l-'arabi  'ala  =  Speak  to  us  in  Arabic  so  that 
shan  kalamek  yitfibim  min  what  you  say  may  be 
kull  ennas                                     understood   by  everyone 

(25)  ana  afabhimba  lekun         =  I  will  explain  it  to  you 

(26)  ente  bitbammil  bimarek  =  Why  are  you  loading  your 
bamla  qadde  keda  teqila  donkey  with  such  a  heavy 
leb  ?  burden  ? 

(27)  kbaddami  isbtara  bi-seb'a  =  My  servant  bought  cloth  at 
frank  gbuk  seven  francs 

(28)  'All  buwa  kesser  el-qulla    =  It  was  Ah  who  broke  the  jug 

(29)  sbarraftena  =  You  have  honoured  us 

(Salutation  to  guest,  frequently  repeated  at  any  pause  in  the  conversation.) 

{reply)  Allah  yebfazkum  (-ek)  =  May  God  protect  you 

(30)  khatirek  =  Your  mind.    ( =  Good-bye) 
{reply)  AUah  yesaUim  khatirek  =  God  protect  your  mind 

(31)  ti'allamt  el-'arabi  fen  ?     =  Where  did  you  learn  Arabic? 

(32)  tisallim  U  'ala  akbuk  —  Remember     me     to     your 

brothel 


130  THE    THIETEENTH    LESSON 

(33)  el-'abd   yi'ammal   we-r- =  The  slave  (= man)  plans  and 
Rabb  yikemmel  the  Lord  carries  out 

(34)  min    beyekhabbet    'ala  =  Who    is    knocking    at    the 
1-bab  ?  door  ? 

(35)  betifattish  'ala  ey  ?  =  What    are    you     disputing 

about  ? 

(36)  tariq  es-salame  =  The  journey  of  peace  (Fare- 

well to  a  traveller) 
{reply)  Allah  yisellimek  =  God  give  you  peace 

(37)  tesharraft  bi-an  asabbih  =  I  have  the  honour  to  wish  you 
'alekum  good  morning 

(38)  Allah  yisabbihkum  bi-1-  =  May     God      prosper      the 
kher  morning  to  you 

(39)  ana  mush  musafir  wabadi  =  I  am  not  travelling  alone 

(40)  safirt  min  Beirut  ila  1-  =  I  travelled  from  Beirut  to 
Iskanderiya  Alexandria 

(41)  tefacjdal  (itfaddal)  =  Please  (sit  down,  eat,  etc.) 

(42)  itfaddal   ila   1-batata   6  =  Please     help     yourself     tc 
gherha  min  el-buqul  potatoes    or    other  vege- 
tables 

(Or  other  than  it  of  the  vegetables.) 

(43)  itwakkil  =  Commend  yourself  (to  God) 

(Meaning,  please  go  away.)  S 

(44)  el-bet  menaffed  =  The  house  is  closed  ( =  no^ 

at  home) 

(Do  not  use  "  maqful  ",  which  is  unpropitious  in  this  connection.) 

(45)  astaghfir  Allah   el-'azim  =  I  ask  pardon  of  God  the 

great 

(Apology  after  breach  of  manners.) 

(46)  titkellem  bi-l-'arabi  ?  =  Do  you  talk  Arabic  P 
na'am  ya  khawage  atkallam  =  Yes,  sir,  I  talk  a  httle 

shuwayye 


f: 


THE    THIRTEENTH    LESSON 


131 


APPENDIX    TO    LESSON    XUI 

Table   of  derived  steins  including  those  rarely  used  in 
colloquial  Arabic. 

Pej/.  Imjpf. 

I.     Primary  (qatal,  qitil, 

qutul) 
11.     (D)  Intensive,  etc.       qattal  yeqattil 

III.    (D*)  Intensive,  etc.     qatal  yeqatil 

'aqtal  yuqtil 

Rare  in  colloquial, 
taqattal  yeteqattal 

(itqattal)        (yetqattal) 
taqatal  yeteqatal 

(itqatal)  (yet  qatal) 

inqatal  yenqatil 

Rare  in  colloquial, 
iqtatal  yeqtatil 

(itqatal) 
iqtall  yeqtall 

Rare. 
X.    Reflexive  of  IV  (st-)    istaqtal  yestaqil 


IV.  Causative 

V.  Reflexive  of  II 

VI.  Reflexive  of  III 

VII.  Passive  in  n- 

Vm.  Reflexive  of  I 

IX.  Colours,  etc. 


Chapter    XVI 

THE  FOUKTEENTH  LESSON— VERBS  WITH  WEAK 

INITIAL 

As  we  have  already  seen,  the  Arabic  verb  normally  is  based 
on  a  root  containing  three  consonants  :  but  one  of  these  may 
be  a  weak  consonant  such  as  w,  y,  or  Hamza  (',  cf.  p.  12) 
and  that  weak  consonant  may  be  merged  in  a  neighbouring 
vowel,  or  else  the  second  and  third  consonants  may  be  alike. 
Any  of  these  conditions  may  produce  certain  phonetic  changes 
which  have  now  to  be  considered,  though  those  changes  hardly 
deserve  to  be  called  "  irregularities  ". 

First  Radical  Hamza 
The  first  radical  or  root  consonant  may  be  Hamza,  which  is 
merely  a  check  in  the  enunciation,  and  such  a  verb  will 
appear  as  though  commencing  with  a  vowel,  as  amar  = 
"  command  ",    akal  ==  "  eat  ",    etc.     In   the    ordinary   way 
this  has  no  effect  in  the  perfect,  but  in  the  imperfect  where  the 
prefixed  person  is  in  contact  with  a  vowel  check  the  -a-  of 
the  prefix  follows  the  general  rule  by  which  -a'-  becomes  -a-. 
It  must  be  remembered  that  the  te-,  ye-,  or  ti-,  yi-,  etc.,  of  ; 
the  personal  prefix  was  originally  ta-,  ya-,  and  so  we  get  the  i 
personal  prefixes  of  such  verbs  a-,  ta-,  ya-,  na-  as  in  akul  =  j 
"  I    eat  ",    takul  =  "  thou    eatest  ",    yakul  ==  "  he    eats  ",  ' 
nakul  =  "  we  eat  ",  etc.    In  the  active  participle  the  Hamza 
becomes  w-  and  so  gives  wakil  =  "  eating  ",  fern,  wakile,  etc. 

Perfect  of  (a)kal  and  (a)khad 

The  two  verbs  akal  =  "  eat  "  and  akhad  =  "  take  " 
commonly  drop  the  first  syllable  in  the  perfect  tense  and 
reproduce  the  same  process  in  the  imperative.     Thus  : — 


THE    FOUETEEXTH    LESSON 


133 


Perfect. 

Sing. 

1. 

2. 

masc. 

khadt 
khadt 

kalt 
kalt 

fern. 

khadti 

kalti 

3. 

masc. 

khad 

kal 

fern. 

kliadet 

kalet 

Plur. 

1. 

khadna 

kalna 

2. 

khadtu 

kalnu 

3. 

khadu 

kalu 

Imperfect. 

Sing. 

1. 

2. 

masc. 

akhud 
takhud 

akul 
takul 

fem. 

takhudi 

takuli 

3. 

masc. 

yakhud 

yakul 

fem. 

takhud 

takul 

Plur. 

1. 

nakhud 

nakul 

2. 

takhudu 

takulu 

Imperative. 

Sing. 

3. 

masc. 
fem. 

yakhudu 

khud 

khudi 

yakulu 

kul 

kuH 

Plur. 

khudu 

kulu 

Participle. 

Act. 
Pass. 

wakhid 

wakil 
makiil 

From  khad  we  get  the  derived  (D*)  akhiz  (for  akhidh)  in 
the  expression  ma  takhiznish  =  "  do  not  blame  me  "  used  as 
introductory  to  a  remark  which  might  be  resented  as  a  liberty  : 
from  kal  we  have  (D)  wakkil  =  "  cause  to  eat  ",  etc. 


Verbs  with  Initial  w- 

In  the  perfect  and  participles  verbs  with  initial  w-  are 
perfectly  regular,  thus  wasal  = "  arrive ",  etc.  In  the 
imperfect  the  consonant  -w-  following  the  (original)  -a-  of 
the  prefixed  person  naturally  makes  -o-  which  is  the  regular 
product  of  -aw-  (see  p.  13  above),  but  sometimes  we  may  hear 


134 


THE   FOURTEENTH   LESSON 


1. 

osal     or 

awsal 

2. 

masc. 

tosal 

tusal 

fern. 

tosali 

tusali 

3. 

masc. 

yosal 

yusal 

fern. 

tosal 

tusal 

1. 

nosal 

nusal 

2. 

tosalu 

tusalu 

3. 

yosalu 

yusalu 

in  the  first  person  aw-  (sounded  like  ow  in  "  how  "),  and  -u- 
(as  a  modification  of  -o-)  in  the  other  persons.  Whether  we 
get  -o-  or  -u-  is  a  matter  of  dialect  and  follows  the  general 
tendency  of  local  speech.  Taking  as  type  wasal  =  "arrive" 
we  have  : — 

Imperfect       Sing. 


Plur. 


In  the  Imperative  (which  is  always  closely  allied  with  the 
imperfect)  the  same  phonetic  principles  are  followed,  thus  : — 

Imperative     sing.  masc.     osal  usal 

fem.       osali  usali 

plural  osalu  iisalu 

Verbs  with  First  Radical  y- 

Verbs  with  first  radical  y-  are  rare.  All  that  has  been  said 
above  for  verbs  with  initial  w-  holds  good  save  that  the 
prefixes  in  the  imperfect  of  these  verbs  are  ay-,  ti-,  yi-,  ni- : 
thus  yibis  —  "  harden  ",  imperfect  aybas,  tibas,  yibas,  nibas, 
etc.,  and  consistently  with  this  the  imperative  ibas,  ibasi, 
ibasu.  J 

Derived  Stems  of  Initial  w/y  Verbs 

For  the  most  part  these  derived  forms  are  normal  save  that 
in  the  reflexive  (t-)  form  we  find  ittasal  for  itwasal.  Following 
this  analogy  khad  gives  reflexive  ittakhid,  kal  has  ittakil 
(D*t).  i 


THE    FOUETEENTH   LESSON 


135 


kal(=akal) 
khad  (=akhad) 
wagad 
waBaah 


WORD    LIST 


=  eat 
=  take 
—  find,  occur 
=  bereave 
=  arrive 


'agal 

'arabiya 

'askari 

ferkhe* 

*ilm 


8uq 


=  speM 
=  cart,  cab 
=  soldier 
=  fowl 
=  wisdom 
=  fish 
=  market 


EXERCISE 


(1)  esh  takul  ? 

(2)  takul  qalil  samak 

(3)  akhud  qalil,  'an  iznak 

(4)  ente  ma  takulsh 


=  What  will  you  eat  ? 
=  Eat  a  little  fish 
=  I  will  take  a  little,  please 
=  You  are  not  eating 


(To  guest  pressing  him  to  eat  more.) 

(5)  ma  aqdirsh  akul  *ala  z-  =  I  cannot  eat  any  more 

ziyade 

(6)  yugad     samak    ketir    fi 


s-suq  { 

(7)  ma  qadartish  agid  samak 
fi  8-suq 

(8)  nusil  qabli  ma  yeghlaq  es- 
suq 

(9)  kul  aktar 

(10)  kul  ka-ente  fi  betek 

(11)  min  fadlak,  kul  shuwayya 
min  el-ferkhe  di 

(12)  kewayyis  ketir 

(13)  wasalni  mektubek 

(14)  khadt  felus  minnuh 

(15)  el-khabr  esh-sbum  yusal 
bi-l-'agal 


Is  there  mnch  fish  in  the 

market  ? 
I  could  not  find  any  fish  in 

the  market 
We  came  before  the  maiket 

closed 
Eat  more 
Eat    as    if    in    your    own 

house 
Please  eat  a  Uttle  of  this 

chicken 
It  is  excellent 
I  have  received  your  letter 
I  took  money  from  him 
Bad  news  arrives  with  speed 


136  THE    FOURTEENTH    LESSON 

(16)  huwa  biyakul  ey  ?  =  What  does  he  eat  ? 

(17)  khud  lek  kisret  khubz       =  Take  a  morsel  of  bread 

(18)  wahashtena  =  Thou  hast  made  us  lonely 

(To  acquaintance  after  period  of  absence.) 

(reply)  alJah  ma  yiihish  fik       =  May  God  make  no  lonehness 

for  thee 
(19)tefaddalkulma'na  =  Please  eat  with  us 

(20)  ente  ma  kaltesh  =  You  have  eaten  nothing 

(21)  ana  shibi't  =  I  have  had  enough 

(22)  kelkaza  (Syr.=kul  ka-da)  =  Eat  such  as  this 

(23)  kkudni    ila    1-khawage  =  Take  me  to  Mr.  N. 
(fulan) 

(24)  khud  'ala  yeminek  =  Take  (the  way)  to  your  right 

(25)  yelzamek  takhud  'arabiya  =  You  must  take  a  cab 

(26)  ya'ni  telibt  el-khawage  ?    =  Were  you  looking  for  the 

gentleman  ? 

(27)  weselnash  ?  =  Have  we  arrived? 

(28)  esh  kalt  es-sabah  da  ?       =  What  have  you  eaten  this 

morning  ? 

(29)  ma  kaltesh  =  I  have  eaten  nothing 

(30)  bi-kam  akhud  el-kitab  da  ?  =^  For  how  much  shall  I  get 

this  book? 

(31)  ma  yakhudsh  min  gher  =  He  takes  nothing  but  money 
felus 

(32)  kef      wagadtu      hal  =  How    did    you    find    your 
sahibkum  ?  friend? 

(33)  esh-shagar  da  ma  yugad  ==  This  tree  is  not  found  in 
ilia  fi  dilad  el-masr  Egypt 

(34)  mim  min  kbadtuha  ?  =  Who  did  you  get  it  from  ? 

(mim  min  —  min  min.) 

(35)  ma  yosilni  shayy  minnuh  =  I    have    received    nothing 

from  him 


THE   FOUETEENTH   LESSON  137 

(36)  lahaqni    el-'askari    we-  =  The  soldier  overtook  me  and 
khadiii  took  me  away 

(37)  kalabslmh  we-khuduh       =  Handcuff  him  and  take  him 

away 

(38)  kalu     we-shirbu  hadd   =  They  ate    and  drank  until 
shabi'u  (Syr.)  they  had  had  enough 

(badd  =  Ijatta.) 

(39)  khadt  el-'ihn'anuh  =  I  acquired  knowledge  o!  him 


Chapter   XVII 

THE  FIFTEENTH  LESSON— VERBS  WITH  WEAK 

MEDIAL 

Verbs  with  weak  medial  are  of  two  kinds  (i)  those  with 
medial  -w-,  as  q-w-1,  and  (ii)  those  with  medial  -y-,  as  g-y-b. 
We  need  not  consider  those  with  medial  Hamza  as  either 
the  Hamza  remains  and  so  the  verb  is  regular,  or  else  it  becomes 
w/y  and  so  it  falls  within  one  of  the  classes  given  above. 

Verbs  with  Medial  w  :    Perfect 

Verbs  with  medial  -w-  merge  that  medial  in  the  neigh- 
bouring vowel  sounds  and  so  form  one  syllable.  Before  one 
consonant  -awa-  becomes  -a-,  and  before  two  consonants  -u-  : 
thus  qal  (for  qawal),  qalet  (for  qawalet),  qalu  (for  qawalu)  ; 
and  quit  (for  qawalt),  qulti  (for  qawalti),  qulna  (for  qawalna), 
and  qultu  (for  qawaltu).  Such  verbs  appear  in  the  vocabulary 
as  words  of  one  syllable,  e.g.  qal  =  "  he  said  ",  and  after 
them  is  noted  the  root  form  (qwl,  etc.).  The  formation  of 
the  persons  is  regular  in  all  respects.     Thus  : — 

quit    =  I  said 
quit    =  thou  saidest 
qulti  =  thou  (fem.)  saidest 
qal      =  he  said 
qalet  =  she  said 
qulna  =  we  said 
qultu  =  rjou  said 
qalu    =  they  said. 

In  'Iraq  quiet  may  be  heard  for  quit,  still  the  rule  holds  good 
for  modern  qulat  is  for  ancient  qultu,  qulta.  £ 


i 


THE    FIFTEENTH   LESSON  139 

Imperfect. 

In  the  imperfect  these  verbs  have  vowel  -u-,  and  this  with 
the  -w-  makes  -u-,  so  we  have : — 

aqul      =  I  sjpeak 
tequl     =  thou  speakest 
tequli    =  thou  (fem.)  speakest 
yequl    =  he  speaks 
tequl     =  she  speaks 
nequl    =  we  speak 
tequlu  =  you  speak 
yequlu  —  they  speak 

In  'Iraq  the  plural  termination  -u  may,  as  usual,  be  heard 
with  final  -n. 

Imperative. 

In  the  imperative  no  prefixed  vowel  is  needed  as  the  one 
initial  consonant  is  vocalized  by  the  stem  vowel,  so  we  have  : — 
Sing.        masc.  qui  fem.  quli 

Plural  qiilu 

Participle. 

The  active  participle  is  qayil  (for  classical  qa'il) :  the 
passive  participle  is  not  in  use. 

Derived  Stems. 

The  (D)  stem,  qawwal,  etc.,  is  perfectly  regular,  in  the  (t) 
and  (st)  we  find  long  -a-  shortening  before  two  consonants, 
thus  (t)  itqal,  itqalt,  etc.,  impf.  yetqal,  (st)  istaqal,  istaqalt, 
etc.,  impf.  yestaqil. 

These  verbs  with  medial  w  form  a  very  important  group, 
most  are  as  qal  above,  but  a  few,  e.g.  nam  =  "  sleep",  make 
imperfect  with  -a-  instead  of  -u-,  thus  anam,  tenam,  etc. 
The  verb  kan,  kunt,  etc.,  impf.  yekun,  is  in  general  use  to 


140  THE    FIFTEENTH    LESSON 

denote  the  verb  "to  be  "  when  in  the  past  or  future  time, 
in  the  present  of  course  no  such  verb  is  needed,  thus  ana  kunt 
keslan  =  "  I  was  lazy  ",  huwa  kan  ta'ban  =  "  he  was  tired  ", 
etc.  Kan  ragil  fi  medina  min  el-medayn  es-sin  =  "  there 
was  a  man  in  a  certain  city  in  China  ",  ente  tekun  'atshan  = 
"  you  will  be  thirsty  ",  etc.  This  verb  added  to  the  tenses 
of  other  verbs  produces  a  new  tense  system  which  figures  in 
modern  Arabic.  The  free  use  of  kan  as  the  verb  "  to  be  " 
seems  to  be  a  development — at  least  we  assume  so  from  the 
total  absence  of  this  verb,  at  least  in  that  sense,  in  the  other 
Semitic  languages — but  it  is  introduced  freely  in  the  colloquial, 
often,  it  must  be  confessed,  where  the  sentence  would  be  just 
as  good  without  it.  Its  use  in  forming  a  tense  system  will 
be  dealt  with  later  (see  Lesson  XX),  to  a  large  extent  that 
seems  to  be  a  development  due  to  those  who  have  come  under 
the  influence  of  European  education  and  is  somewhat  artificial 
and  "  bookish  "  ;  it  is  doubtful  if  we  ought  to  go  further  than 
to  say  that  in  the  vernacular  the  perfect  of  kan  is  used  for 
past  time,  the  imperfect  for  the  future,  leaving  schemes  of 
pluperfect,  future  perfect,  etc.,  for  those  who  are  trying  to 
twist  the  Semitic  character  of  Arabic  to  fit  into  the  totally 
different  structure  of  the  Indo-European  languages,  sar 
also  is  used  in  the  sense  "  to  be  "  :  dam  is  "  to  be  "  in  the  sense 
of  "  continue ",  as  ma  dumt  —  "  as  long  as  I  am  .  .  ." 
The  verb  qam  =  "  rise  "  is  also  used  as  a  kind  of  auxiliary 
meaning  "  begin  ",  thus  qam  qal  =  "  he  began  to  say  ",  etc, 
— the  frequent  use  of  qam  and  kan  is  characteristic  of  the 
narrative  in  the  speech  of  the  people,  folk  tales,  and  the  stories 
in  the  "  Thousand  Nights  and  a  Night "  begin  almost  every 
sentence  with  qam  or  kan,  often  quite  superfluous.  *az 
occurs  most  often  in  the  participle  'awiz  (=  '6z)  =  "  want, 
need  ",  thus  ente  *awiz  ey  ?  =  "  what  do  you  want  ?  " 
ana  'awiz  sikkin  =  "  I  want  a  knife  ",  etc.    The  verb  rad 


I 


THE   FIFTEENTH   LESSON  141 

in  the  derived  form  arad  (causative,  No.  IV  on  p.  131)  is 
a  useful  verb  meaning  "  desire,  want "  used  before  another 
verb,  thus  turid  aqaddam  lek  'esh  ?  =  "  would  you  like 
me  to  give  you  some  bread  ?  ",  turid  tequl  eh  ?  =  "  what 
do  you  want  to  say  ?  ",  etc.  We  have  already  noted  the 
use  of  the  participle  rayih  =  "  going  "  (from  rah)  as  giving 
a  future  sense  to  the  sentence  in  which  it  is  used.  (Cf.  p.  109 
above.) 


EXAMPLES 

esh   huwa    *awiz  ? — ma   anish  =  What  does  he  want  1 — /  do 

'arif  esh  huwa  'awiz  not  knoio  what  he  wants. 

fatetni  el-furse  =  The  opportunity  escaped  me. 

el-qom    kulluhum    matu    min  =  All  the  people  died  of  hunger. 

el-gu' 
el-mu'allim  lam  fikri  =  The  teacher  disapproved  my 

opinion. 
li  sens  kamile  ma  shuftush       =  I  have  not  seen  him  for  a 

ivhole   year   {=  to   me   a 

complete  year  I  have  not 

seen  him). 
esh  bitqul  ente  ?  =  What  do  you  say  ? 

Verbs  with  jVIedial  y  :    Perfect 

The  verbs  with  medial  -y-  follow  the  lines  already  indicated 
for  those  with  medial  -w- :  where  those  verbs  made  -a-  so 
do  these,  where  they  made  -u-  these  make  -i-,  and  where  they 
made  -u-  these  make  -i-.  The  example  we  take  is  the  verb 
gab  =  "  bring  ".  Classical  Arabic  had  a  verb  ga'  =  "  go  ", 
to  which  we  shall  refer  later  (cf.  p.  150),  followed  by  the 


142  THE    FIFTEENTH   LESSON 

preposition  hi-  tMs  had  the  sense  of  "bring"  and  thence 
modern  Arabic  has  formed  the  verb  gab  in  all  respects  as 
though  g-y-b. 


gibt       =  7  brought 

gibt       =  thou  hroughtest 

gibti     =  thou  (fem.)  brou^htest 

gab       =  he  brought 

gabet    =  she  brought 

gibna    =  we  brought 

gibtu    =  you  brought 

gabu     —  they  brought 

Imperfect. 

The  imperfect  has  stem  vowel  -i-  (=  -yi-),  thus 

agib      =  7  bring 

tegib     =  thou  bringest 

tegibi    =  thou  (fem.)  bringest 

yegib    =  he  brings 

tegib     =  she  brings 

negib    =  we  bring 

tegibu  =  you  bring 

yegibu  =  they  bring 

Imperative. 

Sing,      gib            fem.   gibi 

Plur.      gibu 

Participle. 

gayib  (geyib),  etc. 

Derived  Stems. 

The  stem  with  doubled  medial  (D)  and  (D*)  offers  nothing 
abnormal,  gayyib,  gayib,  etc.,  the  -y-  here  appearing  as  a 
consonant :    in  the  reflexive  (t)  and  (st)  we  get  the  same 


i 


THE    FIFTEENTH    LESSON 


143 


resultants  as  in  the  medial  -w-  verbs,  thus  (t)  itgab,  itgabt, 
im'pf.  yugib,  (st)  istagab,  istagabt,  iniff.  yestabib,  etc. 

These  medial  -y-  verbs  are  not  so  numerous  or  so  useful 
as  those  with  medial  -w-,  indeed  gab  is  the  only  one  which 
frequently  enters  into  ordinary  speech. 


WORD 

LIST 

Verba 

'ad        (w) 

=  take  refuge 

kenea 

=  suxep 

;ash       (w) 

=  live 

qal        (w) 

=  say 

az         (w) 

=  ne^4 

qam      (w) 

=  arise,  begin 

dab       (w) 

=  be  dizzy 

rab        (w) 

=  go 

dakh     (w) 

=  humble 

rekab 

=  mount,    ride. 

fahim    (at-) 

=  inquire 

embark 

faragh 

=  be  emptied 

9am      (w) 

=  fast 

fe^ah 

=  stride 

9ar        (w) 

=  be 

tefessab 

=  stroa 

sba' 

=  wiU 

fat        (w) 

=  pass  by 

ahaf      (w) 

=  see 

gab       (y) 

=  bring,  give 

tal         (w) 

=  be  long. 

kal        (y) 

=  measure 

(D)  lengthen 

kan       (w) 

=  be 

zad        (w) 

=  increase 

khaf      (w) 

=  fear 

Other 

• 
Words 

'afrit 

=  demon 

in 

=  if 

amnak 

=  constipation 

lamma 

=  when 

babur 

=  steamer 

lisan 

=  tongue 

ba'd 

=  after 

makbzen* 

=  store 

bustan 

=  garden  (pers.) 

meqlub 

=  savage 

dir 

=  monastery 

marra* 

=  woman 

(Christian) 

mearuT 

=  pleased 

dughri 

=  straight  on 

qufl 

=  lock 

dohr 

=  noon 

qariban 

=  nearly 

embarib 

=  yesterday 

ragim 

=  stoned    (of    th 

fe- 

=  and,  and  so 

devil) 

i     falaq 

=  dawn 

rib 

=  wind 

■     fellab  (-in) 

=  cultivator  of  the 

9aban 

=  soap 

1 

soil 

safir 

=  traveller 

I    gubba* 

=  {name  of  a 

Budr 

=  chest 

1 

garment) 

sene  (sinin) 

=  year 

1    balan 

=  at  once 

sbabr 

=  month 

'    honak 

=  there 

sharbe* 

=  drink 

barir 

=  silk 

sbarr 

=  harm 

batta 

=  until,  up  to 

taabt 

=  basin 

ibriq 

=  jug 

144  THE   FIFTEENTH   LESSON 


EXERCISE 


1)  qal  sahib  ed-dar  min  bel-  =  The  master  of  the  house  said, 
bab  ?  Who  is  at  the  door  ? 

(bel-=bi-l-.) 

2)  sa'alni  we-qal  li,  min  en  =  He  asked  me  saying,  Where 
ente  ?— w-esh   quit   ente  ?  do  you  come  from  ? — And 

what  did  you  say  ? 

3)  we-qal  el-hammal,  Da  nehar  =  And  the  porter  said,  This  is  a 
mubarak  we-nehar  sa'id  blessed  and  happy  day 

4)  wi-'al  li,  let  ?  And  he  said  to  me,  Why  ? 

(Dialect  of  Lower  Egypt,  'al=qal.) 

5)  wahid  fellah  fi  Derut  qal  =  A  certain  fellah  in  Beirut 
li,  Ana  shufti  marra  wahid  said  to  me.  Once  I  saw 
min  el-'afarit  one  of  the  afarit 

6)  ma  tequlish  kida  =  Do  not  talk  like  that 

7)  emta  esh-shekh  sahibek  =  When  did  the  sheikh  who 
kharag  ? — kan  el-waqt  is  your  friend  go  out  ? — 
qariban  ed-dohr                            The  time  was  about  noon 

8)  qam  qal  er-ragil  li-s-safir,  =  The  man  began  saying  to  the 
Ente  rayih  fen  ?  traveller.  Where  are  you 

going? 

9)  esh-shekh  huwa  marid  'ala  =  The  sheikh  is  seriously  ill 
khatir  we  'ala  fikri  rayih  and  I  think  he  is  goin^  to 
yemut                                           die 

10)  er-ragil  qam  halan  we-rigi'  =  The  man  stood  up  at  once 
ilasahibuh  and    went    back    to    his 

friend 

11)  rakebt  babur  el-Brindizi  =  I  embarked  on  the  Brindisi 
illi  yequlu  'aleh  steamer  they  talk  about 

12)  huwa  yeruh  ila  en  ?—  =  Where  is  he  going?— He  is 
yeruhila'azvetuh— enteruh  going  to  his  farm.  Do 
waiyyah  you  go  with  him 


li 


THE    FIFTEENTH    LESSON  145 

(13)  kan  labis  gubba  harir        =  He    was    wearing    a    silk 

jabbeh 

(14)  a'uz  akallimek — ^yekul  =  I  want  to  have  a  word  with 
ha^retek,  ana  sami  you.      Let    your    honour 

speak,  I  am  hstening 

(15)  ente  dawwakht  rasi  =  Thou  hast  humbled  my  head 

(16)  da,  esh  ismuh  ? — qui  min  =  What  is  the  name  o!  this  ? — 
tani — mush  taman  say  it  again— that's  not 

quite  right 

(17)  ente  'awiz  esh  ? — ana  =  What  do  you  want  ? — I  want 
'awiz  sharbe  'alishan  'andi  a  draught  because  I  have 
amsak  constipation 

(18)  kunt  ente  fen  embarih  ?  =  Where  were  you  yesterday  ? 
— ana  kunt  (kutt)  fi  s-suq-  — I  was  in  the  market. — 
we-akhuk  fen  ? — huwa  kan  And  your  brother,  where 
fi  1-gami'  ma'  abuna                   was  he? — He  was  in  the 

mosque  with  our  father 

(19)  qam  ila  el-makhzen  we-  =  He  went  to   the   magazine 
fatahuh  fe-kihia  hatta  faragh         and    opened    it    and    we 
el-makhzen  measured  it  (=  its  con- 
tents) until  it  was  empty 

(20)  qum,  ya  sahibi,  nergi'  Ua  =  Rise,  my  friend,  let  us  go 
darna  back  to  our  house 

(21)  min  minkum  yekun  luh  =  Who  of  you  has  a  friend? 
sahib 

(22)  rubu  bina  netefessah,  en-  =  Go  with  us  for  a  stroll,  to- 
nehar  da  shemm  en-nesim  day    is    the    Shem    en- 

Nesim 

(23)  rasi  dayih  we-ma  aqdirsh  —  My  head  is  dizzy  and  I 
akteb  cannot  write 

(24)  qui,  we-lakin  ma  =  Speak,  but  do  not  prolong 
tetawwiishe  lisanek  thy  speech 


146  THE    FIFTEENTH   LESSON 

(25)  mhna  1-beled  ('ashan)  =  We  went  to  the  town  to  make 
nistafhim  inquiry 

(The  use  of  ashan  (ala  shan)  is  optional.) 

(26)  ente  fahim  ana  baqul  ey  ?  =  Do  you  understand  what  I 

say? 

(27)  ya  'awwad  Allah  =  May  God  compensate 

(Street  cry  of  the  water  seller.) 

(28)  ruh  dughri  =  Go  straight  on 

(29)  ya  nas,  khafu  min  Allah    =  0  men,  fear  God 

(30)  kan  ragil  sayyad  we-kan  =  There  was  a  man  who  was 
kebir  fi  s-sinin  we-luh  zoge  a  fisherman  and  he  was 
we-talat  awlad  we-huwa  advanced  in  years  and 
faqir  el-hal  had  a  wife  and  three  sons 

and  he  was  poor  in  circum- 
stances 

(31)  in  kan  honak  huwa  aq'ad  =  If  he  is  there  I  will  stay 
ma'uh  we-inmakansheargi'  with  him  and  if  he  is  not 
ila  hena                                       I  will  come  back  here 

(32)  lamma  kutt  (kiint)  sugbay-  =  When  I  was  a  httle  boy 
yir 

(33)  ya  walad,  kunt  keslan  =  Boy,  you  have  been  very  idle 
qawi 

(34)  kan  matar  fi  1-lele  we-  =  There  was  rain  in  the  night 
kanet  er-riyah  shedide  qawi  and  the  wind  was   verj 

rough 

(35)  arba'a  we-talata  gabu  =  How  much  do  four  and  three 
kam  ?  make  ? 

(36)  ma  dumt  haiy  =  As  long  as  I  hve 

(37)  kuUima  huwa  taiyib  sar  =  Everything  that  is  good  is 
ghali  dear 

(38)  fatet  et-telate  =  It  is  past  three  o'clock 

(39)  samu  ila  1-gherub  =  They  fasted  until  sunset 

(40)  Allah  yezid  fadlek  =  God  increase  your  welfare 


THE    FIFTEENTH    LESSON  147 

(41)  'awiz  miimi  ey,  ya  walad  ?  =  What  do  you  want  of  me, 

boy? 

(42)  huwa  khaf  ketir  =  He  was  very  much  afraid 

(43)  ana  mesrur  li-anni  shuftek  ==  I  am  pleased  to  have  seen  you 

(44)  in  'isht  argi'  bi-t-tani       =  If  I  hve  I  will  go  back  again 

(45)  Mahmud,gibet-tashtwe-l-  =  Mahmud,  bring  the  basin 
ibriq  moya  we-s-sabun  li-  and  a  jug  of  water  and  the 
nighsil  yedena  (idena)  soap  for  us  to  wash  our 

hands 

(46)  a'ud  billah  min  esh-shaitan  =1  seek  refuge  with  God  from 
er-ragim  the  stoned  devil 

(Apology  made  after  yawning  ;  the  back  of  the  left  hand  is  placed  before 
the  mouth  during  a  yawn.  The  reference  is  to  the  stoning  of  the  pillars 
which  represent  the  devil  (?),  a  rite  performed  during  the  latter  part  of  the 
greater  pilgrimage.) 

(47)  a'ud  bi-rabb  el-falaq        =  I  take  refuge  with  the  Lord 

of  the  dawn 

(Apology  after  improperly  expressing  admiration  of  a  child  or  of  any  article 
in  one's  host's  possession.  The  words  are  the  opening  phrase  of  the  113th 
Sura  and  the  words  next  following  (which  need  not  be  said)  are  regarded 
as  an  exorcism  of  evil  spirits.) 

(48)  ma  sliayy  sharr  in  sha'  =  It  is  no  harm,  if  Grod  wills 

allah 

(Form  of  condolence  on  visiting  a  sick  person.) 

(49)  ma  sha'  allah  =  It  is  what  Grod  pleases 

(Expression  of  admiration  on  seeing  anything  pleasant.) 

i  (50)  yekun  lek  'ashrin  riyal  fi  =  You     shall     have     twenty 
I;     sh-shahr  dollars  a  month 

[:  (51)    tekunshe    hena    ba'de  =  Will  you  be  here  at  three 
;!     bukra    es-sa'a  telate  ? —  o'clock  the  day  after  to- 

na'am,  akun  hena  es-sa'a  da  morrow  ? — Yes,  I  shall  be 

here  at  that  time 
J  (52)  ma  teruhsh  ma'  er-ragil  =  Do  not  go  with  that  man 
da 


148  THE    FIFTEENTH    LESSON 

(53)  rah  yeshuf  abuh  =  He  went  to  see  his  father 

(54)  ma  baqulsh  hage  (Eg.)  =  I  say  nothing 

(55)  kull  en-nas  biqulu  kida  ==  Everyone  says  so 

(56)  qam  gawabuh  =  He  began  answering  him 

(57)  aye  elli  bete'uzuh  ?  =  What  is  it  you  want  ? 

(58)  kenes  beti  we-rab  li-1-  =  He  swept  my  room  and  went 
bustan  into  the  garden 

(59)  el-khaddam  kbaf  el-kelb  =  The  servant  was  afraid  of  the 
el-meqlub  savage  dog 

(60)  esh  kan  fi  qufl  el-bab  ?       =  What  was  in  the  lock  of  the 

door? 

(61)  rah  marid  min  sudruh       =  He  has  been  taken  ill  in  his 

chest 

(62)  kanfimedineminmedayin  =  There  was  in  a  certain  city 
as-Sin  ragil  khayyat  faqir  of  China  a  man  who  was  a 
we-kan  luh  walad  ismuh  tailor  and  poor,  and  he 
'Ala'  ed-Din  fe-hada  1- walad  had  a  son  called  'Ala'  ad- 
kan  ma'kus  min  sigbarub             Din,  and    this    boy    was 

mifortmiatefrom  his  child- 
hood 

(63)  ma  'am  begbder  (=  ma  =  I  cannot 
qam      baqdar,      dial,      of 
Damascus) 

(64)  ba'ref  beddak  t'qul  =^  I  know  you  will  say 

(65)  biye  betnam  bi-franga  =  She  sleeps  in  a  bed  on  the 
'ala  t-takbet,  ana  b'nam  first  floor,  I  sleep  in  the 
bel-mrabba'  'al  ard  basement  on  the  ground 

(These  three  passages,  63-5,  are  from  M.  le  commandant  Malinjoud's 
Testes  en  dialecte  de  Damas  (Journal  Asiat.  cciv,  p.  295,  etc.).  They  are 
taken  from  a  consultation  in  which  an  uneducated  woman  of  Damascus 
appeals  to  a  doctor  and  represent  the  dialect  of  the  illiterate.  Note  q=' 
in  one  place  and  in  another  =gh,  also  observe  the  way  in  which  the  vowelfl 
are  "  swallowed  ".) 


\ 


Chapter    XMII 

THE    SIXTEENTH    LESSON— VERBS    WITH    FINAL 

WEAK 

Verbs  with  Final  Weak  (Class  III) 

Some  verbs  have  final  -y  or  -w  or  -'  (assimilating  to  -y) 
and  normally  this  with  -a-  becomes  -e  (=  ay)  before  a  con- 
sonant or  -a  final ;  with  -i-  it  becomes  -i,  with  -u-  it  becomes  -u. 
Thus:— 

qarayt  becomes  qaret 

qaray  „        qara 

qarayu        „        qarii 

aqriy  „        aqri,  etc. 

These  phonetic  changes  may  be  illustrated  by  qaray  (for 
classical  qara'  "  read  ")  and  mashiy  =  "  walk  ". 

Perfect. 

masc.       fern.  masc.  fern. 

Sing.       I.  qaret  mishit 

2.  qaret       qareti  mishit       mishiti 

3.  qara         qarit  mishi         mishyit 
Plur.      1.              qarena  mishina 

2.  qaretu  mishitu 

3.  qarii  mishiyu 

(The  only  exceptional  peculiarities  to  be  noted  are  the  3rd 
fern.  sing,  and  the  3rd  plur.  of  the  -i-  verbs.) 

Imperfect. 

Sing.       1.  aqri  amshi 

2.  tiqri         tiqri  timshi       timshi 

3.  yiqrt        tiqri,  etc.    yimshi       timshi,  etc. 


150 


THE   SIXTEENTH   LESSON 


Imperative. 

Sing.        iqri         imshi 

Plur.        iqrii        imshu 
(In  'Iraq  the  -a-  is  retained  in  the  Imperfect  aqra,  taqra,  etc., 
but  the  -i-  verbs  are  as  above.) 


Special  Note  on  the  Verb  ga  "  come  " 

The  verb  ga  was  originally  gaya  and  so  had  weak  medial 
and  final.  We  have  already  met  this  verb  in  its  modem 
derivative  gab.     Ga  is  thus  conjugated  : — 


Perfect. 

masc. 

fern. 

Siiig. 

1. 

get  (git) 

/  came 

2. 

get  (git) 

geti  (giti) 

thou  earnest 

3. 

ga  (gih) 

gat 

he,  she  came 

Plur. 

1. 

gena 

(gina) 

we  came 

2. 

getu  (gitu) 

you  came 

3. 

gu 

they  came 

Imperfect. 

Sing. 

1. 

agi 

I  come 

« 

2. 

tigi 

tigi 

thou  earnest 

m 

3. 

yig'i 

tigi 

he,  she  comes 

J 

Plur. 

1. 

nigi 

we  come 

J 

2. 

tigu 

you  come 

V 

3. 

yig^ 

they  come 

Participle. 

% 

Act.  gay,  (ge),  fern,  gaye,  plur.  gayin. 

The  imperative 

of  this  verb  is  not  ir 

I  use :    instead 

we 

employ  : — 

Sing. 

masc. 
fern. 

ta'ala  (ta'a] 
ta'ali  (ta'i) 

Plur. 

ta'alu  (ta'a] 

THE   SIXTEENTH   LESSON 


151 


Notes 
We  have  already  (p.  109  above)  noted  that  mashi 
(=  mashiy),  the  active  participle  of  the  verb  mishi,  is  used  as 
an  auxiHary  to  produce  a  future  sense.  The  verb  baqa  = 
"  remain  "  is  also  often  used  in  conjunction  with  other  verbs 
and  conveys  the  meaning  of  "  become,  begin  to  ",  etc.,  thus 
baqa  yidrab  fih  =  "  he  began  to  beat  him  ",  baqa  yishrab  = 
"  he  went  on  drinking  ",  baqet  mablul  =  "  I  became  wet ", 
etc.  So  ga  can  often  imply  "  become,  be  ",  as  iu  lamma  get 
aruh  =  "  when  I  came  to  go  ",  i.e.  "  just  as  I  was  about  to 
go  ".  The  verb  sha  is  really  one  with  medial  weak  (sha'), 
but  the  final  Hamza  tending  to  become  -y  it  rather  appears 
as  one  with  both  medial  and  final  weak  making  sha,  im'perfect 
asha,  tesha,  etc.  (with  -a  in  the  imperf. -imperative)  :  it  occurs 
most  conunonly  in  the  expression  in  sha  allah  =  "  if  God 
wiUs  ". 

WORD    LIST 


Verbs 

'ata 

=  give 

khalla 

=  compel 

baqa 

=  preserve 

laqa 

=  meet 

continue 

miahi 

=  run,  go 

dahak 

=  laugh 

nesa 

=  forget 

fada 

=  be  free 

qara 

=  read 

ga 

=  come 

saliifn 

=  preserve 

gara 

=  run  away 

9alla 

=  pray 

hada  (yahdi) 

=  guide 

shar4 

=  buy  (see  iahtara,) 

hani 

=  profit 

ta'ala,  ta*a 

=  come 

idda 

=  give 

(imperative) 

ishtara 

=  buy 

wafi 

=  depart,  die 

khabbir 

=  teU 

tfiffa 

=  cause  to  die 

Other  1 

n'ords 

adi 

=  behold 

mudabbir 

=  ruler 

budd 

=  assuredly 

mekan 

=  place 

'eniyye 

=  sample 

munta§af 

=  middle 

gbet 

=  field 

ra'i 

=  grazing 

binma 

=  whenever 

sif 

=  svxtrd 

bayna 

=  short  while 

ta'ala 

=  high  (of  God) 

kerim 

=  generous 

tabi' 

=  follcncer 

kbalq 

=  creation 

talu' 

=  rising  (of  sun) 

kharuf 

=  lamb 

zaiam 

=  darkness 

leben 

=  milk 

152 


THE   SIXTEENTH   LESSON 


EXERCISE 

(1)  agat  li  gawab  ?  =  Is  there  a  letter  for  me  ? 

(2)  tufi  walidlmm  we-khalaf  =  Their  father  died  and  left 
luhum  mal  ketir  them  much  wealth 

(3)  we-lamma    tuffah    Allah  =  And  when  God  Most  High 
ta'ala  took  him 

(4)  ana  baqet  min  etba  'uh       =  I  am  one  of  his  followers 

(5)  mesit  ismuh  =  I  have  forgotten  his  name 

(6)  mishi   shuwayia   we-qam  =  He  went  a  httle  way  and 


ngi 
(7)  lamma  mishi  zeyyi  mil 


(8)  emtaget? 

(9)  we-kef  get  ?- 


-get  mashi 


(10)  huwa  yigi  en-neharde  ? 

(11)  min  qal  lek  tigi  ? 

(12)  ma  tigish  en-neharde 

(13)  ta'ala  hena 

(14)  la  budd  ma  yegi 

(15)  hadesh  ga  ? 

(16)  ga  ila  Deirut  fi  muntasaf 
as-sa'a  t-talta 

(17)  huwa  mashi  fi-s-sikka 


began  to  turn  back 
=  When  he  had  gone  about  a 

mile 
=  When  did  you  come  ? 
=  And  how  did  you  come  ? — 

I  came  on  foot 
=  Does  he  come  to  day  ? 
=  Who  told  you  to  come  ? 
=  Do  not  come  to-day 
=  Come  here 
=  He  is  sure  to  come 
=  Has  anyone  come  ? 
=  He  came  to  Deirut  about 

three  o'clock 
=  He  is  walking  along  the  road 


(18)  tufi  walidi  fe-sirt  simsar  =  My  father  died  and  I  became 


mekanuh 
(19)  akhrag  mandil  we-fih  qadr 
semsem  we-qal  Kam  yesawi 
el-ardebb   min   da  ? 


a  broker  in  his  place 
He  took  out  a  handkerchief 
in  which  was  a  measure  of 
sesame  and  said.  How 
much  is  that  worth  by  the 
ardebb  ? 

(20)  fe-qult  luh,  Maye  dirhem  =  And  I  said  to  him,  A  hundred 

dirhems 


THE    SIXTEENTH   LESSON  153 

(21)  fe-qal  li,  KJiud  et-terrasin  =  And  he  said  to  me,  Gret  the 
we-l-keyyalin  we-i'mid  ila  carriers  and  measurers 
bab  en-Nasr  ila  khan  el-  and  go  towards  the  Victory 
Gawali                                         Gate  to  the  Gawah  Khan 

(22)  a'tani  es-semsem  bi-  =  In  his  handkerchief  he  gave 
mandiluh  illi  fib  el-'eniyye  me  the  sesame  which  was 

the  sample 

(23)  fe-ga  kuU  ardebb  bi-  =  And  each  ardebb  came  to 
mayet  we-'ashrin  dirhem  a  hundred    and    twenty 

dirhems 

(24)  ga  1-kharuf  ye'allim  abuh  =  The  lamb  came  to  teach  his 
el-ra'i  father  how  to  graze 

(Proverbial  expression.    el-ra'i  =  "  grazing  ",  Terbal  noun.) 

(25)  iddini  1-list  =  Give  me  the  menu 

(26)  yini  ey  ?  =  What  does  it  mean  ? 

(27)  rabbuna  kerim,  we-huwa  =  Our  Lord  is  generous, 
el-mudabbir  hal  jrumkin  he  is  the  ruler — will  he 
yansi  kbalquh  ?  perchance      forget       his 

creatures  ? 

(28)  el-hamdu  lillah  =  Praise  be  to  God 
(reply)  sahimkum  allah  =  God  save  you 

(ans.  )yehdanawe-yehdakum  =  God  guide  us  and  you 
allah 

(This  is  said  when  anyone  sneezes.    Those  who  hear  him  make  the  reply, 
and  he  who  sneezed  gives  the  answer.) 

(29)  abqakum  allah  =  God  preserve  you 
(reply)  allah  yebqikum        =  And  may  he  preserve  you 

(30)  rub  ishtari  shuwaiya  qahwa  =  Go  and  buy  some  cofEee 

(31)  li-yahnik  =  May  it  profit  you 

(reply)  yehannik  allah         =  May  God  make  it  wholesome 

for  you 

(Said  on  offering  coffee  to  a  guest,  and  guest's  reply.) 

(32)  ta'ala  ma'i  ila  el-medina    =  Come  with  me  to  the  city 


154  THE    SIXTEENTH   LESSON 

(33)  hallani  amslii  ma'uh  =  He  made  me  walk  with  him 

(34)  ente  fadi  en-nehar  da  ?     =  Are  you  free  to-day  ? 

(35)  Allah  ye'tik  ==  God  give  to  thee 

(Form  of  refusal  to  a  beggar.) 

(36)  warrini  ...  =  Show  me  .  .  . 

(37)  warrini    kharata    K-sh  =  Show  me  a  map  of  Syria 
Sham 

(38)  ta'a  ya  gada*  (vulg.)        =  Come  here,  my  fine  fellow 

(39)  salli    'an-nabi    (='ala     =  Bless    the    Prophet 
n-nabi) 

(After  an3'one  has  improperly  expressed  admiration  for  anything.) 

(reply)  allahum  salli  'aleh    =  God  bless  him 

(Strictly  salla="  prayer  ",  here  no  doubt  "  blessing  ".) 

(40)  ma  sha'  allah  =  (It  is)  what  God  wills 

(The  more  proper  way  of  expressing  admiration  of  anything  seen.) 

(41)  sallu  (salli)  'an-nabi  =  Bless  the  Prophet 

(Invitation  by  bystander  to  check  those  who  are  in  angry  dispute.) 

or  es-sala  'an-nabi  =  Blessing  on  the  Prophet 

(Reply  as  above.) 

(42)  ba'd  ma  bisalli  ==  After  he  had  said  his  prayers 

(43)  baqet  hayna  fi  Masr  =  I  stayed   a   short   time   in 

Egypt 

(44)  er-rasul  allah  sallat  Allah  =  The  Apostle  of  God,  may  the 
'aleh  we-salam  the  blessing  of  God  be  on 

him  and  peace 

(This  is  the  proper  way  of  making  reference  to  Muhammad.  If  the 
speaker  does  not  add  the  invocation  some  bystander  usually  repeats  it  in 
a  low  voice.) 

(45)  yeminek  tigi  =  You  can  come 

(46)  ente  gay  min  ey  ?  =  Where  are  you  coming  from? 

(47)  adini  git  =  Behold,  I  have  come 

(48)  ga  fi  s-sabah  =  He  came  in  the  morning 

(49)  ga  we-b-iduh  sif  =  He  came  with  a  sword  in  his 

hand 


THE    SIXTEENTH    LESSON  155 

(50)  get  ma'  talu*  esh-shems     =  I  came  at  simrise 

(51)  kan  yimslii  fi  B-sikka  fi  =  He  was  going  along  the  road 
zalam  el-lel  fe-khaf  in  the  darkness  of  the 
shuwajya  night  and  he  was  rather 

frightened 

(52)  kutt  am&hi  li-l-ghet  beta'i  =  I  was  going  to  my  field  and 
we-lamma  ashuf  el-harami  when  I  saw  the  thief  I  ran 
fegiret  mumuh  away  from  him 

(53)  ta'rif  teqra  ? — na'am,  ya  =  Are  you  able  to  read? — Yes, 
khawage  (khcge)  sir 

(54)  fi  ey  kitab  ente  teqra  =  What  book  are  you  reading 
dilwaqt  (el-an)  ?  now  ? 

(55)  Ana  aqra  el-an  fi  kitab  =  I  am  reading  now  the 
"  esh-Shawqiyat "  Shawkiyat 

(56)  tayyib,  Shawqi  Bey  huwa  =  Good,  Shawki  Bey  is  an 
sha'ir  tayyib  qawi,  we  excellent  poet,  but  in  my 
lakin  'ala  fikri  el-kitab  da  opinion  that  book  is  too 
sa'ab  'alek                                  difficult  for  you 

(57)  hinma  ana  iisal  ila  Misr  =  When  I  go  to  Cairo  I  will 
arsil  lek  kitab  kuwayyis  send  you  a  good  book 

(58)  kanet  betidhak  'ala  ey  ?  =  What  was  she  laughing  at  ? 

(59)  slierit  labm  baqar  we-  =  I  bought  beef  and  milk  in  the 
leben  fi  s-suq  market 

(60)  warrini  kef  ash  nekhar-  =  Show  me  how  we  can  get 
reghum  min  hena  them  out  of  here 

(61)  iza  telaqit  ma'  *Ali  =  If  you  meet  Ah  tell  him  to 
khabbinih  yegini  come  to  me 

(62)  qui  luh  yegi  halan  =  Tell  him  to  come  soon 

(63)  rah  yegi  bukra  =  He  will  come  to-morrow 

(64)  eddini  shuwaiya  ziyade     =  Give  me  a  little  of  the  same 

(65)  we-fi  tani  yom  ga  keman  =  And  the  next  day  he  came 

again 

(66)  ta'al  bass  =  Ck>me,  that  will  do 


Chapter    XIX 


THE    SEVENTEENTH    LESSON— VERBS    WITH 
REPEATED   MEDIAL:     MODERN   TENSE   FORMS 

Verbs  of  Type  harr  "  be  hot  " 

Verbs  in  which  the  second  and  third  consonants  of  the 
root  are  the  same  show  certain  contractions.    Thus  : — 

Perfect.      Imperfect.  Imperative. 
Sing.       1.  harret         ahirr 

2.  masc.  harret         tehirr 
fem.  harreti        tehirri 

3.  masc.  harr  yehirr 
fem.             harrit          tehirr 

Plur.       1.  harrena       nehirr 

2.  harretu       tehirru 

3.  harru  yehirru 

It  will  be  perceived  that  verbs  of  this  kind  imitate  those 
with  final  weak  and  so  make  a  kind  of  compensation  for  the 
loss  of  a  vowel  between  the  doubled  consonants. 


hin 
hirri 


hirru 


MG. 

'add  (i) 

=  count 

gall 

=  avert 

habb  (i) 

=  like,  love 

tagg 

=  go  on  pity 

hall 

=  descend 

harr 

=  be  hot 

khass 

=  concern 

lamm 

=  pick  up 

madd 

=  stretch  out 

sahh 

=  awake 

shaqq 

=  visit  (medical,  etc.) 

THE    SEVENTEENTH    LESSON 


157 


zann  (n) 

=  suppose 

batu 

=  stomach 

fiimm 

=  mouth  (lit.) 

hanaq 

=      „      (mod.) 

ghata 

=  cover 

girdon 

=  field  mouse 

gabih 

=  untrustworthy 

sadiq 

=  honourable,  upright 

sani'  (sunna')  =  craftsman 

EXERCISE 
(1)  ballet  el-barke  bi-qudumek  =  Blessing  descended  at  your 

approach 

May  God  bless  you 

If  he  hkes 

Would  you  hke  a  httle  of 
this  fowl  ? 

May  God  avert  (it)  (from) 
you  (after  meutioning  any 
disaster,  etc.) 

What  would  you  hke  to  eat  ? 

In  the  middle  of  the  night 
the  boy  awoke  from  sleep 
and  said,  I  am  thirsty, 
and  there  was  a  jug  of 
water  by  him  and  he 
drank  of  the  water.  But 
that  jug  was  without  a 
cover,  and  a  little  field 
mouse  had  gone  down 
into  its  mouth  and  when 
the  boy  drank  from  that 
jug  this  field  mouse  went 
down  into  his  stomach 


(2)  {reply)  allah  ynbarak  fik 

(3)  ida  (iza)  kan  yehibb 

(4)  tebibb  sbuwaiyya  min  el- 
farakb  da  ? 

(5)  yegallek  allah 


(6)  esh  tehibb  takul  ? 

(7)  fi  muss  min  el-lel  sahh  el- 
walad  min  num  we-qal  Ana 
*etshan,  we-kan  ibriq  el- 
moya  'anduh  we-shirib  min 
el-moya,  we-lakin  el-ibriq 
dak  huwa  min  gher  ghata 
we-nizil  fi  fummuh  girdon 
saghir  we-lamma  el-walad 
shirib  min  el-ibriq  dak  nizil 
el-girdon  da  fi  batnuh 


158  THE   SEVENTEENTH   LESSON 

(8)  hasib,  ma  tebukhkliimsh  bi-  =  Look  out — do  not  splash  me 
1-moya  with  the  water 

(9)  tehibb  el-khubz  (-esh)  ?        =  Would  you  like  some  bread  ? 

(10)  el-muslimin    yebiggu    fi  =  MusUms  make  the  pilgrimage 
sbahr  el-Higga  in  the  month  of  el-Higga 

(11)  midd  idek  we-limmiha  min  =  Put  out  your  hand  and  take 
'ala  l-ar(J  it  up  from  the  ground 

(12)  zannetuh  ragil  sadiq  =  I  supposed  him  an  upright 

man 

(13)  ma  kuntisb  azunnek  ragil  =  I  did  not  think  you  were  such 
qabih  kide  an  untrustworthy  man 

(14)  huwa  zannek  sani*  maliir    =  He  thought  you  a  skilful 

craftsman 

(15)  zannetna  sunna'  mabirin  ?  =  Did  you  suppose  us  to  be 

skilled  craftsmen  1 

(16)  da  ma  yekbessenash  =  That  does  not  concern  us 

(17)  sert  tisbeqq  'aliye  ('aliye  =  You  used  to  visit  me 
=  *aleya) 

The  Verb — Supplementary,  Modern  Tense  Forms 

We  now  turn  to  the  tense  formations  which  have  been 
developed  in  modern  Arabic,  some  of  them  more  or  less  the 
fictions  of  the  educated  who  have  been  trying  (mistakenly) 
to  press  Arabic  into  the  tense  scheme  which  has  been  evolved 
in  the  Indo-European  languages  and  which  is  really  not 
adapted  to  Arabic.  Still,  however,  it  has  a  certain  vogue  and 
can  be  employed  in  the  expression  of  time,  so  should  not  be 
altogether  ignored. 

(i)  Pluperfect. 

The  pluperfect  "  I  had  written  ",  etc.,  can  be  expressed 
by  using  the  perfect  of  kan  with  the  perfect  of  another  verb, 
thus  : — 


! 


I 


THE    SE\TENTEENTH    LESSON  159 

kimt  ketebt       =  /  had  written 
kan  keteb  =  he  had  written 

kanet  ketebet    =  she  had  written 
kiinna  ketebna  —■  we  liad  written,  etc. 

(ii)  The  Imperfect. 

The  European  imperfect  "  I  was  writing  ",  etc.,  can  be 
expressed — 

(a)  By  using  the  perfect  of  kan  with  the  imperfect  of  another 
verb — 

kimt  akteb         =  /  was  loriting 
kan  yekteb        =  he  was  writing,  etc. 
(6)  By  using  the  perfect  of  kan  with  the  active  participle — 
kimt  katib         =  /  ivas  writing 
kan  katib  =  he  was  writing 

kanet  katibe      =  she  was  writing 
kunna  katibin   =  we  were  rvriting,  etc. 
(c)    By  tlie  perfect  of  baqa  with  the  imperfect  of  another 
verb — 

baqa  yesma*      =  he  was  hearing 
baqet  asma'       =  /  was  hearing,  etc. 
{d)    By  the  perfect  of  sar  with  the  imperfect  of  another 
verb — 

sar  yesma'  =  he  was  hearing,  etc. 

(iii)  The  Present. 
The  present  sense  can  be  conveyed  by : — 
(a)  The  use  of  the  active  participle,  as — 
huwa  katib        —  he  is  writing 
hiya  katibe        =  she  is  writing,  etc. 
(6)     The  use   of   'ammal,    'ammale,    'ammalin   with   the 
imperfect  of  another  verb,  thus — 

'ammal  asma'  =  I  am  hearing,  etc.  (see  p.  108  above) 


160  THE    SEVENTEENTH    LESSON 

(iv)  The  Future. 
The  future  sense  can  be  expressed  by — 
(a)    The  use  of  the  imperfect  of  kan  with  the  perfect  of 
another  verb,  thus — 

akun  ketebt       =  /  shall  ivrite 
yekun  keteb      =  he  will  write 
tekun  ketebet    =  she  will  write,  etc. 
(6)  The  use  of  bidd-  with  personal  suffix  and  the  imperfect — 

biddi  asma'  —  I  shall  hear,  etc.  (feee  p.  109  above) 
(c)   The  use  of  the  participle  rayih  with  the  imperfect,  as — 
ana  rayih  asma'  =  I  am  going  to  hear,  etc.  (see  p.  109  above) 
{d)    In  "  western  "  Arabic  it  is  also  possible  to  use  the 
participle  mashi  in  the  same  way,  thus — 
mashi  yesma'     =  he  will  hear 
mashiye  tesma'  =  she  is  going  to  hear,  etc. 

EXERCISE 

1)  kanet  raga'et  qable  ghurub  =  She   had   come   before   the 
esh-shems  sunset 

2)  kanu  khadu  felus  min  et-  =  They  had  taken  money  from 
tuggar  dol  those  merchants 

3)  ehna  kunna  kharagna  qabl  =  We  had  gone  out  before  that 
es-sa'a  di  hour 

4)  kan  galis  bona  'and  abuna  =  He  was  sitting  there  by  the 

side  of  our  father 

5)  ana  kunt  sakin  taht  min  =  I    was    hving    under    (he 
en-nazir  inspector 

6)  esh  rayih  te'mal  dilwaqt  ?  =  What  are  you  going  to  do 

now  ? 

7)  rayih    aq'ud    we-ashrab  =  I  am  going  to  sit  down  and 
dukhkhan  smoke 


THE    SEVENTEENTH    LESSON  IGl 

(8)  ana  mashi  aqiid  hena  ma'  =  I  am  going  to  sit  here  with 
ei-ustad  the  professor 

(Note:  U9tad= professor,  like  French  "patron"  for  the  keeper  of  a 
restaurant,  etc.) 

(9)  akun  ketebt  gawab  qable  =  I  shall  write  a  letter  before 
ma  akhrug  I  go  out 

(10)  ente  biddek  tergi'  ila  1-  =  You  will  come  back  to  this 
beled  di  we-hna  biddena  country  again  and  we  shall 
neshufektani  see  you  once  more 

(11)  kef  biddi  a'mal  ?  =  What  shall  I  do  ? 

(12)  biddena  natla'  ila  barra     =  We  must  go  away 

(13)  baqa  yesma'  kalam  el-  =  He  was  listening  to  the  words 
ustad  of  the  professor 


Chapter    XX 

THE    EIGHTEENTH    LESSON— USE    OF    THE 
PARTICLES 

We  have  already  met  with  and  used  most  of  the  commoner 
particles,  but  it  will  be  well  now  to  make  a  summary  of  those  in 
general  use.  These  particles  are  of  use  only  in  sentences  which 
contain  either  nouns  or  verbs,  or  both,  though  it  must  be 
understood  that  eith  er  of  these  may  be  implied  and  not  expressed. 
Thus,  if  I  ask  "  who  has  come  ?  "  the  answer  may  be  either 
"Zayd  has  come  ",  or  "  Zayd  "  alone,  and  this  latter  is  a 
complete  sentence,  because  "  has  come  "  is  implied  from  the 
preceding  question  :  so  "  has  Zayd  come  in  ?  "  receives  a 
complete  answer  from  the  verb  "  he  has  come  in  "  where  the 
(implied)  pronoun  refers  to  Zayd  ;  it  might  even  receive  an 
answer  by  the  particle  "  yes  "  or  "  no  ",  though  in  fact  the 
former  means  "  assuredly  "  followed  by  the  implied  "  he  has 
come  in  ",  whilst  la  =  "  no  "  is  simply  the  classical  negative 
"  not"  (still  used  in  South  Arabia)  followed  by  the  implied  verb. 
The  fact  remains  that  the  particles  are  only  used  as  accessory  to  | 
nouns  and  verbs,  and  they  serve  to  connect  words  with  words 
or  sentences  with  sentences.  Arabic  does  not  possess  the 
mechanical  system  of  punctuation  recently  developed  in 
written  English  and  the  absence  of  this  artificial  apparatus 
makes  it  the  more  necessary  to  connect  statements  with 
suitable  particles.  Thus,  we  may  say  written  Arabic  has  to 
adhere  more  nearly  to  the  spoken  language,  and  this  is  true 
even  of  the  classical  speech,  because  the  arrangement  and 
connection  of  phrases  cannot  be  camouflaged,  as  in  English, 
by  a  system  of  dots  and  dashes. 


\ 


THE    EIGHTEENTH   LESSON 


163 


The  more  important  particles  are  of  two  kinds  (i)  the 
prepositions,  which  connect  nouns  or  verbs  with  nouns 
(including  noun  sentences),  some  of  these  prepositions  being 
particles  proper,  others  actual  nouns  used  as  prepositions, 
and  (ii)  conjunctions  which  connect  nouns  with  nouns,  verbs 
with  verbs,  or  sentences  with  sentences. 

(i)  Prepositions  proper. 

*ala,  'ale-  =  upon,  against,  by 

=  he  passed  by  me 


fat  'aleya 
*ala  hasab 

'ala  shan,  'ashan  (Eg. 
'ala  fikri 
ma  'alesh 
li  haqq  'alek 
*an,  'ann-  =from,  by 
huwa  wakil  'annuh 
sa'al  'an- 


=  according  to  .  .  . 

=  because  of  .  .  .,  in  order  to 

=  according  to  my  opinion 

=  no  matter 

=  /  have  a  claim  against  you 

=  he  is  his  agent 
=  to  enquire  about 


'and  =  with,  in  possession  of  (see  p.  49  above) 


kam  'andek  ? 
'andek  ! 

'andek  akhbar  ? 
bi-  =  by,  at,  in,  with 
er-ragil    illi    galis 

ganbi 
ragil  bi-daqn 
ahsan  bi-ketir 
bi-l-lel 


=  what's  the  time  by  you  ? 

=  stop ! 

=  Aove  you  any  news  ? 

bi-=  the  mxin  sitting  at  my  side 


=  a  man  with  a  beard 

=  much  better 

=  by  night 

(bi-  may  thus  be  used  with  any  noun  of  time,  but  it 
should  not  be  used  with  a  noun  of  place,  unless  the 
place  is  vague,  it  might  be  used  for  "  in  the  country  " 
but  ought  not  to  be  used  for  "  in  Cairo  ".) 


164  THE    EIGHTEENTH    LESSON 

bi-llah  =  hy  God 

(The  literary  form  is  wa-llah,  the  preposition  wa- 
thus  used  is  rare  and  probably  unknown  to  the  un- 
lettered.) 

fi  =  in  with  nouns  of  place  or  time 

hatta,  hadd  (Eg.)  =  wp  to,  until 

ila,  ile-  =  to,  towards 

ke-,  ki-  (orig.  ka-)  =  like,  ki-da  (kiza)  =  thus 

li-  =  to  (owner,  recipient,  etc.)  (see  p.  50  above) 
gib  li  =  give  me 

ma'  =  with  (see  p.  50  above) 

ma'ek  el-haqq  =  you  are  right 

min,  minn-  =^from 

sa'a  min  dahab  =  a  watch  of  gold 

hiiwa  minnina  =  he  is  one  of  our  party 

tagir  min  et-tiggar        =  a  certain  merchant 
min  zaman  =  for  a  long  time  past 

wasalni  min  el-khawage  .  .  .  =  received  of  Mr.  .  .  . 

mata  =  until  (very  rare)  (see  below.    It  is  now  found  before 
verbal  sentences  and  so  has  become  a  quasi-conjunction.) 

(ii)  Nouns  Used  as  Prepositions. 
ba'd  =  after 

ba'di  da  =  after  this 

ben  =  between 

beni  we-benu  =  between  him  and  me 

ben  el-benen  (dual)       =  middling 
foq  =  above 

gher  =  without  (as  negative,  see  p.  86  above) 
khalf  =  behind 

misl  (mitl)  =  like  (very  rare  in  colloquial) 
qabl  =  before 

ga  qabl  el-waqt  illi .  .  .— he  cam£.  before  (followed  by 

verbal  sentence) 


THE    EIGHTEENTH    LESSON  165 

qadd  =  up  to 
taht  =  under 
wara  =  hehind 
zey  (Eg.)  =  like 

ezey  =  how  1 

ezeyek  ?  =  how  are  you  ? 

A  sentence  may  be  equivalent  to  a  noun,  thus  "  fasting  is 
good  for  you  "  =  "  that  you  fast  is  good  ".  Such  sentences 
are  often  introduced  by  inn  =  "  indeed  ",  or  ma  =  "  which  " 
(in  apposition  to  the  sentence).  From  this  we  get  the  con- 
necting particles — 

(a)  with  inn.      gher  inn   =  unless 
'ala  inn     =  that 

le-inn        =  in  order  that  or  simply  that 
ma*  inn     =  altlwugh 
(6)  ma.  ba'd  ma    =  after  {that) 

qable  ma  =  before  {thai) 
'ashan  ma  (*ala  shan  ma)  (Eg.)  = 
because 
(c)  So  hatta  =  until 

mata(  with  perfect)  =  untU  (not  very  common) 

Conjunctions 

we-,  wa-,  wi-  =  "  and,"  connecting  words  or  sentences, 
fe-,  fa-  =  "  and,"  connecting  sentences  with  the  implication 

that  the  second  results  from  or  foUows  after  the  first. 
lakin,  we-lakin  =  "  but,"   may  take  the  personal  sufl&xes, 

we-lakinni  =  "  but  I  .  .  ." 
amma,  we-amma  =  "  but." 
aw,  6  =  "  or." 

iza,  iza  kan  (as  though  one  word)  =  "  if." 
in  =  "  if." 


166  THE    EIGHTEENTH    LESSON 

16,  "  law"  (we-law)  =  "if  "  (implying  that  the  condition  did  not 
occur,  e.g.  "  if  he  had  come  I  would  have  gone  out "). 
lamma  =  "  when," 
ilia  =  "  unless,"  "  except,"  ilia  inn  (followed  by  sentence)  = 

"  unless  .  .  ." 
madam  =  "  inasmuch  as." 
hatta  =  "  until." 

ya  .  .  ,  y  .  .  .  =  "  either  .  .  .  or  .  .  ." 
wala  .  .  .  wala  .  .  .  =  "  neither  .  .  .  nor  .  .  ." 

The  conjunction  we-  may  be  used  with  iyya  (we-iyya, 
'Iraq  wiya)  in  the  sense  of  "  with  ",  as  ruh  we-iyyah  =  "  go 
with  him,"  khubz  wiya  lahm  =  "  bread  with  meat "  ('Iraq). 
Really  this  is  the  conjunction  followed  by  the  accusative 
case  (the  "  accusative  of  accompaniment "  of  the 
grammarians)  and  appears  in  the  classical  language  in  such 
constructions  as  : — 

siri  we-t-tariq  musri'e  =  March  along  the  road  with  haste 

( =  march  and  the  road  hastening) 
It  is  not  permitted  to  omit  the  conjunctions  in  a  series  and 
express  the  last  only,  as  is  done  in  English,  thus  "  the  dog, 
the  ass,  and  the  horse  "  =  el-kelb  we-1-himar  we-1-hisan. 

The  conjimction  we-  allows  us  to  introduce  a  descriptive 
of  the  subject  or  object  of  a  verb,  as  "  I  saw  him  as  I  was 
going  along  the  road "  =  shuftuh  we-ana  rayih  fi  s-sikka 
(=  "  I  saw  him  and  I  was  going  in  the  road  "). 

Conditional  Sentences 

In  conditional  sentences  the  "  if  "  clause  is  introduced  by 
iza,  iza  kan,  or  in,  or  by  16,  law,  or  in  if  the  supposition  is 
improbable  or  is  known  not  to  have  happened,  and  inn, 
le-inn  may  be  joined  to  the  16,  law.  In  the  literary  language 
the  consequence  is  often  introduced  by  fe-,  but  this  is  not 
common  in  the  colloquial. 


[ 


THE    EIGHTEENTH    LESSON  167 

iza  kunt  qasid  tekteb  li-  =  //  you  mean  to  write  abroad 

belad  barran 
iza  kunt  ruht  =  If  you  had  gone 

iza  kan  yigi  =If}ie  comes 

iza.  kunte  minnek  "^U  ^  ^^^  2/^^ 

Sentences  Expressing  Cause  and  Purpose 
As  abeady  noted  it  is  possible  to  use  a  second  verb  without 
a  connecting  particle  (cf.  p.  108  above),  and  if  the  first  verb 
expresses  ability,  intention,  etc.,  the  second  naturally  intro- 
duces the  sentence  expressing  purpose,  etc.,  but  very  often 
the  purpose  is  introduced  by  the  preposition  li-  =  "  to,  for  " 
which  thus  used  governs  a  sentence  instead  of  a  noun. 

Notes 

"  about."  The  English  "  about "  sometimes  means 
(i)  "nearly,"  as  "he  came  to  the  mosque  about  three 
o'clock  "  =  ga  ila  el-gami'  fi  s-sa'a  t-talit  taqriban  ("  he 
came  to  the  mosque  at  three  o'clock  nearly") ;  (ii)  "con- 
cerning," as  istafhim  'alek  =  "  he  enquired  about  you 
(concerning  you)  "  ;  (iii)  "  about  to  ...  "  implies  the 
future  tense,  i.e.  "  going  to  .  .  ."  (see  p.  109  above). 

"  above."  Normally  foq,  as  es-sath  foq  ed-dar  =  "  the  roof 
is  above  the  house  "  ;  but  (i)  "  above  all  "  =  qadam, 
(ii)  "  over  and  above "  =  we-*alawe  *ala  da,  whilst 
(iii)  "  above  "  often  means  "  more  than  "  and  is  expressed 
by  the  comparative  (see  p.  91)  with  min. 

**  at."  Place  or  time,  bi-  (not  for  definitely  named  places) 
and  fi.  E.g.  sikit  bi-wahde  el-qiriy  el-qaribe  min  el- 
Mansura  =  "  he  lives  in  one  of  the  villages  near  Mansura." 
(i)  "  at  "  sometimes  denotes  cause,  as  "  he  was  astonished 
at   it  "  =  yit'igib    minnuh  ;     (ii)    "  towards  "    as    "he 

t    looked  at  me  "  =  nazar  ileya  ;  (iii)  "  with,"  as  "  I  came 
at  sunrise  "  =  get  ma'  talu'  esh-shems  ;    (iv)  "  before," 


168  THE    EIGHTEENTH    LESSON 

as  "  who  is  at  the  door  ?  "  =  min  'ala  1-bab  ?  (v)  "  at 
once  "  =  dilwaqt. 

"  by."  Instrument,  time,  or  place.  "  By  night  "  =  bi-l-lel 
(=  in  the  night),  "  he  travelled  by  steamer  "  =  safir  fi 
1-babur  (=in  the  steamer),  "I  passed  by  a  city"  = 
marret  bi-medine.  The  arithmetical  "  by  "  is  usually 
fi  =  "  in  ",  as  ralate  fi  khamse  =  "  three  (multiplied)  by 
five,"  da  talate  amtar  fi  arb'a  =  "  that  is  three  metres 
by  four." 

"  for  "  sometimes  means  "  to  ",  i.e.  the  person  who  is  to 
receive,  sometimes  "on  account  of ",  as  el-hamdu  li-llah 
'ala  da  =  "  praise  to  God  for  this." 

"  to,"  *'  towards  "  =  ila,  so  "  until  ",  etc.  ;  i.e.  in  measure 
of  space  or  time,  thus  baqet  hona  min  awwal  esh-shahr 
ila  mumtasafe  =  "  I  stayed  there  from  the  first  to  the 
middle  of  the  month."  "  to "  sometimes  does  not 
denote  actual  place  or  time  and  then  often  corresponds 
to  'ala,  as  izimuh  'ala  1-ghada  =  "  invite  him  to  dinner." 
In  English  "  to  "  often  introduces  the  infinitive  which 
corresponds  with  the  subordinate  verb  in  Arabic,  thus 
"  I  am  not  able  to  hear  "  =  "  I  am  not  able  (that)  I  hear  ". 
For  "  to  ",  expressing  purpose,  see  ma  aqdirsh  asma* 
above  (p.  108). 

"  from,"  normally  min  =  "  from  ",  relating  to  time  or  place, 
as  saqatet  min  idi  =  "  it  fell  from  my  hand,"  min  yom 
ila  yom  =  "  from  day  to  day."  Sometimes  another 
preposition  is  implied,  as  "he  dismounted  from  his 
horse  "  =  "  .  .  .  from  upon  his  horse,"  nizil  min  'ala 
farasuh.  Cause  and  material  are  also  denoted  by  min, 
as  sa'a  min  dahab  —  "  &  watch  (made)  from  gold,"  but 
in  denoting  material  the  preposition  is  not  necessary,  the 
noun  of  material  can  be  in  apposition  (this  is  true  of  all 
the  Semitic  languages).  Note,  khadt  el-'ilm  'anuh  = 
"  I  acquired  knowledge  from  him." 


THE    EIGHTEENTH    LESSON  169 

"  in."  Either  bi-  or  fi  (see  "  at  "  above).  "  In  front  of  "  = 
amam,  bidla  min  =  "  instead  of  .  .  ."  leqet  minnuli 
asad  =  "  I  found  in  him  a  lion." 

"of."  Material  (see  "  from  ")  as  libasuh  min  el-harir  =  "his 
garment  is  of  silk."  cause  (also  "from")  huwa  mat -min 
el-kolira  =  "  he  died  of  cholera."  amsekuh  =  "  they 
laid  hold  of  him." 

"  on,"  in  such  as  "  put  on  "  the  "  on  "  is  merely  due  to  English 
idiom,  thus  Ubas  sitrak  =  "  put  on  your  coat  "  ;  some- 
times the  "  on  "  suggests  the  Arabic  participle  as  qabeltuh 
we-ana  dahib  ila  bet  =  "  I  met  him  on  my  way  home  " 
(of.  p.  117)  ;  we-bi-1-guml'e  =  "  on  the  whole,"  safar 
li-yomuh  =  "  he  set  out  on  that  very  day." 

"  with,"  instnmient  bi-  as  ketebti  bi-qalam  =  "  I  wrote  with 
a  pen,"  "  in  company  with  "  =  ma*  (cf.  p.  50),  dahab 
bi-l-lel  =  "  he  went  away  with  the  night." 


I 


Appendk  I 

CONVERSATION 

(i)  Ordinary  Courtesies 

A.  salam  'alekum  =  Peace  be  on  yon 

B.  we-'alekum  salam  =  And     on     you     be     peace 

{Muslims  only) 

A.  neharlmin  sa'id  =  May  our  day  be  prosperous 

B.  neharkiim      sa'id      we-  =  May  your  day  be  prosperous 

mubarek  and  blessed 

A.  kef  halkum  ?  =  How  is  your  health  {gazing 

earnestly  at  the  visitor) 

B.  el-hamdu  li-llah  =  Praise  be  to  God 

A.  awhashtena  =  You  have  made  us  lonely 

{not  having  seen  visitor  for 
long) 

B.  Allah  ma  yuhishek  =  May  God  never  let  you  !eel 

lonely 

A.  {presenting  cup  of  coffee,  =  Be  pleased 

first  taking  sip  himself 
to  show  that  it  contains 
nothing  evil)  itfaddal 

B.  {taking   the   cup)   qahwa  =  May  coffee  (be  found)   for 

dayiman  ever  (in  your  house) 

A.    damet  hayatek  =  May  your  vigour  continue 

A.  {after  a  pause)  =  You  have  honoured  us 

tesharraftena 

B.  Allah  yahfazek  =  May  God  preserve  you 

(The  visitor  is  careful  to  sit  so  that  the  sole  of  his  foot 
does  not  face  any  of  the  company.    An  inferior  in  the  presence 


172  APPENDIX  I 

of  his  superior  conceals  his  hands  in  his  sleeves — be  careful 
not  to  do  this  in  ordinary  intercourse.  Express  no  admiration 
of  anything  seen  as  this  is  the  same  as  asking  for  it  to  be  given 
you,  nor  of  any  person,  child,  etc.,  present — a  father  would 
be  deeply  distressed  at  hearing  any  favourable  comment 
on  his  son  and  you  would  be  considered  responsible  for  any 
evil  that  happened  to  him.  At  most  say  "  It  is  as  God  wills  ". 
If  you  state  what  you  intend  to  do  in  the  future  be  careful  to 
add  in  sha'Allah  =  "  if  God  wills.") 

At  the  end  of  a  visit. 

B.    khatirek  or   'an   iznek      =  By  your  leave 
A.    ma'a    (ma')    s-selame   or  =  (Go)  in  peace 

awaqatek  sa'ide  May  your    times    be  pros- 

perous 

To  a  sick  man. 

ma  *alek  ilia  l-'afiye  in  sha'  =  May  there  be  for  thee  nothing 
allah. — (Reply.) Allah,  ye' aiik  but  health  if  God  will. — 

God  give  thee  health 

To  one  who  has  recovered  from  illness. 

el-hamdu  li-Uah  'ala  l-*afiye.      ==  Praise  be  to  God  for  recovery 
(Reply.)    allah  ye'afik  of  health 

When  anyone  sneezes. 

subhan  Allah  or  el-hamdu  li-  =  Praised  be  God. — God  direct 
llah. — (^e^Z?/.)  Allah  yahdini         me  and  you 
we-yahdikum 

After  a  bath  or  visit  to  the  harher. 

na'iman. — (Reply.)   Allah  yen  =  Good     favour. — God     send 
*im  'alek  good  favour  on  you 


APPENDIX   I  173 

To  one  starting  on  a  journey. 

tariq  es-selame. — (Reply.)         =  A  journey  o!  peace. — God 
Allah  yesellinek  give  you  peace 

On  return  from  a  journey. 

selamat,    hamdu    li-llah    *ala  ==  Greetings.   Praise  to  God  for 

s-salamat. — (Reply.)     Allah  safety. — God  save  you 

yesallimek 

Beggars. 

ya  muhannin,  ya  rabb.  or  li-  =  0  compassionate,  0  Lord. — 

Hah  ya  muhsinin  or  ya  ma  To  Grod,  0  beneficent. — 0 

ente  kerim,  ya  rabb.,  etc.  how  generous  art  thou,  0 

(Reply    to   one   who    begs.)  Lord. — God    open    upon 

aUah  yeftah  'alek  or  Allah  thee. — God  give  to  thee. — 

ya'tik     or     kattar     Allah  God  increase  thy  favours 
khayrek,  etc. 

At  a  feast. 

'id  mubarek  'alek  =  May  the  feast  be  blessed  to 

you 
(Reply.)    'alek  abrak  el-a'yad  =  The  blessings  of  festivals  for 

you 

At  New  Year. 

kulli  sene  we-nte  salim  =  Every  year  you  in  health 

(Reply.)    we-nte  salim  =  And  you  in  health 

(ii)  At  a  Hotel  or  Restauraijt 

lokanda  fen  ?  =  Where  is  there  a  hotel  ? 

di  ahsan  lokanda  fi  1-beled  ?  =  Is  this  the  best  hotel  in  the 

town? 
min  sahib  el-lokanda  di  ?        =  Who  is  the  landlord  of  this 

hotel? 


174  APPENDIX   I 

ya  sahib,  fih  oda  ne^ife  ?        =  Landlord,  have  you  a  clean 

room? 
bi-kam  el-6da  di  ?  =  How  much  is  this  room  ? 

da  ghali,  khud  khamast'asher  =  That    is     too    dear,     take 

qirsh  fifteen  piastres, 

'andukumshe  hadir  li-ghada  ?  =  Have  you  anything  ready  for 

dinner? 
ya  walad,  kam  ?  —  Waiter,  how  much  to  pay? 

el-lista  fen  ?  =  Where  is  the  menu  ? 

da  ghali,  ente  ghaltan  =  That  is  too  much,  you  have 

made  a  mistake. 
odati  fen  ?  =  Where  is  my  room  ? 

mustorah  fen  ?  =  Where  is  the  W.C.  ? 

(iii)  In  a  Shop 

Shopkeeper,  marhaban  bikum,  =  Welcome,  sir,  what  do  you 

ya  khawage,  esh  tinzur  ?  desire  ? 

Customer,  'andukum  sigagid  ?  =  Have  you  any  carpets  ? 
S.  *andi  sigagid  'aliye,  itfaddal  =  I  have  carpets  of  the  best 

we-asMfha  quahty,   please   sit  down 

and  I  will  show  them 
C.  ana  'awiz  es-siggade  di  =1  would  like  this  carpet 
S.  tayyib,  ya  sidi,   di  'aliye  =  Very  well,  sir,  that  is  one  of 

ketir  excellent  quahty 

C.  qui  li  nehaytu  'ala  akbir  =  Tell  me  what  is  your  lowest 

teman  price 

S.  ifsil  zeye  ma  ente  'awiz     =  Offer  whatever  you  feel  dis- 
posed 
C.  ente  qui  li  qable  tamanba  =  You  say  its  price  first 
S.  beni      we-ben      hadretek  =  As   between   me   and  your 

tamanba     'ashrin    gin  eh  honour  its  price  will  be 

bass  twenty  pounds,  no  more 

C.  ana  addi  lek  had'asher      =  I  would  give  you  eleven 


APPENDIX    I  175 

S.  la,  yiftah  Allah  =  No,  God  will  give  me  my 

living 

C.  tayyib,  had'asher  we-nuss  =  Very  well,  eleven  and  a  half 

S.  ytTzuq  Allah  =  Let  God  sustain  me 

C.  ma  yahteg,  akhir  el-kelam  =  No  matter.  My  final  word 
addi    lek    etn'asher,    ide  is   that  I  will  give   thee 

kunt  terid  khud  el-feliis,  twelve.    If  thou  wilt  take 

in  kan  ma  terid  fe-wahid  the  money  ;   if  not,  some 

gherek  yus'ufni  bi-hageti  other  than  thee  will  help 

me  in  my  affair 

S.  *ala  khatirek,  ya  tera'  =  At  your  pleasure.  May  it  be 
tehsin  'amrek  that   your   business   goes 

prosperously 

C.  lesh  te'mal  ma'i  kida  ? —  =  Why  act  with  me  thus  ? — 
khallesek    etn'asher    we-  Would  twelve  and  a  half 

nuss  ?  satisfy  thee  ? 

S.  ya  akhi,  ma  teq'udshe  =  My  brother,  do  not  continue 
tinaki£ni:balashmenakfa.  to  worry  me.    Enough  of 

Da  mush  shira  di  illi  ente  annoyance.  That  is  not  the 

tishtirih  way  for  you  to  do  business 

C.  khallesek  telat'asher  ?         =  Would  thirteen  satisfy  thee  ? 

S.  'ase  turid  hidiya  minni       =  Perhaps  you  expect  a  present 

from  me 

C.  la,  kef  da  hidiya  ? —  =  No,  how  can  it  be  a  present  ? 
khallesek  telat'asher  we-  — Would  thirteen  and  a 

nuss  ?  half  satisfy  ? 

S.  tayyib,  aqul  ya  ma  yi'  =  All  right.  I  will  say,  How 
awwad.   Allah  yikassibek  great  is  he  who  consoles, 

hat    el-felus.        khasran  May  God  give  thee  profit. 

kasban,  nihaitu  hadihna.  Hand   over   the   money  ; 

bi'na  we-s-selam  loss  or  gaia  in  what  we 

have  sold,  that  is  the  end 
of  the  matter 


176  APPENDIX    I 

(iv)  Military 

imshi  li-qudam.     'andek  =  March.    Halt 

li-qudam.    inzil  =  Forward.    Dismount 

sallim  nefsek.    irmi  silahek     =  Surrender.    Lay  down  your 

arms 
ma  takhafush,   etna   'asakir  =  Do  not  be  afraid,  we  are 

inkelizi  English  soldiers 

shekh  el-beled  fen  ?  =  Where  is  the  head  man  of  the 

village 
hatuh  Lena  =  Bring  him  here 

'andukum  min   el-khel   kam  =  How  many  horses  have  you  ? 

ras  ? 
nedfa'  lek  neqdiye  li-l-kuU      =  I  will  pay  cash  for  every- 
thing 
in   ma   gama'tush   el-kull   fi  =  If  you  do  not  collect  every- 

sa'aten  arsil  lekmn  thing  in  two  hours  I  will 

'asakari  send  my  soldiers 

qui  bi-1-haqq,  ma  tikdibsh      =  Speak  the  truth,  tell  no  lies 
we-ma   takhfish    el-haga    fa-  =  And  do  not  hide  anything  or 

yesir  sharra  lukum  it  will  be  the  worse  for  you 

akhad  el-kull  we-addi  lek  bih  =  I  will  take  everything  and 

wasl  give  you  a  receipt 

ma  takhafsh,  lek  el-felus  bala  =  Do  not  be  afraid,  you  will  be 

shakk  paid  without  fail 

ente  mabzum  ?  =  Are  you  a  deserter  ? 

emta  f arart  ?  =  When  did  you  escape  ? 

min  en  farart  ?  =  Where  did  you  escape  from  ? 

el-qarawTil  fen  ?  =  Where  are  the  outposts  ? 


Appendix  II 
THE    CALL    TO    PRAYER 

Allah  akbar  =  Grod  is  greatest 

(Twice  repeated  in  Malikite  rite  in  Upper  Egypt  and  Africa 
generally,  except  Lower  Egypt ;  in  other  rites  four  times 
repeated.) 

ashhad  an  la  ilah  ilia   -llah  =  I  testify  that  there  is  no  god 
we-Muhammad  rasul  Allah  save  God  and  that  Muham- 

{twice)  mad  is  the  apostle  of  God 

hayy  ila  s-salat,  hayy  ila  1-  =  Up  to  prayer,  up  to  salvation 
felah  (tivice) 

es-salat    kher    min    en-num  =  Prayer  is  better  than  sleep 
(twice) 

AUah  akbar  =  God  is  greatest  {twice) 

la  -llah  ilia  -Hah  =  There  is  no  god  but  God 

(once) 


Appendix  III 
SORATU  L-FlTIHAH 

(In  colloquial  Arabic  we  are  not,  of  course,  concerned  with 
the  classical  forms  of  literature,  still  less  with  theology, 
which  for  the  most  part  the  foreigner  will  be  wise  to  leave 
alone  unless  some  Muslim  starts  the  subject.  Still  it  will  not 
be  inappropriate  to  take  this  one  passage,  the  first  sura  or 
section  of  the  Qur'an  which  is  used  by  Muslims  very  much 
as  the  Lord's  Prayer  is  used  by  Christians  and  will  often  be 
seen  used  in  ornamental  inscriptions  :  it  is  recited  together 
by  two  merchants  when  they  have  concluded  a  bargain  and 
figures  prominently  on  many  other  occasions,  besides  which 
phrases  from  it  will  be  recognized  as  appearing  in  various 
salutations,  etc.  The  Arabic  is,  of  course,  classical  in  form 
and  hardly  intelligible  to  the  average  uneducated  fellah,  so 
in  the  notes  various  grammatical  remarks  and  rules  appear 
which  will  be  unfamiliar  to  the  learner.) 

(The  heading  "  Suratu  1-Fatihah  "  means  "  section  of  the 
opening  ",  the  final  -u  in  Suratu  is  the  classical  nominative 
termination  :  the  -at  preceding  will  be  recognized  as  the 
feminine  termination  used  before  the  genitive  (cf.  sect.  26), 
the  word  appears  in  the  Dictionary  as  Sura.) 
(1)  Bismi-Uahi  r-Rahmani  r-  —  In  the  name  of  God  the  Com- 

Rahim  passionate,  the  Merciful 

bi-  =  "  in,"  then  -(i)sm  =  "  name  "  with  -i  added  for  the 
classical  genitive  which  has  to  follow  the  preposition. 
r-Rahman  —  "  the  Compassionate,"  the  article  assimilated 
to  the  following  R,  and  the  -i  added  as  mark  of  the 
genitive ;     r-Rahim  =  "  the    Merciful,"    again    the    article 


APPENDIX    III  179 

assimilated,  but  this  time  no  added  -i  because  the  final  short 
vowels  for  case  or  mood  are  dropped  at  the  pause  which  ends 
a  verse.  (Muslims  of  the  orthodox  type  do  not  have  pictures 
in  their  houses  and  you  will  often  see  this  verse,  sometimes 
in  a  peasant's  hut  beautifully  written  in  white  chalk  on 
the  mud  waU.  The  verse  is  commonly  used  as  an  exclamation 
on  seeing  anjrthing  extraordinary,  and  as  an  invocation  before 
commencing  any  undertaking.) 

(2)  Al-hamdu  li-llahi  Rabbi  =  Praise  to  God,  Lord  of  the 
l-'alamin  worlds 

hamd  =  "  praise,"  with  the  nominative  ending  -u  ;  li-Uahi  = 
"  to  God,"  with  genitive  -i  after  the  preposition  ;  Rabbi  = 
"  Lord  "  with  gen.  -i  to  agree  with  -llahi ;  l-'alamin  =  "  of 
the  worlds  "  genitive  plural  (strong). 

(3)  'ar-Rahmani  r-Rahim  =  The  comjxissionate,  the  merciful 

Both  genitive;  to  agree  with  the  -llahi  preceding,  but  gen.  -i 
not  with  the  second  as  it  comes  at  the  pause  which  ends 
the  verse. 

(4)    MaliM  yomi  d-din  =  King  of  the  day  of  judgment 

Maliki,  gen.  with  -i  still  in  agreement  with  -llahi ;  yomi  gen., 
governed  by  Maliki,  d-din  gen.  in  idafat  (see  p.  82),  but  the 
-i  omitted  at  pause. 

(5)  'lyyaka  nabudu  wa-'iyyaka  =  Thee  do  loe  worship  and 
nasta'in  thee  do  we  ask  for  help 

Instead  of  using  the  pronominal  suffix  in  the  usual  way 
(p.  40)  the  emphatic  particle  'iyya-  with  the  suffixed  pronoun 
is  placed  in  front  of  the  verb,  this  conveys  exceptional 
emphasis,  na'budu  =  "  we  worship,"  verb  'abad,  hence 
'abdullah  =  "  slave  of  God,"  the  -u  at  the  end  of  the  verb 
is    the    classical    termination    of    the    indicative     mood. 


* 


180  APPENDIX    III 

wa-'iyyaka  nasta'in  = "  and  thee  do  we  ask  for  help," 
(i)st  =  Ct.  form  of  the  verb  'an  (medial  w,  i.e.  root  *wn), 
but  indicative  -u  not  added  at  the  end  of  a  verse  :  in  classical 
Arabic  both  the  short  vowels  for  the  cases  of  nouns  and  those 
for  the  moods  of  verbs  are  dropped  in  "  pause  ",  i.e.  at  a 
full  stop. 

(6)  ihdina  s-sirata  1-mustaqim 

ihdina  =  "  guide  us  "  ;  s-sirata-1-mustaqim  =  "  (in)  the  way 
of  the  upright." 

(7)  sirata-lladhina    'an'amta    'alayhim    ghayri    1-maghglubi 
'alayhim  wa-la  (J-dallin 

sirata-lladhina  =  "  the  way  of  those  who,"  (a)lladhina  is  the 
full  classical  form  of  the  relative  which  colloquial  speech 
shortens  to  illi.  'an'amta  'alayhim  =  "  thou  hast  bestowed  on 
them,"  class,  -ta  in  2nd  sing,  of  perfect  where  colloquial  has  -t. 
"  Those  who  thou  hast  bestowed  on  them  "  =  "  those  on 
whom  thou  hast  bestowed."  In  class,  speech  -hum  becomes 
-him  by  assimilation  to  the  preceding  -y-.  ghayri  l-maghglubi 
'alayhim  =  "  not  (those  who  have)  wrath  upon  them  "  ; 
lit.  "  other  than  those  ..."  (ghayr  as  negative),  wa-la  = 
"  nor,"  la  in  class.  Arabic  is  used  simply  for  "  not ",  as  it 
still  is  in  Oman  and  other  southern  parts  but  in  Egypt,  Syria, 
etc.,  it  survives  only  as  "  no  ".  d-(Jallin  =  "  (those  who)  go 
astray  ". 


Appendix  IV 

THE    ALGERIAN    DIALECT 
{Notes  for  tourists,  etc.,  in  Algeria,  Morocco,  etc.) 

The  Arabic  of  the  West  (Maghrabi,  i.e.  Algeria,  Morocco, 
etc.)  is  not  a  different  language,  but  has  some  dialectal 
peculiarities  which  at  first  make  it  appear  very  different 
from  the  Arabic  of  Egypt  and  Syria  but  on  closer  scrutiny 
simply  show  certain  clearly  defined  tendencies  which  can 
be  mastered  without  much  difl&culty. 

The  key  to  these  differences  is  the  accent.  In  Egypt, 
Syria,  and  to  a  great  extent  in  'Iraq,  the  accent  of  stress 
recedes  from  the  end  of  the  word  until  it  falls  upon  a  long 
vowel  or  upon  a  short  followed  by  two  consonants,  thus : — 

ahmar,  beled,  keteb, 

as  no  syllable  has  a  long  vowel  or  double  closure  the  accent 
recedes  to  the  first  syllable, 

darabt,  darabtu,  darabu,  darabet,  gedid 

in  the  first  two  of  these  the  accent  goes  back  until  it  rests 
upon  a  short  followed  by  two  consonants,  in  the  third  it  goes 
back  without  finding  a  double  closure  or  long  (as  the  final 
long  is  not  counted),  and  so  in  the  fourth  word :  in  the  last 
the  -i-  is  long  so  the  accent  goes  back  no  further. 

The  older  accent  was  free  and  was  not  controlled  by  long 
vowels  or  double  closure  and  this  older  usage  survives  in  the 
western  Arabic,  thus  beled,  ket^b,  etc.,  and  the  tendency  is 
to  drop  or  slur  over  the  short  vowel  preceding  the  accent, 


182  APPENDIX   IV 

and  so  we  get  Algerian,  Tunisian,  and  Moroccan  qtel,  kt6b, 
bl6d,  etc.,  for  qetel,  keteb,  beled.  So  ahmar  becomes  hmdr, 
ahad  becomes  had  (cf.  "  eleven "  =  had'asher  on  p.  73), 
akal  becomes  kal  and  akhad  becomes  khad  (p.  132),  etc. 
That  this  change  has  taken  place  in  the  colloquial  of 
Egypt,  Syria,  etc.,  as  in  those  instances  just  noted,  shows 
that  there  also  the  accent  once  was  free  as  in  Maghrabi ; 
it  would  have  been  impossible  to  drop  the  accented  syllable. 
It  is  this  difference  of  accent,  which  at  first  makes  the  western 
Arabic  seem  so  strange,  but  bearing  in  mind  (i)  that  the  accent 
is  free  and  varies  in  position,  often  getting  on  the  last  syllable, 
and  (ii)  that  a  short  vowel  before  the  accent  is  generally 
hurried  over,  very  often  omitted  altogether,  we  find  that  this 
western  speech  offers  no  serious  difficulties.  The  following 
examples  will  indicate  the  characteristic  differences  : — 

Verb.    Perfect. 


ktibt  (ktibit) 

=  /  wrote,  thou  didst  write 

ktibti 

^  thou  (fem.)  .  ,  . 

ktib 

=  he  wrote 

ktibna 

=  we  wrote 

ktibtu 

=  you  wrote 

kitbu 

=  they  wrote 

Imperfect,  both  positions  of  accent  are  in  use,  thus  either- 

yiktib    or    yiktib, 
tiktib  tiktib, 

tiktebi  t'kitebi  (2nd  fem.  sing.) 

Pronoun    ana     or    and, 

6nta    or    entd,  etc. 

sbah  el-khair  =  Good  morning 

t'bark  Allah  =  Bless  God 

el-qalil  min  el-habib  katir      =  Little  from  a  friend  is  much 


1 


APPENDIX  IV  183 

el-*abd    yam m el    wa-r-rabb  =  The  slave  flans,  and  the  Lord 

ikimmel  carries  out  (cf.  p.  130) 

kull  shi  fi  yad  Allah  =  Everything  is  in  God's  hands 

(cf.  p.  90) 

The  Kabyle,  Rif  mountaineers,  etc.,  are  Berbers  and  speak 
the  Berber  language,  which  is  distinct  from  Arabic.  In  some 
districts  (e.g.  Tlemsen  in  Algeria)  where  there  is  contact 
with  the  Berbers  very  often  t  (th)  is  pronounced  like  ts,  thus 
k'tsebts  "  I  wrote  "(=  ketebt),  k'tseb  "  he  wrote  ",  eto.,  but 
these  peculiarities  are  hardly  likely  to  be  met  with  by  the 
ordinary  traveller. 


VOCABULARY 

Nouns 


Some  of  the  rarer  words  which  occur  in  the  examples  are 
not  included  here.  The  notes  (E),  (S),  (I)  denote  words 
peculiar  to  the  dialects  of  Egypt,  Syria,  or  'Iraq  respectively. 
^Vhen  alternative  forms  difEer  only  in  the  dental  aspirate  dh, 
or  th,  the  aspirated  form  is  that  used  in  'Iraq,  the  non-aspirate 
that  in  Sjrria  and  Egypt.  The  sign  (*)  denotes  words  in  -a, 
-e,  which  make  -at,  -et  before  a  suffix,  etc.  (Cf.  p.  41  above.) 
In  all  cases  the  q  commonly  appears  as  '  in  Lower  Egypt,  etc., 
and  g  in  'Iraq  and  Upper  Egypt.  The  forms  in  parentheses 
are  the  plurals. 


Mutton 

=  WTldu* 

bcurber 

=  hallaq 

account 

=  bisab  (-at) 

barley 

=  shi'ir 

address 

=  'anwin 

b<uin 

=  tisht  (teshnt) 

afternoon 

=  'a§r 

basket 

=  miqtaf 

age 

=  'umr 

bat 

=  wetat  (watawit) 

agent 

=  wakil 

bath 

=  hammam 

air 

=  hawa 

beans 

=  ful 

almond 

r=  goz 

beard 

=  daqn  (fern.) 

animal 

=  tuwan  (-at) 

bed 

=  farsh 

ant 

=  namle*  (naml) 

bee 

=  nable*  (naW) 

apostle 

=  rasul  (rosol).  The 

beetle 

=  khunfuse* 

proper  title  for 

(khunfus) 

Muhammad  ia 

bird    (large) 

tera*    (ter) ;     (small) 

rasul     allah  = 

'a§fure*  ('a^fur) 

"  Apostle       of 

blanket 

=  biram  (Hm'ma) 

God" 

blessing 

=  varke* 

apricot 

=  mishmish 

blood 

=  damm 

arrival 

=  wi^ul,  wu?ul 

book 

=  kitab  (kutub) 

ass 

=  himar  (hemir) 

boot 

=  gazma*  (gizam) 

automobile 

=  otomobil 

box 

=  §anduq 

bag 

=  shanta*  (shonat) 

boy 

=  walad         (wilad 

baker 

=  khabbaz 

awlad) 

banana 

=  moze*  (moz) 

bread 

=  'esh  (E.) ;  khubz 

bank  (for 

breakfast 

=  futur 

money) 

=  bank  (benuk) 

bride 

=  'aruse*  ('arayes) 

186 


VOCABULARY 


=  'aris  (arayes) 
=  qantara* 
=  simsar 
=  akh,  akhu- 

(ekhwa,  ikhwan) 
=  zer-ward 
=  gamuse*  (gamus) 
=  baqqa* 
=  tor,  thor  (tiran) 
=  himl,  liuml 
=  shughl 
=  'arba* 
=  koronb 
=  'egl  ('egul) 
=  gemel  (gimal) 
=  mu'asker 
=  tir'a  (tera') 
=  naggar 
=  bammal 
=  qutta*  (-at) 
=  katalog 
=  qarnabit 
=  kursi 
=  shofer 
=  shakk 

=  katkut  (katakit) 
=  tifl  (atfal) 
=  kutera* 
=  kinisa* 
=  sigara* 
=  medina* 


bridegroom 
bridge 
broker 
brother 

bud 

buffalo 

bug 

bull 

burden 

business 

cab 

cabbage 

calf 

camel 

camp 

canal 

carpenter 

carrier 

cat 

catalogue 

cauliflower 

chair 

chauffeur 

cheqiie 

chicken 

child 

cholera 

church 

cigarette 

city 

class 

doud  =  ghem  (gheyum) 

clothes  (see  garment) 

coffee  (drink)  qahwa  ;   (berry)  bunn 

coin  —  'umla* 

colic  =  maghg 

colour  —  lawn,  Ion  (ilwan) 

comb  =  mesht  (amshat) 

condition  =  bal 

conduct  =  tadbir,  sira* 

constipation        =  ensak 

consul  =  qon^ul 

consumption        —  sill 

cook  =  tabbakh 

copper  =  nabaa 

coppersmith         =  nabbas 

corn  =  qamb 

cotton  =  qutn 

cough  —  kubba* 


country 

cover 

cow 

crops 

cucumber 

cup 

cupboard 

custom 

cut-purse 

danger 

daughter 

dawn 

day 

day-break 

death 

deer 

desert 

devil 

diarrhoea 

dinner 

divorce 

dog 

dollar 

door 

dove 

dung 

dust 

ear 

earth 

egg 

electricity 

elephant 

evening 

examination 

exercise 

eye 

face 

family 

fare 

farm 

fast 

father 

favour 

fear 

feast 

fever 

field 

field  mouse 


beled  (bilad) 

gbata 

baqara*  (baqar) 

zira'at 

kheyar 

fingan 

dulab 

'ada 

neshtar  (Turk.) 

kba^ir 

bint 

fagr 

y6m  (iyam) ; 

nehar 
fagr 
mot 

ghazal  (ghozlan) 
9abra  (^ahari) 
sbetan ;  'ifrit 
esbal 


talaq 

kelb  (kilab) 

riyal  (-at) 

bab  (ibwab) 

bamama*  (-at) 

zibl 

turab 

widn  (fern.) 

ard  (fern.)  (ara4i) 

beda* (bed) 

kahrabaiya, 

lekterik 

fil 

mesa 

emteban 

dars 
■  'en 
:  wishsh 

ahl 
:  ugre* 
:  'azba* 
:  9um 
:  ab,  abu- 
:  fadla* 
=  kbof 
=  'id 

:  bumma* 
=  ghet.  (gbi^an) 
:  gird6n 


VOCABUI.ARY 


187 


fig 

=  tin 

heat 

=  barr 

figure 

=  raqam  (arqam) 

heU 

=  gehennem 

file 

=  mabrad 

hiU 

=  teU 

fire 

=  nar 

holiday 

=  fusha* 

fi3h 

=  samaka*  (samak) 

honey 

=  'asl 

fishing 

=  §ed 

horse 

=  hi§an 

fisherman 

=  §ayyad 

hotel 

=  lokanda* 

flat  (apartment) 

=  tabaqe* 

hour 

=  sa'a* 

flower 

=  zahr (?nhur) 

house 

=  bet  (bijmt) ;   dar 

fly 

=  debbane* 

(fern )  (diyar) 

folloicer 

=  tabi'  (-in) 

hunting 

=  9ed 

foot 

=  rigl 

hunter 

=  $ayyad 

fowl 

=  farkha*  (firakh) 

husband 

=  zog 

fox 

=  ta'lab,  tha'lab 

ink 

=  hebr 

(ta'aleb) 

inn 

=  khan  (Pere.) 

friend 

=  §abib 

inspector 

=  nazir 

fruit 

=  tamar 

intelligence 

=  'aql 

garden 

=  genine* 

iron 

=  hadid 

(ganayen) ; 

island 

=  gezira*  (gezayer) 

bustan  (Pere.) 

jackal 

=  ibn  awa 

garment 

=  libas 

jaw 

=  fakk  (feWik) 

garlic 

=  t6m,  th6m 

judge 

=  qadi 

gazelle 

=  ghazal  (ghozlan) 

J«? 

=  ibriq 

gentleman 

=  khawage 

key 

=  miftah  (mafatih) 

gipsy 

=  nawari 

king 

=  melek  (muluk) 

girl 

=  bint 

knife 

=  sikkin 

glass 

=  kubbaya*,  fingan 

knowledge 

=  'ibn 

goat 

=  me'za*  (-at) 

lamb 

=  kharuf  (kherfan) 

God 

=  Allah,  -llah 

lamp 

=  sirag 

gold 

=  dahab 

land 

=  ard 

goose 

=  wizza*  (-at) 

lend 

=  ro9§a9 

government 

=  liukm 

left  (hand) 

=  shemal 

governor 

=  bakim,  wall. 

lemon 

=  lemuna*  (lemun) 

mudir 

lesson 

=  dais 

grapes 

=  'inab 

letter 

=  mektub 

grass 

=  hashish 

(mekatib) ; 

groom 

=  sa'is,  sayis 

gawab  (-at) 

gun 

=  bunduqiye* 

lettuce 

=  khass 

hair 

=  sha'r  (ahe'ur) 

liberty 

=  huniye* 

hairbrush 

=  fursha*  (foraah) 

life 

=  hiya*  (existence); 

half 

=  nu9§ 

nefs    (soul) ; 

hammer 

=  metraqa* 

Bira* 

(matareq) 

light 

=  nar 

hand 

=  yed,  id 

lightning 

=  barq 

handkerchief 

=  mandil 

lion 

=  aaad 

harm 

=  sharr 

locusts 

=  garad 

hat 

=  bum  eta* 

lord 

=  sayyid 

(baranit) 

luggage 

=  'afsh 

hay 

=  deris 

lung 

=  riyya*  (-at) 

head 

=  raa 

lupine 

=  tirmis 

188 


VOCABULARY 


magazine 

oil 

=  zet 

(storehouse)  =  makhzen 

olive 

=  zetun 

maize 

—  durra* 

onion 

=  ba§al 

majesty 

=  galala* 

opinion 

=  fikr 

man 

=  ragil  (rigal) ;  man- 

opportunity 

=  fiir§a* 

kind,  nas ;  old 

orange 

=  bortuqan 

man,       shekh, 

owl 

=  bnma*  (-at) 

'aguz  (Eg.) 

ox 

=  tor,  thor  (tiran) 

manners 

=  'adab 

page  (of  book) 

=  wagh  (awgoh) 

mare 

=  faraa  (afras) 

pain 

=  waga' 

market 

=  suq 

palace 

=  qa^r  (qu^ur) 

marriage 

=  zawag 

palm  (tree) 

=  nakbl,  nakhle* 

measles 

=  hagba* 

(single  tree) 

meat 

=  lahm 

paper 

=  waraq  (awraq) 

medicine 

=  dawa  (adwiya) 

parent 

=  walid 

melon 

=  shammam 

passport 

=  teskari 

merchant 

=  tagir  (tiggar) 

peace 

=  salam,  salame* 

middle 

=  wast 

pen 

=  qalam 

might 

=  quwa 

permission 

=  idhn,  idn,  izn 

mile 

=  mil 

petrol 

=  gaz    (E.),    ghaz 

milk 

=  leven,  baleb 

(S.I.) 

minister 

=  wazir 

physician 

=  bakim 

minute 

=  deqiqa* 

piastre 

=  qirsh  (qurush) 

(daqayeq) 

pig 

=  kbanzir 

money 

=:felus 

(khanazir) 

money-changer 

=  §arraf 

pigeon 

=  bamama  (-at) 

monkey 

=  qerd  (qerud) 

pilgrimage 

=  bagg 

morning 

=  9abah,  eublji 

piper 

=  zamman 

morsel 

=  luqma* 

plcKC 

=  matrab,  mekan 

mosque 

=  gami',  mesgid 

plague 

=  ta'un 

mosquito 

=  namuse*  (namus) 

plant 

=  nabat  (-at) 

mother 

=  umm 

plate 

=  9abn  (9ubun) 

mountain 

=  gebel  (gibal) 

play 

=  le'ab 

mouse 

=  far  (firan) 

police 

=  bull? 

moustaches 

=  shanab  (aahnab) 

pond- 

=  birka* 

mouth 

=  famm  (afmam) 

porter 

=  banimal 

mud 

=  tm 

postman 

=  sa'i  bueta 

mule 

=  baghl,  -e* 

post  offiee 

=  bu^ta* 

(beghal) 

potato 

=  batates 

nail 

=  mesmar 

pound  (money)  gineh  (-at) ;  (weight) 

(mesamir) 

rati 

name 

=  ism 

power 

=  qfiwa 

negro 

=  babeshi 

praise 

=  bamd 

neighbour 

=  gar,  gariye* 

prayer 

=  9ala 

news 

=  khabar  (akhbar) 

price 

=  taman,  ei'r 

night 

=  lei,  lele* 

prison 

=  babs,  sign 

noon 

=  dohr,  zohr 

promise 

=  wa'd 

nose 

=  anf  (enuf ) 

property 

=  mal 

number 

=  'twiad 

prophet 

=  nabi 

officer 

=  zabit  (?ubbat) 

pupil 

=  talmid 

VOCABULARY 


189 


purgative 

=  sharba* 

soap 

=  9abun 

quantity 

=  qadd 

soldier 

=  'askari 

quince 

=  safargel 

son 

=  ibn  (awlad,  abna) 

railuxty 

=  sikket  el-badid 

soup 

=  shorba* 

rain 

=  matar 

speech 

=  kelam 

rat 

=  far  (firan) 

spider 

=  'ankabut 

religion 

=  din 

spirit 

=  ruh  (arwah) 

remainder 

=  baqi 

sponge 

=  isfenge*  (at) 

rice 

=  ruzz 

spoon 

=  mal'aqa* 

right  {hand) 

=  vemin 

(mala'eq) 

ring 

=  rann 

spring     {of     icater),    'ayn     ('uyun); 

river 

=  nahr 

{season)  rabi' 

road 

=  tanq 

star 

=  n^m    (nugum) ; 

roof 

=  9atU 

kawkab 

room 

=  6da 

(kawakib) 

rope 

=  babl 

slaie 

=  bal 

rug 

=  busat  (abd^a) 

station  {railway] 

muhatta*;   station- 

saddle 

=  sarg 

master,  nazir 

el-muhatta 

saddlebag 

=  khurg  (khurag) 

steamer 

=  wabur 

saU 

=  malh 

stick 

=  'a§a  ('u?i) 

sample 

=  namuna 

stomach 

=  batn  (betun) 

(namayin); 

stone 

=  bagar (ahgar) 

'eniyye* 

storm 

=  z6ba'a*(zawabe') 

sand 

=  raml 

street 

=  8hari'(shawari') ; 

school 

=  medrese* 

hara* 

scorpion 

=  'aqrab  ('aqareb) 

sugar 

—  sukkar 

screw 

=  qalawuz  (-at) 

sugar-cane 

=  qa^ab 

sea 

=  bahr 

summer 

=  9ef 

seeds 

=  bizr 

sun 

=  sheins 

self 

=  nef3 

sunset 

=  maghrub 

servant 

—  khaddam 

supper 

=  'asha 

sesame 

=  semsem 

sword 

=  8ef 

shade 

=  zall 

tail 

=  dil,  dhil  (deyul) 

sheep 

=  ghanam 

tailor 

=  khayyat 

ship 

=  markib 

tamarisk 

=  tarf a,  tarfe* 

shop 

=  dukkan 

task 

=  shughl 

shore 

=  shati  (shawafi) 

tea 

=  8hay 

shoulder 

=  kitf 

teacher 

=  mu'allim 

silk 

=  harir 

telegraph 

=  tiligraf 

silver 

=  fadda 

thief 

=  hara  mi  (haram) 

sister 

=  iikht 

thought 

=  fikr 

sky 

=  8ama* 

ticket 

=  teskari 

slave 

=  'abd,  'ebd 

time 

=  zemam  (azmam); 

sleep 

=  TiaTn 

waqt  (awqat) 

small-pox 

=  gidri 

tobacco 

=  dtikhkhan 

smith 

=  tiaddad 

tomato 

=  tamatem 

smoke 

=  dukhkhan 

tongue 

=  lisan  (alsina) 

snail 

=  l^alaziin 

tooth 

=  sinne*  (sinn) 

snake 

=  tu'ban,  thu'ban 

town 

=  beled  (bilad),  cf. 

snow 

=  talg 

city 

190 


VOCABULARY 


traveller 

=  musafir 

widow 

—  armale*  (aramel) 

tree 

=  shagare* 

wife 

=  z6ga*  (z6gat) 

(eshgar) 

wind 

=  rib  (aryab) 

truth 

=  haqq 

window 

=  shebbak 

vacation 

=  f  usha* 

(shababik) 

village 

=  qarya*  (qaraya) 

wine 

=  nebit 

vine 

=  karm  (keram) 

winter 

=  8heta 

vineyard 

=  karm  'inab 

vxyman 

=  mara  (nesa) ;  dd 

virgin 

=  bekr  (bukur) 

woman,    'aguz 

voice 

=  96t  (a^wat) 

('agayez), 

watch 

=  sa'a*  (-at) 

'aguze*  (E.) 

wasp 

=  dabbur  (dababir) 

ivood 

=  khashab 

uxUer 

=  moya 

wool 

=  9uf 

wealth 

=  mai 

world 

=  dunya 

weather 

=  hawa 

worm 

=  dude* (dud) 

week 

=  gtim'a*  (gvima') 

year 

=  sena*  (senin) 

well  (of  water) 

=  bir  (abyar) 

young  man 

=  shabb  (shubban) 

Adjectives 

alive 

=  haiy 

great  (in  size) 

=  kebir    (1)    (in 

angry 

=  za'lan  (2) 

power,  dignity). 

bad 

=  radi  (3) 

'azim  (1) 

beloved 

=  habib  (1) 

green 

=  akhdar  (4) 

black 

=  aswad  (4) 

happy 

=  mesrur,    mabsut 

blessed 

=  mubarak 

(7) 

blind 

=  a'ma  (6) 

hard 

=  9a'b,  ^a'ab 

bliie 

=  azraq  (4) 

heavy 

=  tigil  (1) 

broad 

=  'arid  (1) 

high 

=  'ali  (3) 

cheap 

=  rakhis  (1) 

honest 

=  ?alib  (6) 

cheerful 

=  farban  (2) 

hot 

=  barr 

civilized 

=  mutemodin 

hungry 

=  gu'an  (2) 

cold 

=  band  (of  things) ; 

idle  (see  lazy) 

bardan        (of 

ignorant 

=  gahil  (6) 

persons)  (2) 

ill 

=  marid  (\) 

complete 

=  tamm 

intelligent 

=  'aqil  (6) 

crafty,  cunning 

=  shatir(l) 

lame 

=  a'rag  (5) 

dear  (beloved) 

=  'aziz  (1),  (price) 

lazy 

=  keslan  (2) 

ghali  (3) 

light 

=  sahil 

dead 

=  meyit 

little 

=  qelil  (1) 

deaf 

=  akhra?  (5) 

long 

=  tawil  (1) 

deep 

=  ghawit  (1) 

much 

=  ketir  (1) 

difficult 

=  9a'ab 

neighbouring 

=  qarib  (1) 

distant 

=  ba'id  (1) 

new 

=  gedid  (1) 

dumb 

=  akhras  (5) 

old 

=  qadim  (1) 

foolish 

==  ghashim  (1) 

open 

=  meftub  (7) 

forbidden 

=  baram 

original 

=  a^li  (3) 

generous 

=  kerim  (1) 

poor 

=  faqir  (1) 

good 

=  ^yyib-kher 

present 

=  badir(]) 

VOCABTjXARY 


191 


j>reUy 

=  letif  (1),  kuwayis 

strong 

=  qawi(l) 

prosperous 

=  sa'id  (1) 

suitable 

=  taUq  (1) 

ready  (see  present) 

sweet 

=  holw 

red 

=  a];)inar  (4) 

thirsty 

=  'atshan  (2) 

reliable 

=  salib  (6) 

tired 

=  ta'ban  (2) 

rich 

=  ghani  (3) 

wntrustvDorihy 

=  qabih  (1) 

short 

=  qaair  (1) 

upright 

=  9adiq  (6) 

skilful 

—  mahir  (6) 

us^vl 

=  nafi',  miifid 

small 

=  9aghir  (1), 

vident 

=  shedid  (1) 

sughayir 

watchful 

=  neshit  (1) 

soft 

=  na'im  (6) 

weak 

=  da'if  (1) 

spacious 

=  wasi'  (6) 

wet 

=  mebliil  (7) 

standing 

=  qayim  (6) 

white 

=  abyad  (4) 

stoned  (of  the 

wise 

—  'arif,  'aliiti  (6) 

devil) 

=  ragim  (1) 

ifettow 

=  safra  (4) 

straight 

=  dughri  (3) 

(1)  These  are  adjectives  of  the  qatil  type,  fem.  qatile*. 

(2)  Type  qatlan. 

(3)  Adjectives  with  final  -i. 

(4)  Adjectives  of  colour,  see  p.  92. 

(5)  Adjectives  of  bodily  defect,  see  p.  93. 

(6)  Active  participles  of  verbs. 

(7)  Passive  participles. 


Verbs 

(The  letters  in  parentheses  denote  the  vowels  in  the 
imperfect-imperative.  D,  D*,  Dt,  etc.,  denote  the  derived 
stems  (of.  p.  131)  (1),  (II),  (III)  show  verbs  weak  in  first, 
second,  or  third  radicals  respectively,  whilst  (MG)  denotes 
those  with  second  and  third  consonants  alike.) 


able,  to  be 

=  qadar  (i) 

break 

=  kasar  (a) 

appear 

=  tala'  (u) 

bring   (a    thing). 

gab  (11) ;    person, 

arise 

=  qam  (11) 

haddir(D) 

arrive 

=  wa^l  (i)  (I) 

buy 

=  ishtara  (st,  m) 

ask  (question) 

=  sa"al  (a) 

can  (see  be  able) 

ask  for 

=  ta!ab 

carry  out 

=  kemmil  (D) 

avert 

=  gall(MG) 

close 

=  nafFed    (D)    {11, 

awake 

=  §ahh  (MG) 

ni) 

be 

=  kan  (U),  ear  (11, 

come 

=  ga,   ta'ala,   ta'al 

in   sense   of 

(imperBt.) 

"continue") 

compel 

=  khalla  (III,  D) 

bear 

=  hamel 

concern 

=  kha§§(MG) 

begin 

=  qam  (H) 

converse 

=  tekellim  (Dt) 

192 


VOCABULARY 


continue 
count 
descend 
die 

dispute 

dizzy,  to  be 

do 

drink 

eat 

empty,  be 

enquire 

enter 

fast 

fear 

finish 

forget 

found,  be 

free,  be 

give 

go 

godoum 

go  away 

guide 

handc2(ff 

happen 

hear 

hot,  be 

humiliate 

increase 

journey 

knock 

know 

laugh 

learn 

learn  by  heart 

lengthen 

like 

live 

load 

measure 

meet 

mount 


=  baqa  (III) 

=  'add  (MG) 

=  nizil,  ball  (MG) 

=  mat    (II),    wafi 

(III) 
=  tefattish  (Dt) 
=  dab  (11) 
=  'amal  (a) 
=  shirib 
:-  kal  (I) 
=  f aragh 
:  istafahim  (st) 
=  dakhel 
=  9am  (II) 
=  khaf  (II) 
=  khali? 
:  nesa  (III) 
:  wagad  (I) 
:  fada  (III) 
:  'ata   (III),   idda 

(III) 
:  rab    (II),    mishi 

(III) 
:  nizil 
:  kharag 
=  hada  (III) 
=  kalabsh  (Tnrk.) 
:  ha9al 
=  sami'  (a) 
=  haiT  (MG) 
=  dakh  (II) 
=  zad  (TI) 
=  safir  (D*) 
=  khabbit  (D) 
=  'arif  (i) 
: dabak 
:  te'allam  (Dt) 
=  hafaz 

=  tawwil  (II,  D) 
=  habb  (MG) 
=  'ash  (II) 
:  tiamiml  (D) 
=  kal  (II) 
:  laqa  (III) 
:  rekeb 


must 

=  lazim 

need 

'  =  'az  (II) 

obliged,  be  (see  must) 

open 

=  fatah  (a) 

overtake 

=  lahaq 

pass  by 

=  fat (II) 

pick  up 

=  lamm  (i)  (MG) 

pilgrimage,  go  on 

=  hagg  (MG) 

plan 

=  'amrail  (D) 

pleased,  to  be 

=  tefaddil  (Ut) 

pray 

=  ealla  (III) 

present,  to  he 

=  hader  (a) 

preserve 

=  sahim  (III) 

profit 

=  ham(III) 

read 

=  qara  (III) 

reckon 

=  hasab  (u) 

reduce 

=  naqa? 

refuge,  to  take 

=  'ad  (II) 

return 

=  raga'  (i) 

run  away 

=  gara(III) 

safe,  to  be 

=  sal  am 

satisfied,  to  be 

=  shabi' 

save 

=  sallim  (D) 

say 

=  qal  (II) 

see 

=  shaf  (II) 

seek 

=  talab  (u) 

seize 

=  mLsik 

send 

=  rasal  (i) 

shut 

=  qafal  (u) 

silent,  to  be 

=  seket  (u) 

stretch  out 

=  madd  (III) 

strike 

=  darab  (a) 

stroll 

=  tefessah  (Dt) 

suppose 

=  zami  (MG) 

sweep 

=  kenes 

take 

=  khad(=  akhad) 

talk 

=  kalam 

teach 

=  'alJam  (D^ 

tell 

=  khabbir  (D) 

understand 

=  fahim  (a) 

visit 

=  shaqq  (MG) 

waste 

=  garaf 

will  {of  God) 

=  sha'  (II) 

write 

=  keteb  (u) 

0 


I 


PLEASE  DO  NOT  REMOVE 
CARDS  OR  SLIPS  FROM  THIS  POCKET 

UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO  LIBRARY 


LaArab.Gr  O'Leary,  De  Lacy 

045 3c  Colloquial  Arabic 


feo